L700 Instalation Manual

Sun StorageTek
L700x/L1400x
Tape Libraries and Pass-Thru Port
Installation Manual
Part Number: 95843
Revision: AA
L700x/L1400x
Tape Libraries
and Pass-Thru
Port
Installation Manual
Copyright 2007 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, California 95054, U.S.A. All rights reserved.
Sun Microsystems, Inc. has intellectual property rights relating to technology that is described in this document. In particular, and without limitation,
these intellectual property rights may include one or more of the U.S. patents listed at http://www.sun.com/patents and one or more additional patents or
pending patent applications in the U.S. and in other countries.
This document and the product to which it pertains are distributed under licenses restricting their use, copying, distribution, and decompilation. No part
of the product or of this document may be reproduced in any form by any means without prior written authorization of Sun and its licensors, if any.
Third-party software, including font technology, is copyrighted and licensed from Sun suppliers.
Parts of the product may be derived from Berkeley BSD systems, licensed from the University of California. UNIX is a registered trademark in the U.S.
and in other countries, exclusively licensed through X/Open Company, Ltd.
Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo, Java, AnswerBook2, docs.sun.com, StorageTek, the StorageTek logo, HandBot, StreamLine Library Console, and
Solaris are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and in other countries.
All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. in the U.S. and in other
countries. Products bearing SPARC trademarks are based upon an architecture developed by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
The OPEN LOOK and Sun™ Graphical User Interface was developed by Sun Microsystems, Inc. for its users and licensees. Sun acknowledges the
pioneering efforts of Xerox in researching and developing the concept of visual or graphical user interfaces for the computer industry. Sun holds a non-
exclusive license from Xerox to the Xerox Graphical User Interface, which license also covers Sun’s licensees who implement OPEN LOOK GUIs and
otherwise comply with Sun’s written license agreements.
U.S. Government Rights—Commercial use. Government users are subject to the Sun Microsystems, Inc. standard license agreement and applicable
provisions of the FAR and its supplements.
DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT,
ARE DISCLAIMED, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID.
Copyright 2007 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, Californie 95054, Etats-Unis. Tous droits réservés.
Sun Microsystems, Inc. a les droits de propriété intellectuels relatants à la technologie qui est décrit dans ce document. En particulier, et sans la
limitation, ces droits de propriété intellectuels peuvent inclure un ou plus des brevets américains énumérés à http://www.sun.com/patents et un ou les
brevets plus supplémentaires ou les applications de brevet en attente dans les Etats-Unis et dans les autres pays.
Ce produit ou document est protégé par un copyright et distribué avec des licences qui en restreignent l’utilisation, la copie, la distribution, et la
décompilation. Aucune partie de ce produit ou document ne peut être reproduite sous aucune forme, par quelque moyen que ce soit, sans l’autorisation
préalable et écrite de Sun et de ses bailleurs de licence, s’il y en a.
Le logiciel détenu par des tiers, et qui comprend la technologie relative aux polices de caractères, est protégé par un copyright et licencié par des
fournisseurs de Sun.
Des parties de ce produit pourront être dérivées des systèmes Berkeley BSD licenciés par l’Université de Californie. UNIX est une marque déposée aux
Etats-Unis et dans d’autres pays et licenciée exclusivement par X/Open Company, Ltd.
Sun, Sun Microsystems, le logo Sun, Java, AnswerBook2, docs.sun.com, StorageTek, le logo StorageTek, HandBot, StreamLine Library Console, et
Solaris sont des marques de fabrique ou des marques déposées de Sun Microsystems, Inc. aux Etats-Unis et dans d’autres pays.
Toutes les marques SPARC sont utilisées sous licence et sont des marques de fabrique ou des marques déposées de SPARC International, Inc. aux Etats-
Unis et dans d’autres pays. Les produits portant les marques SPARC sont basés sur une architecture développée par Sun Microsystems, Inc.
L’interface d’utilisation graphique OPEN LOOK et Sun™ a été développée par Sun Microsystems, Inc. pour ses utilisateurs et licenciés. Sun reconnaît
les efforts de pionniers de Xerox pour la recherche et le développement du concept des interfaces d’utilisation visuelle ou graphique pour l’industrie de
l’informatique. Sun détient une license non exclusive de Xerox sur l’interface d’utilisation graphique Xerox, cette licence couvrant également les
licenciées de Sun qui mettent en place l’interface d ’utilisation graphique OPEN LOOK et qui en outre se conforment aux licences écrites de Sun.
LA DOCUMENTATION EST FOURNIE "EN L’ÉTAT" ET TOUTES AUTRES CONDITIONS, DECLARATIONS ET GARANTIES EXPRESSES
OU TACITES SONT FORMELLEMENT EXCLUES, DANS LA MESURE AUTORISEE PAR LA LOI APPLICABLE, Y COMPRIS NOTAMMENT
TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE RELATIVE A LA QUALITE MARCHANDE, A L’APTITUDE A UNE UTILISATION PARTICULIERE OU A
L’ABSENCE DE CONTREFAÇON.
We welcome your feedback. Please contact the Sun Learning Services Feedback System at:
SLSFS@Sun.com
or
Sun Learning Services
Sun Microsystems, Inc.
500 Eldorado Blvd. 06-307
Broomfield, CO 80021
USA
Please include the publication name, part number, and edition number in your correspondence if
they are available. This will expedite our response.
Please
Recycle
Revision AA • 95843
Summary of Changes
EC Date Revision Description

53897 August 1999 First Initial Release
111860 August 2003 Sixteenth Refer to this and previous editions for a description of the
changes.
111893 April 2004 Seventeenth Refer to this and previous editions for a description of the
changes.
111943 December 2004 Eighteenth Refer to this and previous editions for a description of the
changes.
111966 July 2005 W Refer to this and previous editions for a description of the
changes.
129919 March 2006 Y Refer to this and previous editions for a description of the
changes.
114173 May 2007 AA Updated manual with DLT-S4 and Ultrium Gen 4
information. Library firmware must be Version 3.15.02 or
later for DLT-S4 and Ultrium Gen 4 support.
Appendix D: Updated with improved mapping for non-
partitioned library.
95843 Revision AA iii

Sun Confidential: Internal Only
Summary of Changes
iv Revision AA 95843
Contents
Contents
Summary of Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxi
Alert Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii
Mensajes de alerta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxiii
Related Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxiv
Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxvi
StorageTek’s External Web Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxvi
Customer Resource Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxvi
Partners Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxvi
Global Services Support Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii
Documents on CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii
Hardcopy Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii
Safety, Fiber Optic, and ESD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxviii

Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxviii
Lifting Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxix
Shoulder, Elbow, Wrist, and Hand Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxix
Fiber-optic Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxx
Laser Product Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxx
Fiber-optic Cable Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxxi
Fiber-optic Cable Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxii
Rack Safety and Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxii
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Damage Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxxiv
ESD Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxv
ESD-Protection Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxxvi
Prepare the Work Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxxvi
Access the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxxvi
Replace Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxxvi
Clean Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxvii
L700e Door Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxvii
L700e Servo Power Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxvii
95843 Revision AA v
Contents
Seguridad, fibras ópticas y descargas electrostáticas (DES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxviii

Precauciones de seguridad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxxviii
Técnicas de levantamiento de objetos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxxix
Seguridad de hombros, codos, muñecas y manos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxxix
Seguridad de fibras ópticas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xl
Etiqueta del producto láser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xl
Instalación de cables de fibra óptica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xli
Manipulación de cables de fibra óptica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xlii
Seguridad y precauciones del bastidor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xlii
Prevención de daños por descargas electrostáticas (DES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xlv
Precauciones contra descargas electrostáticas (DES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xlv
Procedimiento de protección contra descargas electrostáticas (DES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xlvi
Prepare el área de trabajo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xlvi
Acceda al equipo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xlvi
Sustituya los componentes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xlvii
Limpie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xlvii
Bloqueo de puerta L700e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xlvii
Interrupción servoalimentada L700e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xlvii
1: General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Library Operation Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
MPC and MPCL Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Drive Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Client Direct Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Client Indirect Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Operator and Communication Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Standard Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Optional Library Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Pass-thru Port (L700-PTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Optional Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
StorageTek L-Series Library Admin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
StorageTek Framework Library Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
StorageTek Library Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Tape Drive Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
13U Rack Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Rack Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Redundant AC Power Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Matrix Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
SCSI HVD or LVD Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
SCSI Cable Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
vi Revision AA 95843
Contents
Library SCSI Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Drive SCSI Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
HBA Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Fibre Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Fibre Channel Cable Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Fibre Channel Topologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Switched Fabric Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Arbitrated Loop Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
ESCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
FICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Robotic Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Hand-Camera Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Library Electronic Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Library Power System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
DC Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Power Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Site Power Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
Power Cable Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Physical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
2: Installing the Library and Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Hardware Installation Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Preparing the Library Location (Standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Preparing the Library Location (Seismic Areas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Unpacking the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Removing the Library from the Pallet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Moving the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Removing the Rear Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Removing the Front Facades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Removing the Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Removing the Rear Cover and Door Hinges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Positioning the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Removing the Shipping Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Securing the Library Position (Standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Securing the Library Position (Seismic Areas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Unpacking the Library Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Installing the Expansion Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Installing Tape Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
General Physical Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
95843 Revision AA vii

Contents
Ultrium 2 SCSI and Fibre Channel Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

T9x40 and T10000 Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Installing DLT 7000/8000 SCSI Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Installing SDLT/DLT-S4 SCSI Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Installing DLT-S4 Fibre Channel Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Installing Ultrium Drives—General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Installing IBM Ultrium SCSI Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Installing IBM Ultrium Fibre Channel Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Installing Certance Ultrium Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Installing Hewlett Packard Ultrium SCSI Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Installing Hewlett Packard Ultrium Fibre Channel Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Installing SCSI Drive Cable Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Standard Drive Column 0 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Optional Drive Column 1 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Installing T9x40 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Installing T10000 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Operating Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Library Terminating Power Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Library Single-Ended Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
MPC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
MPCL Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Installing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Installing Fibre Channel Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
T9x40 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
T10000 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Adapting the Library for LVD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Rack Mounted Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
General Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Redundant AC Power Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
3: Installing the L700-PTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
PTP Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Preparing the Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Theta Stop Position for 1/3 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Positioning the Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
viii Revision AA 95843

Contents
Allowing Access to Both Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Removing the Library Side Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Removing the 6-Cartridge Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Attaching the PTP Frame and Leveling the Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Installing PTP Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Master PTP Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Standby PTP Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Installing the PTP Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
SCSI Library-to-Host Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
HVD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
LVD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Fibre Channel Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
PTP Configuration and Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
4: Installing Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

SCSI HVD Cable Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
SCSI High Voltage Differential Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
High Density 68-Pin VHDC Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
High Density 68-Pin Jackscrew Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Centronics 50-Pin Latch to 68-Pin Jackscrew Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
68-Pin MD to 68-Pin Mini-Centronics Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Special SCSI Adapter Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
SCSI Low Voltage Differential Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
SCSI Control Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Connection—General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Sun Server Connection— Single-Ended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Sun Server Connection—High Voltage Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Sun Server Connection—Low Voltage Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
SCSI Drive Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Direct Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Daisy Chain Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Fibre Channel Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Fibre Channel Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Fiber Cable Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Fibre Channel Connection – Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Fibre Channel Connection – Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Ethernet Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Library Power Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Drive Column Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Drive Column—Single Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Drive Column—Two Power Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Connecting Drive Power Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
95843 Revision AA ix
Contents
Routing the Library Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Connecting Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Communication/Service Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Firmware 2.20 and Earlier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Firmware 3.00 and Later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
5: Configuring the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

L700e Capacity Variations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Operator Panel Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Operator Panel Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Library Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Configuration Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Library Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Setting the Library’s SCSI ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Setting the Library Fibre Channel Port 0 Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Port 0 Worldwide ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Library Worldwide ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Enabling or Disabling Fast Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Setting Media Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Setting the Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Setting the Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Installing a Personality Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Setting the Web Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Drive Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
SCSI Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
T9x40 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
LTO Fibre Channel Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Network Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Viewing the Ethernet Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Setting the Library Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Setting the IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Setting the Network Gateway Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Setting the Subnet Mask Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
DNS Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
SNMP - Simple Network Management Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Dynamic Worldwide Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Enabling dWWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Implications for an MPC/MPCL Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Implications for Drive Removal/Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Screen Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
StorageTek L-Series Library Admin Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
x Revision AA 95843
Contents
Auto Clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Cleaning Cartridge Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Cleaning Cartridge Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Enabling Auto Clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Manually Installing Cleaning Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Importing Cleaning Cartridges through the CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Setting the Warning Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Cleaning Cartridge Expiration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Exporting Cleaning Cartridges through the CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Verifying Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Monitoring Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
CAP Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Library Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Remote Users Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Drive Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
CAP Magazine Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
CAP States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Library Personality Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Cleaning Cartridge Usage Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Final Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Initialization Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Initialize and Calibrate Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Vision Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Hand-Camera Assembly Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Audit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Audit Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Audit Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Media Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Drive Targeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Audit of Reserved Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Load Handling Cycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Updating Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Pass-thru Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Download Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Download File Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Recommended Download Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Separate Controller Card Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Combined Controller Card Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Firmware Editions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Firmware 2.xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Firmware 3.00 and Later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
95843 Revision AA xi
Contents
CLI Port - DOS Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49

CLI Port - Hyperterminal Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
6: Testing the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Cartridges and Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
DLT and SDLT Cartridge Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
T9840 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
T9940 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
T10000 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Ultrium Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Ordering Tape Cartridges/Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Cartridge Label Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Installing Diagnostic and Cleaning Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Labeling Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Diagnostic and Cleaning Cartridge Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Reserved Cell Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
In-transit Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Diagnostic/Cleaning Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Preparing DLT Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Manually Loading DLT Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Manually Unloading DLT Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Preparing SDLT/DLT-S4 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Manually Loading SDLT Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Manually Unloading SDLT Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Media Statistics Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Subsystem Operational Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Get–Put Loop Diagnostic Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Mount-Dismount Loop Diagnostic Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
PTP Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Other Diagnostic Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Loading Tapes into the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
CAP Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Placing the Library Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
A: Library Elements and Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
B: SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Domain Name Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
SNMP Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
SNMP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Access Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Management Information Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
xii Revision AA 95843

Contents
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Starting SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
C: StorageTek L-Series Library Admin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Library Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
8-bit Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
Drive Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
Cell Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
16-Bit Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
32-Bit Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
Composite Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
Cartridge Access Port (CAP) Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
PUT Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
GET Counts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9
Library–Wide Drive Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9
Five Minute Job Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
Fifteen Minute Job Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
Individual Drive Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12
D: L1400M Library Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Library Operation Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Library Capacity Variations per Single Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Managing Library Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
Slot Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
L1400M with SN3300 Firmware Version 5.6.10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
L1400M1 (or L1400M with SN3300 Router Firmware
Version 5.6.43, or higher) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Optional Library Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
Optional Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
Backup Resource Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
Standard Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
Installing the Library and Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
Installing the StorageNet 3300 Fibre Channel Router (L1400M Library Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
Installing the L1400 PTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
Installing Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10
Cable Connections to the L1400M Interface Control Module (L1400M1 library only) . . . . . D-10
95843 Revision AA xiii

Contents
Configuring the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12

L1400 Capacity Variations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12
Enable Continuous Capacity (L1400M Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13
Configuring Additional Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-18
L1400M Library with SN3300 Firmware Version 5.6.10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-18
L1400M1 Library (or L1400M Library with SN3300 firmware version 5.6.43, or higher)
D-22
Obtaining a Softkey for Additional Capacity or Library Partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-26
Configuring Slot Balancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-27
Configuring Library Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-35
Add a Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-55
Delete a Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-68
Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-72
Configuring Library Aggregation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-76
Enable Library Aggregation (L1400M1 Library, or L1400M Library with SN3300 firmware
version 5.6.43, or higher) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-76
Disable Library Aggregation (L1400M1 Library or L1400M Library with SN3300 firmware
version 5.6.43, or higher) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-83
Library Elements and Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-88
L1400M Library with SN3300 Firmware Version 5.6.10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-88
L1400M Library with SN3300 Firmware Version 5.6.43, or higher; L1400M1 library, or L1400P1
Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-91
StorageTek L-Series Library Admin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-97
StorageTek Backup Resource Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-97
Software Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-98
Installation: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-98
Operating Environment: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-98
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glossary-1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Index-1
xiv Revision AA 95843

Figures
Figure 1-1. Library Size Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Figure 1-2. Library with Expansion Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Figure 1-3. Cooling Recommendations, Rated to 35 Degrees C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Figure 1-4. Cooling Recommendations, Rated to 40 Degrees C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Figure 1-5. Optional Rack Cooling Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Figure 1-6. Redundant AC Power Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Figure 1-7. Robotic Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Figure 1-8. Hand-Camera Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Figure 1-9. Library Electronic Components (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Figure 1-10. Library Electronic Components (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
Figure 1-11. Physical Dimensions—General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
Figure 2-1. Cable Access Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Figure 2-2. Service Area Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Figure 2-3. Library Floor—Wheel Stud Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Figure 2-4. Unpacking the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Figure 2-5. Physical Dimensions–Detailed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Figure 2-6. Z Column Shipping Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Figure 2-7. Theta Shipping Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Figure 2-8. Z Column Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Figure 2-9. Moving the Z Carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Figure 2-10. Theta Stops—Standalone Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Figure 2-11. Array Lock Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Figure 2-12. Expansion Frame—Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Figure 2-13. Attaching the Expansion Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Figure 2-14. Tape Drive Installation Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Figure 2-15. T9x40 Drive Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Figure 2-16. DLT Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Figure 2-17. Terminating Power Jumper—DLT 7000/8000 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Figure 2-18. Tape Drives—Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Figure 2-19. Terminating Power—SDLT Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Figure 2-20. DLT-S4 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Figure 2-21. Ultrium Drives for HVD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Figure 2-22. Terminating Power—Certance and IBM Ultrium 2/3 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Figure 2-23. Tape Drives—Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Figure 2-24. SCSI Tape Drive Cable Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Figure 2-25. Terminating Power and Operation Jumpers—L700e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
95843 Revision AA xv
Figures
Figure 2-26. Library Control Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54

Figure 3-1. Theta Stop Positions—Library with PTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Figure 3-2. Positioning the Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Figure 3-3. PTP Access Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Figure 3-4. Cover Release Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Figure 3-5. Array Retainer Clip Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Figure 3-6. Array Retainer Clip Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Figure 3-7. PTP Frame Mounting Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Figure 3-8. Library Grommet and Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Figure 3-9. Leveling the Libraries (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Figure 3-10. Leveling the Libraries (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Figure 3-11. Door Interlock Switch Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Figure 3-12. Door Interlock Switch and CSE Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Figure 3-13. PTP Power Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Figure 3-14. Serial Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Figure 3-15. Master and Standby Tiewrap Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Figure 3-16. PTP Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Figure 3-17. Library-to-Host Cabling for PTP Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Figure 4-1. 68-Pin VHDC Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Figure 4-2. High Density 68-Pin Jackscrew Cable Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Figure 4-3. Centronics 50-pin to 68-Pin Jackscrew Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Figure 4-4. 68-Pin Mini-Centronics Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Figure 4-5. 50-pin to 68-Pin Latch, Block and Rail Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Figure 4-6. Fiber Cable Positioning (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Figure 4-7. Fiber Cable Positioning (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Figure 4-8. Drive Column Power Configuration Example
(Two Power Cables). . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Figure 4-9. Library Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Figure 5-1. Standalone Capacity Diagram—1 Drive Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Figure 5-2. Standalone Capacity Diagram—2 Drive Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Figure 5-3. PTP Capacity Diagram—1 Drive Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Figure 5-4. PTP Capacity Diagram—2 Drive Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Figure 5-5. Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Figure 5-6. Example Library Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Figure 6-1. DLT and SDLT Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Figure 6-2. T9840 Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Figure 6-3. T9940 Tape Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Figure 6-4. T10000 Tape Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Figure 6-5. Ultrium Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Figure 6-6. Reserved Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Figure 6-7. Manually Loading DLT Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Figure 6-8. Mounting and Dismounting Cartridges from SDLT Drives (C65573) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
xvi Revision AA 95843

Figures
Figure 6-9. Placing Tapes into Array Cells—T9x40 and T10000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Figure 6-10. Placing Tapes into Array Cells—Ultrium and DLT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Figure 6-11. Loading the CAP—DLT Tape Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Figure 6-12. Loading the CAP—T9x40 Tape Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Figure 6-13. Loading the CAP—T10000 Tape Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Figure 6-14. Loading the CAP—Ultrium Tape Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Figure A-1. Standalone Tape Library Elements—1 CAP, 1 Drive Column (C65077) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Figure A-2. Standalone Tape Library Elements—1 CAP, 2 Drive Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Figure A-3. Standalone Tape Library Elements—2 CAPs, 1 Drive Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Figure A-4. Standalone Tape Library Elements—2 CAPs, 2 Drive Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Figure A-5. PTP Tape Library Elements—1 CAP, 1 Drive Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Figure A-6. PTP Tape Library Elements—1 CAP, 2 Drive Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
Figure A-7. PTP Tape Library Elements—2 CAPs, 1 Drive Column. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
Figure A-8. PTP Tape Library Elements—2 CAPs, 2 Drive Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Figure A-9. MPC/MPCL Card Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Figure A-10. Library Block Diagram (Single Drive Column Power Cable). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Figure A-11. Library Block Diagram (Two Drive Column Power Cables) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
Figure B-1. SNMP and DNS Network Block Diagram Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Figure B-2. Management Information Base Hierarchy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Figure B-3. CLI Help and Help SNMP Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Figure C-1. Library Admin Screen Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Figure D-1. L1400M Rear Equipment Rack Clipnuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
Figure D-2. StorageNet 3300 Fibre Channel Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
Figure D-3. L1400M Library SCSI Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
Figure D-4. L1400M1 Library Interface Controller Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10
Figure D-5. L1400M Library SCSI Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11
Figure D-6. L1400M Library Elements (One Drive Column, No PTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-89
Figure D-7. L1400M Library Elements (Two Drive Columns, No PTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-90
Figure D-8. L1400M/L1400M1, One Drive Column (No PTP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-92
Figure D-9. L1400M/L1400M1, Two Drive Columns (No PTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-93
Figure D-10. L1400M/L1400M1/L1400P1, One Drive Column (With PTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-94
Figure D-11. L1400M/L1400M1/L1400P1, Two Drive Columns (With PTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-95
Figure D-12. L1400M/L1400M1/L1400P1, One Drive Column (with CAP B and PTP) . . . . . . . . . D-96
95843 Revision AA xvii

Tables
Table 1-1. Library Capacity Variations per Single Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Table 1-2. Drive Combinations (per drive column) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Table 1-3. Library Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Table 1-4. Library Optional Features and Conversion Bills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Table 1-5. StorageTek L-Series Library Admin Model/Feature Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Table 1-6. StorageTek Framework Library Monitor Model/Feature Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Table 1-7. StorageTek Library Manager Model/Feature Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Table 1-8. StorageTek Optional Interfaces—Comparisons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Table 1-9. Drive Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Table 1-10. Rack Cooling Conversion Bills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Table 1-11. Redundant AC Power Option Conversion Bills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Table 1-12. SCSI Cable Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Table 1-13. SCSI Device/Bus Types: Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Table 1-14. HVD and LVD Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Table 1-15. Fibre Channel Cables and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Table 1-16. Library Power Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Table 1-17. Maximum Number of Drives on Single AC Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
Table 1-18. L700e Power Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Table 1-19. L700e Weight Variations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Table 1-20. Library Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Table 2-1. Hardware Installation Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Table 2-2. Drive Combinations (per drive column) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Table 4-1. High Voltage Differential Daisy Chain Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Table 4-2. 68-Pin Mini-D to 68-Pin VHDC HVD Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Table 4-3. 68-Pin Mini-D to 68-Pin VHDC Universal Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Table 4-4. 68-Pin High Density Jackscrew Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Table 4-5. Centronics 50-Pin to 68-Pin Jackscrew Cable Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Table 4-6. 68-Pin Mini-Centronics Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Table 4-7. Special SCSI Cable Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Table 4-8. Universal 68-Pin MD to 68-Pin MD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Table 4-9. Fiber Optic Cables: 50 µm Multimode, SC-to-SC Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Table 4-10. LC-to-SC Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Table 4-11. LC-to-LC Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Table 4-12. LC-to-SC Adapter Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Table 5-1. Capacity Variations—1 Drive Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Table 5-2. Capacity Variations—2 Drive Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
xviii Revision AA 95843

Table 5-3. Library/Network Configuration Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Table 5-4. Drive Configuration Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Table 5-5. CAP Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Table 5-6. Library Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Table 5-7. Drive Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Table 5-8. CAP Magazine Slot Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Table 5-9. CAP States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Table 5-10. Personality Module Status/Info Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Table 5-11. Firmware Download Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Table 5-12. Hyperterminal Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
Table 6-1. Ultrium 1 Cartridge Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Table 6-5. Label Examples—Data Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Table 6-6. Label Examples—Diagnostic Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Table 6-7. Label Examples—Cleaning Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Table 6-8. VOLID Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Table A-1. MPC/MPCL Card Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Table B-1. SNMP Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
Table C-1. Library Admin Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
Table C-2. 16-Bit Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Table C-3. 32-Bit Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
Table C-4. CAP PUT Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
Table C-5. CAP GET Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9
Table C-6. Library-Wide Performance—Five Minute Job Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
Table C-7. Fifteen Minute Job Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
Table C-8. Individual Drive Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12
Table D-1. L1400M Library Optional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
95843 Revision AA xix

Tables
xx Revision AA 95843
Preface
The L700e frame replaces the earlier L700 frame. The L700e frame has the capability for
attachment of a pass-thru port (PTP) between two L700e frames.
The L1400M, L1400M1, and L1400MP libraries are enhanced versions of the L700e. The
L1400M has PTP capability when connected to an L1400MP, which is sold with the PTP.
This manual describes how to install the L700e, L1400M Tape Libraries, their associated
tape drives, and the PTP. For installation differences for the L1400M libraries, refer to
Appendix D, “L1400M Library Differences.”
This manual is intended for StorageTek employees and authorized third party service
representatives.
■ Organization
This manual has six chapters and four appendices:
Chapter 1 “General Information” provides an overview of the L700e Tape Library

models and features. It shows the location of major system components
and lists physical, environmental, and power requirements for the library.
Chapter 2 “Installing the Library and Drives” describes the procedures for
unpacking and installing the library and tape drives.
Chapter 3 “Installing the L700-PTP” explains how to connect two libraries with a
pass-thru port.
Chapter 4 “Installing Cables” describes how to connect the library and tape drives to
the client system.
Chapter 5 “Configuring the Library” describes how to configure the library and tape
drives for operation with the client.
Chapter 6 “Testing the Library” describes various tape cartridges and procedures to
test the library and tape drives before placing them online.
Appendix A “Library Elements and Diagrams” provides diagrams of all cartridge
locations within the tape library, an illustration of the MPC/MPCL logic
card, and block diagrams of the library.
Appendix B “SNMP” provides information regarding Simplified Network
Management Protocol.
Appendix C “StorageTek L-Series Library Admin” supplies the information needed to
install and configure the StorageTek L-Series Library Admin tool.
95843 Revision AA xxi

Appendix D “L1400M Library Differences” identifies how the L1400M library
installation differs from the L700e.
Glossary The Glossary defines relevant terms and acronyms.
Index The Index assists in locating information in this manual.
■ Alert Messages
Alert messages call your attention to information that is especially important or that has a
unique relationship to the main text or graphic.
Note: A note provides additional information that is of special interest. A note might
point out exceptions to rules or procedures. A note usually, but not always,
follows the information to which it pertains.
CAUTION:
A caution informs the reader of conditions that might result in damage to
hardware, corruption of data, or corruption of application software. A
caution always precedes the information to which it pertains.
WARNING:
A warning alerts the reader to conditions that might result long-term
health problems, injury, or death. A warning always precedes the
information to which it pertains.
■ Mensajes de alerta
Los mensajes de alerta llaman la atención hacia información de especial importancia o
que tiene una relación específica con el texto principal o los gráficos.
Nota: Una nota expone información adicional que es de interés especial. Una nota
puede señalar excepciones a las normas o procedimientos. Por lo general, aunque
no siempre, las notas van después de la información a la que hacen referencia.
PRECAUCIÓN:
Una precaución informa sobre situaciones que podrían conllevar daños
del hardware, de los datos o del software de aplicación. Las
precauciones van siempre antes de la información a la que hacen
referencia.
ADVERTENCIA:
Una advertencia llama la atención sobre condiciones que podrían
conllevar problemas de salud crónicos, lesiones o muerte. Las
advertencias van siempre antes de la información a la que hacen
referencia.
xxii Revision AA 95843

■ Conventions
Typographical conventions highlight special words, phrases, and actions in this
publication.
Item Example Description of Convention

Buttons MENU Text and capitalization follow label on
product
Commands Mode Select Initial cap
Document titles System Assurance Guide Italic font
Emphasis not or must Italic font
File names fsc.txt Monospace font
Hypertext links Figure 2-1 on page 2-5 Blue (prints black in hardcopy publications)
Indicators Open Text and capitalization follow label on
product
Jumper names TERMPWR All uppercase
Keyboard keys <Y> Text and capitalization follow label on
<Enter> or product; enclosed within angle brackets
<Ctrl+Alt+Delete>
Menu names Configuration Menu Capitalization follows label on product
Parameters and variables Device = xx Italic font
Path names c:/mydirectory Monospace font
Port or connector names SER1 Text and capitalization follow label on
product; otherwise, all uppercase
Positions for circuit breakers, ON Text and capitalization follow label on
jumpers, and switches product; otherwise, all uppercase
Screen text (including screen downloading Monospace font
captures, screen messages, and
user input)
Switch names Power Text and capitalization follow label on
product
URLs http://www.storagetek.com Blue (prints black in hardcopy publications)
95843 Revision AA xxiii

■ Related Publications
Publications relating to the L700x/L1400x Tape Libraries are listed below.
L700x/L1400x Tape Library Documentation Part Number

L700x/L1400x Tape Library and Pass-Thru Port Operator’s Guide 95845
L700x/L1400x Tape Library and Pass-Thru Port Service Manual 95846
L700x/L1400x Tape Library Illustrated Parts Catalog 95847
L180/L700e/L1400x Tape Libraries and PTP Interface Reference 95869
Manual, SCSI and Fibre Channel
L180/L700x/L1400x Tape Libraries General Information Manual MT9111
L180/L700x/L1400x Tape Library Ordering and Configuration MT9112
Guide
StorageTek Backup Resource Monitor User Guide at:
https://www.support.storagetek.com/globalnavigation/support/customer/default.htm
Tape Drive Documentation Part Number

DLT 7000 Tape Drive Product Manual 313134501
DLT part:
DLT 8000 Tape Drive Product Manual
81-60118-02
DLT part
DLT S-4 Tape Drive Product Manual
81-81574-01
Quantum part:
Super DLT 220 Product Manual
81-80000-01
CD included
Super DLT 600 Product Manual
with drive
100089901 -
Hewlett Packard Ultrium Tape Drive Manual CD included
with drive
CD included
IBM® Ultrium Tape Drive Manual
with drive
Open Systems Tape Drives Information Manual MT 9120
100089801 -
Certance Ultrium Tape Drive Product Manual CD included
with drive
T9840 Tape Drive User’s Reference Manual 95739
T9940 Tape Drive Operator’s Guide 95989
xxiv Revision AA 95843

Tape Drive Documentation Part Number
T9x40 Tape Drive Installation Manual 95879
T9x40 Tape Drive Service Reference Manual 95740
T10000 Tape Drive Operator’s Guide 96174
T10000 Tape Drive Installation Manual 86173
T10000 Tape Drive Service Manual 96175
Publications regarding ACSLS software:
ACSLS Publications Part Number

Automated Cartridge System Library Software: System Administrator’s Guide 112194201
Some ACSLS, Solaris, and AIX documentation may also be obtained at:
http://www.storagetek.com/products/category_page2009.html
Publications regarding the APC (AC Uninterruptible Power Source):
APC Power Supply Information Part Number

L180/700x/L1400x Tape Libraries Uninterruptible Power Supply Reference 96047
Manual
APC Uninterruptible Power Supply manuals and online information.
Available from APC or see:
www.apc.com.
Publications regarding StorageTek software products:
StorageTek Software Products

For a list of online list of StorageTek software products, refer to:
http://www.storagetek.com/products/storage_device_software.html
Publications regarding other topics:
Other Publications Part Number

American National Standard Dictionary for Information Processing ANSI X3/TR-1-82
Systems
Code for Information Interchange ANSI X3.4-1977
Fibre Optics User's Guide 9433
Magnetic Tape Labels and File Structure for Information Interchange ANSI X3.27-1978
Recorded Magnetic Tape and Cartridge for Information Interchange ANSI X3B5/87-009
95843 Revision AA xxv

Other Publications Part Number
SCSI-2 ANSI X3T9.2/86-009
ANSI X3T9.2/91-
SCSI-3 Parallel Interface (SPI)
010R7
Small System Computer Interface ISO 9316:1989
■ Additional Information
StorageTek offers several methods for you to obtain additional information. Please use
one of these methods when you want to obtain the latest edition of this or any other
StorageTek publication.
StorageTek’s External Web Site

StorageTek’s external Web site provides marketing, product, event, corporate, and service
information. In addition, the external Web site serves as an entry point to the Customer
Resource Center (CRC) and to the e-Partner site. The external Web site is accessible to
anyone with a Web browser and an Internet connection.
The URL for the StorageTek external Web site is http://www.storagetek.com
Customer Resource Center

StorageTek’s CRC is a Web site that enables members to resolve technical issues by
searching code fixes and technical documentation. CRC membership entitles you to other
proactive services, such as HIPER subscriptions, technical tips, answers to frequently
asked questions, addenda to product documentation books, and online product support
contact information. Customers who have a current warranty or a current maintenance
service agreement may apply for membership by clicking on the Request Password
button on the CRC home page. StorageTek employees may enter the CRC through
PowerPort.
The URL for the CRC is http://www.support.storagetek.com
Partners Site
StorageTek’s Partners site is a Web site that provides information about products,
services, customer support, upcoming events, training programs, and sales tools to
support StorageTek’s Partners. Access to this site, beyond the Partners Login page, is
restricted. On the Partners Login page, StorageTek employees and current partners who
do not have access can request a login ID and password and prospective partners can
apply to become StorageTek resellers.
The URL for the Partners site is http://members.storagetek.com
xxvi Revision AA 95843

Global Services Support Tools
StorageTek’s Global Services Support Tools site provides tools that aid in the sales and
support of StorageTek’s products and services. This is an internal Web site for
StorageTek employees.
The URL for the Global Services Support Tools is http://wwssto.stortek.com
Documents on CD
Documents on CD (3106600xx) contains portable document format (PDF) files of
StorageTek’s product publications. To order Documents on CD, contact your local
Customer Services Logistics Depot. Documents on CD is only for StorageTek employees.
Hardcopy Publications
You may order paper copies of publications listed on the CRC or included on the
Documents on CD.
Service publications have numeric part numbers. To order paper copies of service
publications, contact your local Customer Services Logistics Depot.
Marketing publications have alphanumeric part numbers. To order paper copies of
marketing publications, do one of the following:
• Visit StorageTek’s PowerPort and select alphabetical listings under “L” or select
Online Forms. Then search for Literature Distribution. Follow the instructions
on the Literature Distribution Web page.
• Send e-mail to DistrL@louisville.stortek.com
95843 Revision AA xxvii

Safety, Fiber Optic, and ESD
This section covers topics that are essential to your safety when operating the library.
Please read these instructions carefully.
■ Safety Precautions
WARNING:
Potential injury: On-the-job safety is important; therefore, observe the
following safety precautions while you are engaging in any maintenance
activity. Failing to follow these precautions could result in serious injury.
Remove all conductive jewelry, such as watches and rings, before you
service powered-on equipment.
• Avoid electrical shock. Be careful when you work near power connectors and
supplies.
• Power-off the equipment that is being serviced before you remove a field replaceable
unit (FRU) or other component. Remember that dangerous voltages could still be
present in some areas even though power is off.
• Ground all test equipment and power tools.
• Lift objects properly; read the information in “Lifting Techniques” on page xxix
• Do not remove, cut, or relocate any floor tiles indiscriminately. Before you
manipulate floor tiles, be sure that you understand the customer’s environment and
receive the customer’s approval. Remember, each situation is different.
• Enforce good housekeeping practices in the equipment area to help prevent fire and
accidents.
Note: Important things to investigate and to be aware of include the use of Halon®
gas, under-the-floor smoke detectors, and cables to other equipment installed
nearby.
xxviii Revision AA 95843

Lifting Techniques
Lifting, regardless of how much or how little, can create serious back stress. If you follow
these guidelines, you can reduce the risk of back injury:
• Do not twist your body to pick up something or to put it down. Twisting puts
extreme pressure on your back, especially when you lift or carry objects. Instead of
twisting, make the task two separate moves; first lift, and then use your feet to turn
your body.
• Plan the lift: first examine the object and then determine how it will be lifted and
where it will be placed.
• Choose the appropriate lifting technique. Examine the weight, size, location,
frequency, and direction of the lift. Plan to avoid awkward postures, and determine if
material-handling aids are needed.
• Place your feet shoulder-width apart, and place one foot a little behind the other.
Keep your back straight because even light loads can significantly increase pressure
on your spine when you lean forward.
• Whenever you can, grip the load with your whole hand, and use two hands.
• Carry objects at elbow height and close to your body. The farther away you hold an
object, the more force it puts on your lower back.
• Lift with your legs instead of your back. Leg muscles are some of the strongest in the
body. When you squat and lift with your legs, you can lift more weight safely.
• Alternate lifting tasks with tasks that are less stressful to the same muscles. This
technique ensures that your muscles have some recovery time.
Shoulder, Elbow, Wrist, and Hand Safety

Follow these guidelines to minimize the possibility of injury to your shoulders, elbows,
wrists, and hands.
• Work within your safety zone—the area between shoulder level and knuckle level of
your lowered hands. You face less chance of injury when you work or lift in this area.
• Keep your elbows bent to keep loads close to your body and to decrease the amount
of force necessary to do the job. If you use this posture, you will put less weight and
pressure on your shoulder.
• Be sure to keep your wrists straight. Avoid bending, extending, or twisting your
wrists for long periods of time.
• Do not use a pinch grip to lift large or heavy loads because the way you lift also can
affect the tendons in your hand. When you grasp an object between your thumb and
fingers, you put a lot of tension on hand and wrist tendons. Use both hands—use
one for a while, and then use the other—to give them rest.
95843 Revision AA xxix

■ Fiber-optic Safety
WARNING:
Eye hazard. Never look directly into a fiber-optic cable, a fiber-optic
connector, or a laser transceiver module. Hazardous conditions might
exist from laser power levels that are capable of causing injury to the
eye.
Be especially careful when using optical instruments with this

equipment. Such instruments might increase the likelihood of eye injury.
The laser transceivers in fiber-optic equipment can pose dangers to personal safety.
Ensure that anyone who works with this StorageTek equipment understands these
dangers and follows safety procedures. Ensure that the optical ports of every laser
transceiver module are terminated with an optical connector, a dust plug, or a cover.
Each fiber-optic interface in this StorageTek Fibre Channel equipment contains a laser
transceiver that is a Class 1 Laser Product. Each laser transceiver has an output of less
than 70 μW. StorageTek’s Class 1 Laser Products comply with EN60825-1(+A-11) and
with sections 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 of the Food and Drug Administration (FDA)
regulations.
WARNING:
The use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other
than those specified herein might result in hazardous radiation
exposure.
The following translations are for users in Finland and Sweden who wish to identify laser
safety and classification:
CLASS 1 LASER
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE
KLASSE 1 LASER APPARAT
Laser Product Label

In accordance with safety regulations, a label on each StorageTek Fibre Channel product
identifies the laser class of the product and the place and date of the manufacturer. The
label appears on top of a Fibre Channel tape drive and near the Fibre Channel connectors
on a Fibre Channel tape library. A copy of the label is shown here:
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

LASER KLASSE 1
APPAREIL A LASER DE CLASSE 1
COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11
xxx Revision AA 95843

Fiber-optic Cable Installation
Follow these guidelines when you install fiber-optic cables:
1. Cable routing:
• Raised floor: You may install fiber-optic cables under a raised floor. Route them
away from any obstruction, such as existing cables or other equipment.
• Cable tray or raceway: Place the cables in position; do not pull them through
the cable tray. Route the cables away from sharp corners, ceiling hangers, pipes,
and construction activity.
• Vertical rise length: Leave the cables on the shipping spool, and lower them
from above; do not pull the cables up from below. Use proper cable ties to
secure the cable.
• General: Do not install fiber-optic cables on top of smoke detectors.
2. Cable management:
• Leave at least 4.6 m (15 ft) of cable at each end for future growth.
• Use strain reliefs to prevent the weight of the cable from damaging the
connector.
• Review all information in this manual and in any related manuals about safely
handling fiber-optic cables.
3. Connector protection:
• Insert connectors carefully to prevent damage to the connector or fiber.
• Leave the connector’s protective cover in place until you are ready to make
connections.
• Replace the connector’s protective cover when the connector is disconnected.
• Clean the connector before making a connection. Make sure that there are no
obstructions and that keyways are aligned.
95843 Revision AA xxxi

Fiber-optic Cable Handling
Observe these precautions when you handle fiber-optic cables:
• Do not coil the cable to less than 96 mm (3.75 in.) in diameter.
• Do not bend the cable to less than 12 mm (0.5 in.) in radius. StorageTek
recommends that a cable’s bend radius be no less than 20 times the diameter of the
cable.
• Do not pull on the cables; carefully place them into position.
• Do not grasp the cables with pliers, grippers, or side cutters; do not attach pulling
devices to the cables or connectors.
• Keep cables away from sharp edges or sharp protrusions that could cut or wear
through the cable; make sure that cutouts in the equipment have protective edging.
• Protect the cable from extreme temperature conditions.
• Install the connector’s protective cover whenever the connector is not connected.
■ Rack Safety and Precautions

WARNING:
Possible personal injury:
• More than one person might be required to install equipment into the
library’s rack or to remove equipment from the library’s rack.
• Personnel should take adequate precautions when they are moving a

library that contains rack-installed equipment. The weight of some
rack equipment might alter the height of the library’s center of
gravity. This condition might cause the library to tip during a move.
Observe the following safety and handling precautions when you are installing equipment
into the library’s rack:
CAUTION:
Potential equipment damage: Do not exceed the maximum allowable
weight (136 kg [300 lb]) and U-height (13U) for equipment in the rack area
of this library.
• Ensure that the equipment has UL listing (listing by Underwriters’ Laboratories),

CSA certification (certification by the Canadian Standards Association), and CE
compliance (compliance with the European Council’s directives and standards).
• Understand that the library does not supply power to the rack area. So ensure that
the rack-installed equipment has an adequate power source.
xxxii Revision AA 95843

Note: If you remove power from the library by using the library’s power switch, the
rack-installed equipment will remain powered-on.
• Follow the manufacturer’s guidelines to position, to support, and to fasten the
equipment in the rack.
• Locate the equipment so that it does not block or hinder any ventilation openings in
the library’s rack area. For example, do not block library or drive exhaust areas, the
electronic module exhaust area, perforated metal, or other similar ventilation.
• Locate the equipment so that the library doors adequately clear the equipment when
you close them.
• Install the equipment from the bottom of the rack to the top of the rack; StorageTek
recommends that you place the heaviest items near the bottom of the rack.
• Ensure that any equipment that you install within the rack is adequately cooled. The
library’s internal ambient temperature should not exceed the recommended operating
temperature. Base cooling considerations upon the power dissipation within the rack
space as well as upon the ambient room conditions that are external to the library.
You must provide cooling for moderate power dissipation within the rack space.
• Ensure that the equipment in the rack does not create an overcurrent condition,
whether equipment is connected directly to the branch circuit or to a power
distribution strip.
Ensure that the equipment in the rack has reliable earth ground, whether equipment is
connected directly to the branch circuit or to a power distribution strip.
WARNING:
Possible personal injury:
• More than one person might be required to install equipment into the
library’s rack or to remove equipment from the library’s rack.
• Personnel should take adequate precautions when they are moving a

library that contains rack-mounted equipment. The weight of some
rack equipment might alter the height of the library’s center of
gravity. This condition might cause the library to tip during a move.
CAUTION:
Potential equipment damage: Do not exceed the maximum allowable
weight (136 kg [300 lb]) and U-height (17U) for equipment in the rack area
of this library.
Observe the following safety and handling precautions when you are installing equipment
into the library’s rack:
• Ensure that the equipment has UL listing (listing by Underwriters’ Laboratories),
CSA certification (certification by the Canadian Standards Association), and CE
compliance (compliance with the European Council’s directives and standards).
95843 Revision AA xxxiii

• Understand that the library does not supply power to the rack area. So ensure that
the rack-mounted equipment has an adequate power source.
Note: If you remove power from the library by using the library’s power switch, the
rack-mounted equipment will remain powered on.
• Follow the manufacturer’s guidelines to position, to support, and to fasten the

equipment in the rack.
• Locate the equipment so that it does not block or hinder any ventilation openings in
the library’s rack area. For example, do not block library or drive exhaust areas, the
electronic module exhaust area, perforated metal, or other similar ventilation.
• Locate the equipment so that the library’s doors adequately clear the equipment
when you close them.
• Install the equipment from the bottom of the rack to the top of the rack; StorageTek
recommends that you place the heaviest items near the bottom of the rack.
• Ensure that any equipment that you place within the rack is adequately cooled. The
library’s internal ambient temperature should not exceed the recommended operating
temperature. Base cooling considerations upon the power dissipation within the rack
space as well as upon the ambient room conditions that are external to the library.
You must provide cooling for moderate power dissipation within the rack space.
• Ensure that the equipment in the rack does not create an overcurrent condition,
whether equipment is connected directly to the branch circuit or to a power
distribution strip.
• Ensure that the equipment in the rack has reliable earth ground, whether equipment
is connected directly to the branch circuit or to a power distribution strip.
■ Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Damage Prevention

Anyone who handles ESD-sensitive components must be aware of the damage that ESD
can cause to electronic components and must take the proper precautions to prevent it.
Also, anyone who performs maintenance on StorageTek equipment must complete an
ESD-basics course.
CAUTION:
Potential equipment damage: Handle ESD-sensitive components only
under ESD-protected conditions. To meet this requirement, always use
the Field Service Grounding Kit (PN 4711) and always follow these ESD
precautions and procedures when you are servicing StorageTek
equipment or handling ESD-sensitive components.
xxxiv Revision AA 95843

ESD Precautions
Always take the following general precautions when you work with ESD-sensitive
components:
• Wear ESD protection whenever you install, remove, maintain, or repair StorageTek
equipment.
• Keep ESD-sensitive printed-circuit components in their ESD-protective packages
until you have taken all ESD-preventive steps and you are ready to install the
component.
• Do not allow anyone to touch or handle an unprotected ESD-sensitive component
unless that person has taken all ESD precautions.
• Reinstall all equipment covers and close all equipment doors after you have
completed the work.
• If the grounding-kit work surface has been exposed to temperatures above 66ºC
(150ºF) or below 4.5ºC (40ºF), acclimate the work surface to room temperature
before you unroll it.
• Immediately place any component that you have removed into an ESD-protective
package.
• Keep the grounding-kit work surface clean.
Note: To clean the work surface, use a mild detergent and water, and make sure
that the surface is completely dry before you use it.
• Periodically check the electrical resistance of the ground cord and the wrist-strap coil
cord.
Note: The ground cord should measure less than 1.2 MΩ, and the coil cord should
measure between 0.8 and 1.2 MΩ. Repair or replace the cords if they no
longer meet these requirements.
95843 Revision AA xxxv

ESD-Protection Procedure
Remember that each customer environment is different. Address all the customer’s
concerns before you work on any equipment.
Prepare the Work Area

1. Before you service the equipment, unfold the grounding-kit work surface completely
and place it on a convenient surface.
2. Attach one end of the ground cord to the work surface; secure the snap fastener.
Note: You will attach the free end in a later step.
3. Slip on an ESD wrist strap. Make sure that the strap is comfortable and makes
contact with the entire circumference of your wrist.
4. Snap one end of the coil cord to the wrist band.
Access the Equipment

5. Carefully open the doors to the equipment or remove the covers from the
equipment. Do not touch any internal components.
CAUTION:
Be sure that you are properly grounded before you touch any internal
components.
6. Attach the free end of the coil cord to the most appropriate place:
a. If you are working on components from a small piece of equipment, attach the
free end of the coil cord to the grounding-kit work surface. In addition, be sure
that you touch an unpainted metal surface on the equipment before you touch an
internal component.
b. If you are working on components from a large piece of equipment, attach the
free end of the coil cord to a grounding jack or to an unpainted metal surface
inside the equipment.
Replace Components
7. Remove the defective component and place it on the work surface.
8. Remove the replacement component from its ESD-protective package, and install
the component in the equipment.
9. Place the defective component in the ESD-protective package.
xxxvi Revision AA 95843

Clean Up
10. Disconnect the ground cords from the equipment.
11. Reinstall all equipment covers and close all equipment doors.
12. Disconnect the coil cord from your wrist, and, if necessary, disconnect the ground
cord from the work surface.
13. Properly store the work surface and the other Field Service Grounding Kit items.
■ L700e Door Interlock

A safety interlock (located behind the left front door) is provided on the tape library.
When the left front door is opened, the interlock immediately generates a servo power
interrupt (SPI) that disables all tape library motors. This prevents motors from operating
while the library door is open.
When two libraries are connected by a PTP, opening the left front door of either library
will automatically suspend pass-thru operations. Operations inside the library with the
open door will also stop, while the other library’s operation will continue.
■ L700e Servo Power Interrupt

An additional safety feature is the MPC/MPCL card generated servo power interrupt. If
a library motor is determined to be out-of-range by the MPC/MPCL card, the processor
card will generate a SPI to turn off drive voltage to the faulty motor. This prevents a
servo runaway condition until the cause of the problem can be determined.
95843 Revision AA xxxvii

Seguridad, fibras ópticas y descargas
electrostáticas (DES)
Esta sección expone temas que son esenciales para seguridad al trabajar con la biblioteca.
Por consiguiente, rogamos leer detenidamente estas instrucciones.
■ Precauciones de seguridad
Posibles lesiones: la seguridad durante el trabajo es importante; por
ello, atienda a las siguientes precauciones de seguridad mientras esté
realizando alguna actividad de mantenimiento. El incumplimiento de
dichas precauciones puede conllevar graves lesiones.
Antes de realizar cualquier tarea en equipos eléctricos conectados,

quítese las joyas y accesorios conductores de electricidad, como relojes
y anillos.
• Evite las descargas eléctricas. Tenga cuidado al trabajar en la proximidades de

conectores y alimentaciones eléctricas.
• Antes de extraer unidad sustituible in situ u otro componente, apague el equipo y
desconéctelo de la red eléctrica. Recuerde que, incluso si están apagados, en algunas
áreas pueden quedar tensiones peligrosas.
• Ponga a tierra todos los equipos de prueba y herramientas eléctricas.
• Para levantar objetos, consulte la información de
“Técnicas de levantamiento de objetos”(véase a continuación).
• No quite, corte ni cambie de lugar indiscriminadamente las baldosas. Antes de
manipular baldosas, asegúrese de conocer el entorno del cliente y de recibir su
autorización. Recuerde que cada situación es diferente.
• Aplique las prácticas adecuadas de limpieza en el área del equipo para prevenir
incendios y accidentes.
Nota: Entre los factores importantes que deben tenerse en cuenta es la presencia de gas
Halón®, detectores de humo subterráneos y cables conductores a otros equipos
instalados en las proximidades.
xxxviii Revision AA 95843

Técnicas de levantamiento de objetos
El levantar equipos o componentes, independientemente de su peso o tamaño, puede provocar
serias lesiones lumbares. Siguiendo estas directrices podrá reducir los riesgos de lesiones.
• No incline el cuerpo para levantar o bajar algo. Esta posición supone una tensión
extrema para la espalda, en especial al levantar o transportar objetos. En lugar de
inclinarse, efectúe dos movimientos: primero levante el componente y, a
continuación, utilice los pies para girar el cuerpo.
• Planifique el levantamiento: primero examine el objeto y, a continuación, determine
cómo lo levantará y dónde lo colocará.
• Seleccione la técnica de levantamiento adecuada. Examine el peso y tamaño del
objeto, su ubicación y frecuencia y dirección en que vaya a levantarlo. La planificación
debe hacerse de tal modo que se eviten posturas incómodas. Determine si son
necesarios accesorios para la manipulación de materiales.
• Separe bien las piernas y coloque una ligeramente detrás de la otra. Mantenga la
espalda recta, porque incluso pesos ligeros pueden incrementar significativamente la
presión sobre la espina dorsal al inclinarse hacia adelante.
• En la medida de lo posible, sostenga la carga con toda la mano, y utilice ambas manos.
• Transporte los objetos a la altura del codo y próximos a su cuerpo. Cuanto más lejos
tenga que transportar un objeto, más presión aplicará sobre la zona lumbar.
• Levante el objeto haciendo fuerza con las piernas, y no con la espalda. Los músculos
de las piernas se cuentan entre los más fuertes del cuerpo. Al acuclillarse y levantar un
peso con las piernas, tendrá mayor tolerancia al peso.
• Alterne estas tareas con otras menos pesadas para los mismos músculos. De este
modo, los músculos dispondrán de un cierto tiempo de recuperación.
Seguridad de hombros, codos, muñecas y manos

Siga estas instrucciones para reducir al mínimo las posibilidades de lesionarse los
hombros, codos, muñecas y manos.
• Trabaje dentro de su zona de seguridad, el área entre el nivel de los hombros y el nivel
de los nudillos. Trabajando o levantando objetos dentro de esta área se expondrá a
menos probabilidades de lesiones.
• Mantenga los codos inclinados para mantener las cargas próximas a su cuerpo y
reducir la fuerza necesaria para realizar la tarea. Con esta postura, aplicará menos
peso y presión sobre los hombros.
• Asegúrese de mantener las muñecas rectas. Evite doblarlas, extenderlas o torcerlas
durante períodos de tiempo prolongados.
• No levante cargas grandes o pesadas con el puño cerrado, porque el modo de
levantarlas también afecta a los tendones de la mano. Al tomar un objeto entre el
pulgar y los dedos se aplica mucha tensión a las manos y tendones de las muñecas.
Utilice ambas manos alternativamente, para permitir que descansen.
95843 Revision AA xxxix

■ Seguridad de fibras ópticas
Riesgo para la vista. Nunca mire directamente el interior de un cable de
fibra óptica, un conector de fibra óptica o un módulo transceptor de
láser. Los niveles de potencia del láser pueden conllevar situaciones de
riesgo, susceptibles de lesionar la vista.
Tenga especial cuidado al utilizar instrumentos ópticos con estos

equipos. Dichos instrumentos pueden incrementar las probabilidades
de lesiones oculares.
Los transceptores de láser de los equipos de fibra óptica pueden suponer un peligro
para la seguridad física. Asegúrese de que toda persona que trabaje con estos equipos de
StorageTek entienda los peligros y siga los procedimientos de seguridad. Asegúrese de
que todos los puertos ópticos de los módulos transceptores de láser estén terminados
con un conector óptico, una cubierta o un tapón de protección contra el polvo.
Todas las interfaces de fibra óptica de estos equipos de canal de fibra de StorageTek contienen
un transceptor de láser, categorizado como Producto láser de Clase 1. Cada transceptor de
láser tiene una salida inferior a 70 μW. Los productos de láser de clase 1 de StorageTek
cumplen las normas EN60825-1(+A-11) y las secciones 21 CFR 1040.10 y 1040.11 de las
normas de la Administración para la Calidad de Alimentos y Medicamentos (FDA).
El uso de mandos, ajustes o procedimientos distintos de los aquí
especificados puede conllevar un riesgo de exposición a radiaciones.
Las siguientes traducciones están dirigidas a usuarios de Finlandia y Suecia que deseen
identificar la categoría y clasificación de seguridad de los dispositivos láser:
LÁSER DE CLASE 1
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE
KLASSE 1 LASER APPARAT
Etiqueta del producto láser

De conformidad con las normas de seguridad, cada producto de canal de fibra de
StorageTek lleva una etiqueta que identifica la clase de láser del producto, y el lugar y
fecha de fabricación. Esta etiqueta aparece sobre la unidad de cinta de canal de fibra, así
como en las proximidades de los conectores de las bibliotecas de cintas de canal de fibra.
A continuación puede verse una copia de dicha etiqueta:
PRODUCTO LÁSER CLASE 1

LASER KLASSE 1
APPAREIL A LASER DE CLASSE 1
COMPATIBLE CON LAS SECCIONES 21 CFR 1040.10 Y 1040.11
xl Revision AA 95843
Instalación de cables de fibra óptica
Para instalar cables de fibra óptica, efectúe este procedimiento:
1. Tendido del cable:
• Tarima: Los cables de fibra óptica pueden instalarse debajo de tarimas. Al
tenderlos, manténgalos apartados de cualquier obstrucción, como por ejemplo
otros cables o equipos.
• Escalerilla portacables o canaleta de cables: Sitúe los cables en su posición.
No tire de ellos a través de la escalerilla portacables. Al tender los cables,
manténgalos apartados de esquinas afiladas, colgadores de techo, conductos,
tuberías y actividades de construcción.
• Longitud de elevación vertical: Deje los cables en la bobina original y bájelos
desde arriba. No tire de ellos desde abajo. Utilice los fijadores adecuados para
inmovilizarlos.
• General: No instale cables de fibra óptica encima de detectores de humo:
2. Instalación de los cables:
• Deje como mínimo 4,6 m (15 pies) de cable en cada extremo, en previsión de
futuras extensiones.
• Utilice protectores contra tirones para evitar que el peso del cable dañe el
conector.
• Repase en el presente manual, así como de manuales afines, toda la información
relativa a la manipulación segura de cables de fibra óptica.
3. Protección de los conectores:
• Inserte los conectores con todo cuidado para evitar dañar éstos o la fibra.
• No quite la cubierta de protección del conector hasta que esté preparado para
realizar las conexiones.
• Al desconectar el conector, vuelva a colocar la cubierta de protección.
• Antes de realizar una conexión, limpie el conector. Asegúrese de que no haya
obstrucciones y de que las ranuras de chavetas estén alineadas.
95843 Revision AA xli

Manipulación de cables de fibra óptica
Al manipular cables de fibra óptica, tenga en cuenta las siguientes precauciones:
• No enrolle el cable a menos de 96 mm (3,75”) de diámetro.
• No curve el cable a menos de 12 mm (0,5”) de radio. StorageTek recomienda que el
radio de curvatura de un cable no sea inferior a 20 veces el diámetro del cable.
• No tire de los cables: colóquelos con cuidado en su posición.
• No aferre los cables con alicates, pinzas ni fresas. No una los cables ni los conectores
a dispositivos de tracción.
• Mantenga los cables apartados de bordes y salientes afilados que pudieran cortarlos o
desgastarlos. Asegúrese de que los orificios del equipo dispongan de bordes
protectores.
• Proteja los cables contra temperaturas extremas.
• En toda ocasión en que el conector no esté conectado, colóquele su cubierta de
protección.
■ Seguridad y precauciones del bastidor

Posibilidad de lesiones físicas:
• Es necesaria más de una persona para instalar o desinstalar equipos
en y del bastidor de la biblioteca.
• Al mover una bibliotecta que contenga equipos instalados en

bastidor, deberán adoptarse las precauciones adecuadas. El peso de
algunos equipos del bastidor pueden modificar la altura del centro
de gravedad de la biblioteca. Esta situación puede provocar que la
biblioteca se vuelque durante un traslado.
Al instalar la biblioteca en el bastidor, adopte las siguientes precauciones de seguridad y

de manipulación:
Daños potenciales al equipo: Evite superar el peso (136 kg [300 lb]) y
altura (13U) máximos admisibles para equipos del área de bastidor de la
biblioteca.
• Asegúrese de que el equipo disponga de homologaciones UL (Underwriters’

Laboratories), CSA (certificado de la Canadian Standards Association) y CE
(compatibilidad con las directivas y normas de la Unión Europea).
• Debe entenderse que la biblioteca no proporciona alimentación eléctrica al área del
bastidor. Por ello, asegúrese de que el equipo instalado en el bastidor disponga de una
fuente de alimentación adecuada.
xlii Revision AA 95843

Nota: Si desconecta la alimentación eléctrica de la biblioteca accionando el
interruptor de encendido de ésta, el equipo instalado en el bastidor seguirá
conectado a la alimentación eléctrica.
• Siga las directrices del fabricante para colocar, sostener y fijar el equipo en el mismo.
• Sitúe el equipo de tal modo que no bloquee ni obstaculice ningún orificio de
ventilación del área del bastidor de la biblioteca. Por ejemplo, no bloquee las áreas de
escape de la biblioteca o de la unidad, el área de escape del módulo electrónico,
orificios perforados en el metal ni medios de ventilación similares.
• Sitúe el equipo de tal manera que las puertas de la biblioteca no lo toquen al cerrarlas.
• Instale el equipo en el bastidor desde abajo hacia arriba. StorageTek recomienda
instalar los componentes más pesados en la parte inferior del bastidor.
• Asegúrese de que cualquier equipo instalado dentro del bastidor disponga de la
ventilación adecuada. La temperatura ambiente en el interior del bastidor no debe ser
superior a la temperatura de servicio recomendada. Para la refrigeración de la base
deben tomarse en consideración tanto la disipación eléctrica dentro del espacio del
bastidor como las condiciones ambientales externas de la biblioteca. Dentro del
espacio del bastidor debe ajustarse la refrigeración para una disipación eléctrica
moderada.
• Asegúrese de que el equipo del bastidor no crea una situación de sobrecorriente,
tanto si el equipo está conectado directamente al circuito derivado como si lo está a
una regleta de distribución de alimentación.
Asegúrese de que el equipo del bastidor disponga de una puesta a tierra fiable, tanto si el
equipo está conectado directamente al circuito derivado como a una regleta de
distribución de alimentación.
Posibilidad de lesiones físicas:
• Es necesaria más de una persona para instalar o desinstalar equipos
en y del bastidor de la biblioteca.
• Al mover una biblioteca que contenga equipos montados en

bastidor, deberán adoptarse las precauciones adecuadas. El peso de
algunos equipos del bastidor pueden modificar la altura del centro
de gravedad de la biblioteca. Esta situación puede provocar que la
biblioteca se vuelque durante un traslado.
Daños potenciales al equipo: Evite superar el peso (136 kg [300 lb]) y

altura (17U) máximos admisibles para equipos del área de bastidor de la
biblioteca.
95843 Revision AA xliii

Al instalar la biblioteca en el bastidor, adopte las siguientes precauciones de seguridad y
de manipulación:
• Asegúrese de que el equipo disponga de homologaciones UL (Underwriters’
Laboratories), CSA (certificado de la Canadian Standards Association) y CE
(compatibilidad con las directivas y normas de la Unión Europea).
• Debe entenderse que la biblioteca no proporciona alimentación eléctrica al área del
bastidor. Por ello, asegúrese de que el equipo montado en el bastidor disponga de una
fuente de alimentación adecuada.
Nota: Si desconecta la alimentación eléctrica de la biblioteca accionando el
interruptor de encendido de ésta, el equipo montado en el bastidor seguirá
conectado a la alimentación eléctrica.
• Siga las directrices del fabricante para colocar, sostener y fijar el equipo en el mismo.
• Sitúe el equipo de tal modo que no bloquee ni obstaculice ningún orificio de
ventilación del área del bastidor de la biblioteca. Por ejemplo, no bloquee las áreas de
escape de la biblioteca o de la unidad, el área de escape del módulo electrónico,
orificios perforados en el metal ni medios de ventilación similares.
• Sitúe el equipo de tal manera que las puertas de la biblioteca no lo toquen al cerrarlas.
• Instale el equipo en el bastidor desde abajo hacia arriba. StorageTek recomienda
instalar los componentes más pesados en la parte inferior del bastidor.
• Asegúrese de que cualquier equipo instalado dentro del bastidor disponga de la
ventilación adecuada. La temperatura ambiente en el interior del bastidor no debe ser
superior a la temperatura de servicio recomendada. Para la refrigeración de la base
deben tomarse en consideración tanto la disipación eléctrica dentro del espacio del
bastidor como las condiciones ambientales externas de la biblioteca. Dentro del
espacio del bastidor debe ajustarse la refrigeración para una disipación eléctrica
moderada.
• Asegúrese de que el equipo del bastidor no crea una situación de sobrecorriente,
tanto si el equipo está conectado directamente al circuito derivado como si lo está a
una regleta de distribución de alimentación.
• Asegúrese de que el equipo del bastidor disponga de una puesta a tierra fiable, tanto
si el equipo está conectado directamente al circuito derivado como a una regleta de
distribución de alimentación.
xliv Revision AA 95843

■ Prevención de daños por descargas electrostáticas
(DES)
Quienes manipulan componentes sensibles a las descargas electrostáticas (DES) deben
ser conscientes de los daños que éstas pueden provocar en los componentes electrónicos,
con el objeto de adoptar las precauciones adecuadas para evitarlas. Asimismo, las
personas que realicen tareas de mantenimiento en equipos de StorageTek deben pasar un
curso de fundamentos de las descargas electrostáticas.
Posibles daños a los equipos: Manipule los componentes sensibles a
las descargas electrostáticas sólo en las condiciones de protección
adecuadas. Para cumplir este requisito, utilice siempre el Kit de puesta a
tierra del servicio de campo (NP 4711) y cumpla en todo momento estas
precauciones y procedimientos al realizar tareas de mantenimiento o
servicio técnico de equipos de StorageTek, así como al manipular
componentes sensibles a las descargas electrostáticas.
Precauciones contra descargas electrostáticas (DES)

Al trabajar con componentes sensibles a las descargas electrostáticas (DES), adopte
siempre las siguientes precauciones generales:
• Utilice protección contra descargas electrostáticas a realizar tareas de instalación,
desinstalación, mantenimiento o reparación de equipos de StorageTek.
• Mantenga los circuitos impresos sensibles a las descargas electrostáticas dentro de
sus embalajes de protección hasta haber adoptado las medidas de prevención
adecuadas y esté preparado para instalar el componente.
• No permita que nadie toque o manipule un componente sensible a las descargas
electrostáticas no protegido, salvo que dicha persona haya adoptado las precauciones
pertinentes.
• Una vez concluido el trabajo, vuelva a colocar todas las cubiertas del equipo y cierre
todas las puertas.
• Si la superficie de trabajo del kit de puesta a tierra ha estado sometida a temperaturas
superiores a los 66 ºC (150 ºF) o inferiores a los 4,5 ºC (40 ºF), deje que la superficie
se aclimate a la temperatura ambiente antes de desenrollarla.
• Coloque inmediatamente sobre esta superficie todo componente que haya retirado
de su embalaje de protección contra descargas electrostáticas.
95843 Revision AA xlv

• Mantenga limpia la superficie de trabajo del kit de puesta a tierra.
Nota: Para limpiarla, utilice agua y un detergente suave, asegurándose de que esté
completamente seca antes de utilizarla.
• Compruebe periódicamente la resistencia eléctrica del cable de puesta a tierra y del

cable en espiral de la muñequera.
Nota: Al medir la resistencia del cable de puesta a tierra, debe ser inferior a 1,2
MΩ,; la del cable en espiral debe situarse entre 0,8 y 1,2 MΩ. Repare o
sustituya los cables si no cumplen estos requisitos.
Procedimiento de protección contra descargas electrostáticas

(DES)
Recuerde que cada entorno de cliente es diferente. Responda a todas las dudas e
inquietudes del cliente antes de proceder a trabajar en un equipo.
Prepare el área de trabajo

1. Antes de reparar el equipo, desenrolle completamente la superficie de trabajo del kit
de puesta a tierra y colóquela sobre una superficie adecuada.
2. Conecte un extremo del cable de puesta a tierra a la superficie de trabajo y ajuste el
broche de presión.
Nota: El otro extremo se conectará posteriormente.
3. Colóquese una muñequera antiestática. Asegúrese de que le resulte cómoda y que

haga contacto con toda la circunferencia de la muñeca.
4. Conecte a la muñequera un extremo del cable en espiral.
Acceda al equipo
5. Con todo cuidado, abra las puertas o retire las cubiertas del equipo. No toque ningún
componente interno.
Antes de tocar cualquier componente interno, asegúrese de estar
correctamente conectado a tierra.
6. Conecte el extremo libre del cable en espiral al lugar más adecuado:
a. Si está trabajando con componentes de un equipo de pequeñas dimensiones,
conecte el extremo libre del cable a la superficie de trabajo del kit de puesta a
tierra. Asimismo, asegúrese de tocar una superficie metálica no pintada del
equipo antes de tocar cualquier componente interno.
b. Si está trabajando con componentes de un equipo de amplias dimensiones,
conecte el extremo libre del cable en espiral a un conector de puesta a tierra o a
una superficie metálica no pintada del interior del equipo.
xlvi Revision AA 95843

Sustituya los componentes
7. Sustituya el componente defectuoso y colóquelo sobre la superficie de trabajo.
8. Extraiga el componente de recambio de su embalaje de protección contra descargas
eléctricas e instálelo en el equipo.
9. Coloque el componente defectuoso dentro del embalaje de protección.
Limpie
10. Desconecte los cables de puesta a tierra del equipo.
11. Vuelva a instalar todas las cubiertas y cierre todas las puertas del equipo.
12. Desconecte el cable en espiral de la muñeca. Si fuese necesario, desconecte el cable
de puesta a tierra de la superficie de trabajo.
13. Pliegue correctamente la superficie de trabajo, y guárdela. Guarde también los demás
componentes del Kit de puesta a tierra del servicio de campo.
■ Bloqueo de puerta L700e

La biblioteca de cintas incorpora un bloqueo de seguridad (situado detrás de la puerta
delantera izquierda). Al abrirse la puerta delantera izquierda, el bloqueo genera
inmediatamente una interrupción servoalimentada (ISA) que desactiva todos los motores
de la biblioteca. Esto impide el funcionamiento de los motores cuando la puerta de la
biblioteca está abierta.
Si se conectan dos bibliotecas a través de un PTP, la apertura de la puerta delantera
izquierda de cualquiera de ellas suspenderá automáticamente las operaciones de traspaso.
También se interrumpirán las operaciones internas de la biblioteca cuya puerta esté
abierta, en tanto que las operaciones de la segunda biblioteca continuarán.
■ Interrupción servoalimentada L700e

Una función de seguridad adicional es la interrupción servoalimentada generada por la
tarjeta MPC/MPCL. Si la tarjeta MPC/MPCL determina que el motor de una biblioteca
está fuera de rango, la tarjeta generará una interrupción servoalimentada (ISA) para
desconectar la tensión de accionamiento del motor defectuoso. Esto evitará una situación
de descontrol de la servoalimentación hasta que pueda determinarse la causa del
problema.
95843 Revision AA xlvii

This page intentionally left blank.
xlviii Revision AA 95843

General Information 1
This chapter provides an overview of the L700e Tape Library models and features. It
shows the location of major system components. It also lists physical, environmental, and
power requirements for the library.
The L1400M Tape Library is an enhanced version of the L700e; therefore, most of the
information that pertains to the L700e also applies to the L1400M. Refer to Appendix D
for L1400M Tape Library differences.
Throughout this manual, the library is referred to as one unit. With the introduction of
the pass-thru port, however, capacities for cartridges and drives will effectively double
when two libraries are connected with the pass-thru port.
■ Overview
The L700e Tape Library is a fully automated tape cartridge storage and retrieval
subsystem. Depending on model and features selected, one L700e can store from 156 to
678 tape data cartridges. With an L700-PTP (pass-thru port) installed between two
libraries, both libraries can share from 300 to 1,344 cartridges. The total numbers do not
include cartridges in the cartridge access port (CAP) or the reserved cells.
Library Operation Types

The L700e can operate on the following interfaces:
• SCSI High Voltage Differential (HVD) (9840B only)
• SCSI Low Voltage Differential (LVD)—requires the addition of MPV and MPW
cards for MPC cards only; new MPCL cards, however, can operate as native LVD/
SE by moving the jumper at J16.
• Single-ended SCSI.
• Fibre Channel with the addition of MPU/MPU21 and MPV cards
• Enterprise Systems Connection (ESCON)
• Fiber connection (FICON).
CAUTION:
System fault: For either HVD or LVD operation, the server must have a
corresponding (matching) host bus adapter.
Drives and media can be intermixed.
1. The MPU card supports 1 GB operation; the MPU2 supports 2 BG, but requires 3.02 or
later firmware.
95843 Revision AA 1-1

Overview
The exchange rate for moving tapes from cell to cell is 450 exchanges per hour.
Installing one library should take about two hours, plus the time to install each drive and
the optional expansion frame. If an L700-PTP is installed, you must estimate at least
twice this time, plus approximately two hours for leveling and installation of the PTP.
The available size configurations are shown in Figure 1-1 and Table 1-1 on page 1-3 lists
the corresponding capacity variations. Capacity variations depend upon the theta stop
positions (shown in Figure 1-1).
Figure 1-1. Library Size Configurations (C65133)
2
1
8 7 6 5
1. 1/3 capacity (partial access to Panel 2) 5. Drive Column 1 (optional)

2. 2/3 capacity (entire access to Panel 2) 6. CAP B (optional)
3. Full capacity (with optional expansion 7. CAP A
frame) 8. Panel 2
4. Drive Column 0
A basic library consists of:

• A library that stores 156 to 678 tape data cartridges.
• One to 20 Digital Linear Tape (DLT) drives only, one to 20 Super DLT drives only,
one to 20 Ultrium Tape drives only, one to twelve T9x40 drives only, one to twelve
T9x40 drives plus one to two DLT or Ultrium drives, or a mixture of drives. The
possible combinations of drives are shown in Table 1-2 on page 1-5.
• The smallest configuration consists of one library and one tape drive.
The largest configuration consists of two libraries, one PTP, and 40 tape drives.
1-2 Revision AA 95843

Overview
Table 1-1. Library Capacity Variations per Single Library

Total Data Total
Expansion 2nd Drive Drives Installed Panel 2 Reserved
Cartridge User
Frame Column (Maximum) Access Cells2.
Cells1. Cells
10 DLT/SDLT/
Ultrium, or
No 6 T9x40/T10000 Entire 678 12 690
+ 1 DLT/SDLT/
Yes Ultrium
(Full) 20 DLT/SDLT/
Ultrium, or
Yes 12 T9x40/T10000 Entire 618 12 630
+ 2 DLT/SDLT/
Ultrium
10 DLT/SDLT/
Ultrium, or
No 6 T9x40/T10000 Entire 384 12 396
+ 1 DLT/SDLT/
No Ultrium
(2/3) 20 DLT/SDLT/
Ultrium or
Yes 12 T9x40/T10000 Entire 324 12 336
+ 2 DLT/SDLT/
Ultrium
10 DLT/SDLT/
Ultrium or
No 6 T9x40/T10000 Partial 216 12 228
+ 1 DLT/SDLT/
No Ultrium
(1/3) 20 DLT/SDLT/
Ultrium or
Yes 12 T9x40/T10000 Partial l56 12 168
+ 2 DLT/SDLT/
Ultrium
Notes:
1. These numbers do not include cells in the CAP or the reserved area. The figures will be doubled (minus 12
cells for the PTP array) for libraries sharing a PTP.
2. The reserved cells are composed of one swap cell and 11 cleaning and/or diagnostic cartridge slots. They
are shown in Figure 6-6 on page 6-12.

Overview
MPC and MPCL Cards

The controller card for the library is either the MPC or MPCL card.
The original MPC card has recently been re-designed and is designated the “MPCL.”
The MPCL will be installed on all new L180/700e frames starting the fourth quarter
of 2002. The MPCL card provides a native LVD interface, replacing the optional
MPW card that is currently used on MPC cards.
The MPCL, while set at the factory for High Voltage Differential (HVD)
operation, can be modified to operate on a Low Voltage Differential (LVD)
interface by simply moving the jumper located at J16 on the card from the
default position (HVD) to the LVD/SE position
(see “Library Single-Ended Operation” on page 2-51 and Figure 2-25 on page 2-53).
Note: The MPCL card cannot operate with any firmware level below 3.02.
MPC card spares will be available indefinitely. You should replace an MPC card with an
MPC card and replace MPCL cards with MPCL cards. The Feature LV02, conversion bill
number 101368 (installation of the card cage, MPV backplane, and MPW logic card
attached to the MPC card) to operate a library containing an MPC card on an LVD
interface, will continue to be offered.
Drive Types
The following drives may be installed within the L700e:
• T9840A – HVD SCSI or Fibre Channel
• T9840B – HVD SCSI, Fibre Channel, or Enterprise System Connection (ESCON)1
or fibre connection (FICON)2
• T9840C – HVD SCSI, Fibre Channel, ESCON1, or FICON2
• T9940A – HVD SCSI and Fibre Channel
• T9940B – Fibre Channel only
• T10000 – Fibre Channel3
• DLT 7000 or DLT 8000 – HVD SCSI only
• SDLT 320—Backward Read Compatibility (BRC – ability to read previously written
tapes on DLTIV media)
1. The StorageTek T9840B and T9840C drive are available for ESCON operation. For the
T9840B; library firmware must be version 3.01 or later. For the T9840C; library firmware must
be version 3.07 or later. Host operating systems requirements are listed in
“ESCON” on page 1-26.
2. The StorageTek T9840B, and T9840C drives are available for FICON operation; library
firmware must be version 3.07 or later. Host operating systems requirements are listed in
“FICON” on page 1-27.
3. The T10000 requires library firmware version 3.11 (or greater), and for the cur-
rent SN3300 router/L1400M Interface Control Module firmware version refer to the
StorageNet 3300 Fibre Channel Router User Manual.

Overview
• SDLT 6001—LVD SCSI and Fibre Channel.

Backward compatibility: Read/write SDLT II; read-only SDLT I and DLT VS1
• DLT-S4—LVD SCSI and Fibre Channel
Backward compatibility: Read only SDLT 320 and 600
• IBM drives:
• Ultrium 1—Native LVD, Fibre Channel or, with a converter card, HVD
• Ultrium 22—Fibre Channel
• Ultrium 4—Fibre Channel (check availability and library microcode notes for
require microcode version)
Backward compatibility: Read/Write Ultrium 3, Read only Ultrium 2
• Hewlett Packard drives:
• Ultrium 1—Native LVD or, with a converter card, HVD
• Ultrium 23—Native LVD only
• Ultrium 35—Native LVD or Fibre Channel.
Backward compatibility: Read/write Ultrium 2 and 3; Read only: Ultrium 1.
• Ultrium 4—Fibre Channel (check availability and library microcode notes for
require microcode version)
Backward compatibility: Read/Write Ultrium 3, Read only Ultrium 2
• Certance Ultrium – LVD or HVD (determined by model number)
Table 1-2. Drive Combinations (per drive column)
T9x40 DLT/SDLT or Ultrium
0 10
1 8
2 7
3 5
4 4
5 2
6 1
CAUTION:
Possible data loss: StorageTek does not advise mixing DLT 7000 and
DLT 8000 drives in the same library. If a DLT 7000 cartridge is inserted
into a DLT 8000 drive, the tape can be read and written in 7000 mode.
1. SDLT 600 drive requires Firmware Version 3.08.01.

2. IBM Ultrium 2 Fibre Channel drive requires Firmware Version 3.04.
3. HP Ultrium 2 LVD drive support is available with Firmware Version 3.03.
4. HP Ultrium 2 Fibre Channel drive support is available with Firmware Version 3.05.
5. HP Ultrium 3 drive support is available with Firmware Version 3.08.01.

Overview
If a DLT 8000 cartridge is inserted into a DLT 7000 drive, the drive will
indicate “Medium Error/Calibration Error (03/8000)” if a read command is
issued and, as with most tape drives, will write over any data present on
the tape if a write command is issued at load point.
Possible data loss: StorageTek does not advise mixing SDLT 220 and
SDLT 320 drives in the same library. An SDLT 220 will overwrite data on
an SDLT 320-written tape.
Figure 1-2. Library with Expansion Frame (C65055)
8
2
7
6 3
5
4
C65055
1. Expansion frame (optional) 5. Operator panel

2. Rear door 6. Optional CAP B (shown open)
3. Drive access door 7. Standard CAP A (shown closed)
4. Right front access door 8. Left front access door

Client Direct Operation
■ Client Direct Operation

For client direct connections, a SCSI or Fibre Channel client is connected directly to the
library and drives. The drives may share the same bus as the library (termed “on bus”) or
operate on a separate bus (termed “off bus”).
The SCSI connection from the client to the library and/or drives is a SCSI Type-3 68-pin
cable. This cable may be a unique channel or it may be daisy-chained to a shared data bus
with the library or one or more drives.
A Multi-initiator Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) is the data interface currently
available for the library and T9x40 drives.
A Fibre Channel or interface is available as an option.
SCSI-to-Fibre Channel conversion and Native Fibre Channel will be available as future
options.
■ Client Indirect Operation

For client indirect connections to the library, a Unix-based server or a RISC System/6000
(using the Advanced Interactive Executive [AIX] operating system) connects between the
client and the library.
An example of an indirect connection would be:
• The library is connected to a Unix-based server.
• The server is then connected to an Ethernet LAN network.
• A cable is then run from the Ethernet LAN to the client.
Note: If the customer is using Automated Cartridge System Library Software (ACSLS),
its level must be Version 5.3.2 or higher. If a PTP is installed, the ACSLS version
must be 6.0.1 or higher.
The connection from the server to the library is a SCSI Type-3 68-pin cable. The server
may have its own control-side path or may be daisy-chained to a shared data bus with one
or more drives.
A multi-initiator Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) is the data interface currently
available for DLT, SDLT, Ultrium, and T9x40 drives.
A Fibre Channel interface is available as an option.
SCSI-to-Fibre Channel conversion and Native Fibre will be available as future options

Operator and Communication Interfaces
■ Operator and Communication Interfaces

Operator and communication interfaces for the library are:
• An operator panel that communicates library status, configuration, diagnostic
sequences, and fault symptom code information. The operator panel provides
buttons for running diagnostic tests and for examining the 20 most recent library
events. Event information also contains errors that include fault symptom codes
(FSCs) to help you determine what component has failed.
• A CSE port (Command Line Interface–CLI) that allows diagnostic tests, clearing of
the FSC log, and the path for downloading firmware through a Hyperterminal
session (See “CLI Port - Hyperterminal Method” on page 5-50. This interface is
through an RJ45 connection, 38,400 baud.
• An Ethernet Web-based service port for:
• Machine configuration (using the optional “StorageTek L-Series Library
Admin”). Netscape® and Microsoft® Explorer are supported browsers.
• Monitoring status information using SNMP (see Appendix B, “SNMP.”).
■ Standard Features
The following features are standard with all L700e libraries:
• An internal 13U (0.57 m [22.75 in.] high x 0.48 m [19 in.] wide x 0.71 m [28 in.] deep)
rack space, located behind the right, front door (customer must supply power).
• 20-cartridge CAP
• Front and rear viewing windows
• Space for 10 DLT/SDLT, 10 Ultrium, six T9X40 tape drives, or six T9x40 drives and
one DLT/SDLT or Ultrium drive, or a mixture of these drives
(see Table 1-2 on page 1-5 for mixed drive types)
Library initialization and full audit of all tapes requires a maximum of five minutes to
complete.

Models
■ Models
The L700e Tape Library is available in three models; each model can contain one or two
drive columns (Table 1-3).
Table 1-3. Library Models
Drive
Model Description*
Columns
678 data cartridge cells, expansion frame,
1
entire Panel 2 and Panel 3 access
L700-e70
618 data cartridge cells, expansion frame,
2
entire Panel 2 and Panel 3 access
384 data cartridge cells, no expansion frame,
1
entire Panel 2 access
L700-e40
2
entire Panel 2 access
1
partial Panel 2 access
L700-e30
2
partial Panel 2 access
Note: Cartridge cell numbers do not include cells in the CAP or the reserved area.
Cell numbers are approximately doubled for libraries connected with a PTP.

Optional Library Features
■ Optional Library Features

Optional features and conversion bills for the L700e Tape Library are listed in Table 1-4.
Note: Power cables must be ordered. See Table 1-18 on page 1-35.
Table 1-4. Library Optional Features and Conversion Bills

Feature/ Conversion
Description
Model Bill
0PDU No additional power distribution unit
1PDU 61699 Optional power distribution unit (PDU)
RMPS 61701 Second (backup) DC power supply
2NDT 61697 Second drive column
CC40 61705 Second 20-cell CAP
DFAN1 101323 Rack-mounted cooling (Domestic - 115 VAC)
Redundant AC power option (Domestic rack mounted UPS and switch –
DPWR 101410
115 VAC)—DFAN feature must also be ordered.
EFAN 101324 Rack-mounted cooling (International – 240 VAC)
EXDR 61707 Expansion frame (294 cartridge slots)
For libraries using firmware lower than version 3.02: Compact PCI bus
61703 expansion (MPV card) and 1 GB Fibre Channel card (MPU card – SC
connectors)
For libraries using firmware version 3.02 or later: Compact PCI bus
IFC2 101672 expansion (MPV card) and 2 GB Fibre Channel card (MPU2 card – LC
connectors)
2 GB Fibre Channel card (MPU2 card) only: requires MPC/MPCL card
at firmware version 3.02 or later and MPV card.
JFAN* 101323 Rack-mounted cooling (Japan only – 90 VAC)
Pass-thru port connecting two L700e libraries; allows up to two cartridges
L700-PTP
to be passed between the libraries at a time.
Low Voltage Differential (LVD) operation for libraries with MPC card only
LV02 101368
(MPW and MPV logic cards)
LVD kit, with cable and terminator, for LVD/SE operation with MPCL
LV04 101662
cards only.

Pass-thru Port (L700-PTP)
Table 1-4. Library Optional Features and Conversion Bills (Continued)
Feature/ Conversion
Description
Model Bill
Upgrade
L700-e30
61978 Access to all cells on Panel 2
to
L700-e40
1. This feature must be ordered when UPS and switch feature (DPWR) is ordered. The following power
cable is included with this feature: part 10083242, 2.3 m (7.5 ft), NEMA 5-15. If your machine serial
number is 0001—5676, you must order the replacement door, Field Bill 101327.
■ Pass-thru Port (L700-PTP)

The optional pass-thru port (PTP) allows the transfer of up to two cartridges at a time
between two libraries. The library containing the cartridge to be passed is referred to as
the “source” library; the library to which the cartridge is passed is referred to as the
“destination” library.
The PTP satisfies the operating system’s mount request by transferring cartridges—from
a library that has all drives allocated to jobs—to the other library that has an idle drive.
The PTP can only be installed between any two L700e models.
■ Optional Interfaces
Several optional interfaces are available for the library. These are described in the next
three sections.
StorageTek L-Series Library Admin

The optional Web interface to the L700e library is Model HRZNLSA, Feature code
LS4X. Configuration and operation instructions are outlined in
Appendix C, “StorageTek L-Series Library Admin.”.
The StorageTek L-Series Library Admin lets a library’s user configure, operate, and
monitor the library through a workstation or PC that is running a Netscape or Microsoft
browser. The monitor must first be enabled and configured on the library. Installation
and configuration instructions appear in the documentation that ships with the
StorageTek L-Series Library Admin components. See Table 1-5.
Table 1-5. StorageTek L-Series Library Admin Model/Feature Code
Description Model Required Feature Quantity

StorageTek L-Series Library
HRZNLSA CDRM N/A
Admin for L700/700e
LS4X (1 per tape library)

Optional Interfaces
StorageTek Framework Library Monitor

StorageTek Framework Library Monitor provides monitoring of several SCSI-attached
libraries from within a system management framework on standard UNIX and Windows
NT systems. It monitors the tape library associated with all data backup, recovery,
hierarchal storage management, or vertical application jobs across a SCSI bus.
Its model number is HRZN001, Feature code FS3X. Installation and configuration
instructions appear in the documentation that ships with the product. See Table 1-6.
Table 1-6. StorageTek Framework Library Monitor Model/Feature Codes
Description Model Required Feature Quantity

StorageTek Framework
HRZN001 CDRM N/A
Library Monitor
FS4X (1 per tape library)
At least one of the following framework features (corresponding to the framework the
customer has installed) must be ordered also:
FW01 (CA Unicenter)
FW02 (HP OpenView)
FW03 (Tivoli NetView)
FW04 (Other)*
Note: The feature FW04 (Other) is for those customers who have their own SNMP
application and wish to perform their own SNMP integration with the library’s
SNMP agent.

Optional Interfaces
StorageTek Library Manager

StorageTek Library Manager (Product HRZN003) provides sharing and common
robotics control for SCSI-attached libraries. It is also required for PTP operation. See
Table 1-7 and Table 1-8.
Table 1-7. StorageTek Library Manager Model/Feature Codes

Product Model Feature Quantity
StorageTek Library
HRZN003 CDRM N/A
Manager
FS4X (1 per tape library)
The features below correspond to the customer’s platform.
WN2K (Windows 2000)
NT100 (Windows NT)
SLRS (Solaris)
LBAT (Library Attach)
Note: Library Attach is required for PTP operation and for Windows NT/2000
platforms. ISVs use this product as the NT/2000 Client Software Component
to interface with ACSLS, Library Manager, and Library Station.
Table 1-8. StorageTek Optional Interfaces—Comparisons
L-Series
Framework Library
Description Library
Monitor Manager
Admin
SNMP monitoring from management framework X
Launch L-Series Admin from framework X
Detailed monitoring and status of individual libraries X
Event handling X X X
Library sharing among applications X
Browser-based GUI X
Tape operations: import, export, mount, dismount, and query X X
Library management: reporting, state and status,
X
configuration, startup, and shutdown.
PTP operation X*
Note: Version 2.0 or higher required.

Tape Drive Features
■ Tape Drive Features

Supported drives and their feature numbers are listed in Table 1-9.
Table 1-9. Drive Features
Feature
Drive Model Number Interface Drive Tray
Code
DLT 7000 977E–001 2010 Single-ended TX40
DLT 7000 977E–001 2012 HVD TX40
DLT 8000 9788–001 2012 HVD TX40
SDLT 220 SDLT-BR1 BRHV HVD TX40
SDLT 220 SDLT-BR1 BRLV LVD/SE TX40
SDLT 320 SDLT-321 BRHV HVD TX40
SDLT 320 SDLT-321 BRLV LVD/SE TX40
SDLT 6008 SDLT601 BRFC Fibre Channel TX40
SDLT 6008 SDLT601 BRLV LVD TX40
DLT-S4 DLT-S4 LVD
DLT-S4 DLT-S4 Fibre Channel
Ultrium 1 HP - HVD TLTOP011 HPHV HVD2 3
Ultrium 1 HP - LVD TLTOP011 HPLV LVD/SE

Ultrium 1 IBM - HVD TLTOP011 IBHV HVD2 3
Ultrium 1 IBM - LVD TLTOP011 IBLV LVD/SE

Ultrium 1 IBM - Fibre Channel TLTOP011 IBFC Fibre Channel
Ultrium 1 Certance - HVD TLTOP011 SGHV HVD
Ultrium 1 Certance - LVD TLTOP011 SGLV LVD/SE
Ultrium 23 HP - LVD LTO20014 HPLV LVD/SE 3
IBM Ultrium 2 - Fibre Channel LTO20014 IBFC Fibre Channel 3
IBM Ultrium 3 - Fibre Channel8 LTO3001 IBFC Fibre Channel 3
IBM Ultrium 3 - Fibre Channel8 LTO3001 IBFC Fibre Channel 3
IBM Ultrium 411 - Fibre

LTO4001 IBFC Fibre Channel 3
Channel
HP Ultrium 3 - Fibre Channel8 LTO3001 HPFC Fibre Channel 3
HP Ultrium 3 - LVD8 LTO3001 HPLV LVD 3

Tape Drive Features
Table 1-9. Drive Features (Continued)
Feature
Drive Model Number Interface Drive Tray
Code
HP Ultrium 411 - Fibre Channel LT04001 HPFC Fibre Channel 3
HP Ultrium 411 - LVD8 LT04001 HPLV LVD 3
T9x40 5 5 HVD TX40

T9x40 5 5 Fibre Channel TX40
T9840B or T9840C 5 5 FICON7 TX40
T9840B 5 5 ESCON6 TX40
T100009 10 10 Fibre Channel TX40
Note: For new drive offerings (DLT-S4 and Ultrium 4), library firmware must be Version 3.15.02
or later.
1. The TLTOP01 product design choices are: STK0, HEWY, HTCH, SUN0, and NEC0.
2. For HVD operation, the drive tray may contain a converter card.
3. Drive tray will be determined by drive type availability.
4. Ultrium 2 drives:
a. For SCSI operation, are LVD interface only; HP model requires library firmware 3.03 or later
b. For Fibre Channel operation, require library firmware 3.04 or later
c. Product design choices are STK0 and SUN0.
5. For T9x40 feature numbers, consult the T9x40 Tape Drive System Assurance Guide, part MT5003
6. For ESCON operation, library firmware must be edition 3.01 or later.
7. Requires library firmware edition 3.09 or later.
8. SDLT 600 and HP/IBM Ultrium 3 drives require library firmware version 3.08.01 or later.
9. The T10000 requires library firmware version 3.11 (or greater), and for the current SN3300 router/
L1400M Interface Control Module firmware version refer to the StorageNet 3300 Fibre Channel Router
User Manual.
10. For T10000 feature numbers, consult the T10000 Tape Drive System Assurance Guide, part TM0002.
11. Check for availability for Ultrium 4 drives and media.

13U Rack Area
■ 13U Rack Area

The internal 13U rack area (behind the right front door) may be used by customers for
additional equipment. Refer to “Rack Safety and Precautions” on page xxxii.
CAUTION:
Heat within rack area: Cooling considerations should be made based
upon the power dissipation within the rack space, as well as the external
library room ambient conditions. Cooling must be provided for moderate
power dissipation within the rack space.
Additional cooling, as described below, is recommended for high power

dissipation components such as multiprocessor servers or disk arrays.

13U Rack Area
Rack Cooling
A cooling unit is required if you are installing the American Power Conversion (APC)
redundant AC power option.
Depending on the type and amount of other equipment in the rack area, a cooling unit
may also be required. The charts (Figure 1-3, Figure 1-4 on page 1-18 and
Figure 1-10 on page 1-18) offer guidelines for the customer’s site.
Figure 1-3. Cooling Recommendations, Rated to 35 Degrees C
L700, Recommendations for Equipment Rated to 35 C

0
(89.6 F) 0
32
31
30
29
28
Room Ambient Temperature ( C)
27
May Exceed Operating Temperatures
0
26
25
24
23
22
21
Fan Recommended
20
19
18
No Fan
17
Needed
16
15
100
125
150
175
200
225
250
275
300
1000
325
350
375
400
425
450
475
500
525
550
575
600
625
650
675
700
725
750
775
800
825
850
875
900
925
950
975
25
50
75
0
(59 F)
0
Rack Equipment Power (Watts)

C65342

13U Rack Area
Figure 1-4. Cooling Recommendations, Rated to 40 Degrees C
L700, Recommendations for Equipment Rated to 40 C

0
(89.6 F) 0
32
31
30
29
May Exceed Operating Temperatures
28
Room Ambient Temperature ( C)
27
0
26
25
24
23
Fan Recommended
22
21
20
19
18
No Fan Needed
17
16
15
1000
100
125
150
175
200
225
250
275
300
325
350
375
400
425
450
475
500
525
550
575
600
625
650
675
700
725
750
775
800
825
850
875
900
925
950
975
25
50
75
0
(59 F)
0
Rack Equipment Power (Watts)

C65343
To install the rack cooling unit, follow the directions enclosed with the appropriate
conversion bill listed below. The rack cooling unit is shown in Figure 1-5 on page 1-19.
Note: A separate power cable is included with the cooling unit.
See Table 1-4 on page 1-10.
Table 1-10. Rack Cooling Conversion Bills

Conversion Bill Description
101323 Domestic fan, rack cooling area
101323 Japan fan, rack cooling area
101324 International fan, rack cooling area

13U Rack Area
Figure 1-5. Optional Rack Cooling Fan (C65322)
C65352
1. Cooling fan
2. Fan switch (fan deactivated when door is opened)

13U Rack Area
Redundant AC Power Option

The redundant AC power option (shown in Figure 1-6 on page 1-20) consists of two
batteries, a power monitor switch, power outlet strip, and Web-based monitoring
software. If this system is being installed into the library, you must also install the cooling
feature mentioned above.
Figure 1-6. Redundant AC Power Option (C65351)
APC
APC
C65351
1. Power outlets
2. Power monitor switch
3. UPS with backup batteries
Instructions for installing the redundant AC power option are enclosed with the
conversion bill listed in Figure 1-11.
Table 1-11. Redundant AC Power Option Conversion Bills
Conversion Bill Description

101410 Domestic rack mounted APC bundle.1
101411 International rack mounted APC bundle.2
1. This bundle includes L5-30 (locking, 120 VAC, 30 A) plugs. The customer must
provide two L5-30R receptacles.
2. This bundle includes Hubbell 316P6W plugs. The customer must provide two Hubbell
316R6W receptacles.

SCSI HVD or LVD Considerations
Matrix Switch
This switch uses Matrix to emulate the operator panels of the T9840B drives. If you are
installing the Maintenance Switch for Matrix application with T9840B drives, ferrite
beads must be installed on the Ethernet cables at the switch and at each drive. Refer to
the T9x40 Tape Drive Installation Manual, part 95879, for specific instructions.
■ SCSI HVD or LVD Considerations

With the advent of Ultrium tape drives, customers now have choices for the type of SCSI
interface on which to operate: High Voltage Differential (HVD) or Low Voltage
Differential (LVD).
As shown in Table 1-12 on page 1-22, the HVD interface allows longer cable lengths, but
throughput is lower than LVD; the LVD interface restricts cable lengths, but provides
faster throughput.
As a service representative you must understand these cabling requirements as well as:
• How LVD Ultrium drives are different internally from HVD Ultrium drives
• How the library (that is, the control path) is converted to LVD operation
• The Host Bus Adapter (HBA) requirements
• The consequences for mixing SCSI types on a bus.
SCSI Cable Restrictions

The library and drives support only SCSI Type-3 connectors. If you use SCSI Type-1 or -2
connectors, you must use a SCSI Type-1- or SCSI Type-2-to-SCSI Type-3 adapter.
Refer to “SCSI High Voltage Differential Connectors” on page 4-2 for more information
about SCSI cables and SCSI adapters for both control and data paths.
Library SCSI Operation

If you are connecting the library or drives to an LVD SCSI bus, the cable can be no
longer than 12 m (39.4 ft). There must also be a corresponding LVD HBA in the client.
LVD operation for the libraries with MPC cards requires an MPW card (Conversion bill
101368). Libraries with the MPCL card do not require the conversion bill since the
MPCL can operate as native LVD/SE.
For LVD operation on the library interface, the library must be the last device on the SCSI
bus and must use a single, shielded cable (part 3136668xx) with feed-through terminator
attached.

Table 1-12 lists additional restrictions for SCSI connections.

Table 1-12. SCSI Cable Restrictions
Application Length Restriction

Stub length: 0.1 m (4 in.)
Single-Ended
5 to 10 Mb data transfer rate: 3 m (10 ft)
(Library only)
1 to 5 Mb data transfer rate: 6 m (20 ft)
High Voltage Stub length: 0.2 m (10 in.)
Differential 1 to 10 Mb data transfer rate: 25 m (82 ft)
Low Voltage Stub length: 0.1 m (3.9 in.)
Differential 108 GB data transfer rate: 12 m (39.37 ft)
Drive SCSI Operation

Native operation for both IBM and Hewlett Packard Ultrium tape drives is the LVD
interface. To operate either drive as HVD, converter cards must be installed on the drive
trays. There is no converter card for HVD operation on Certance drives; their model
number dictates the type of operation.
When installing an Ultrium drive in the library, you must match the cable types and
terminators with the bus type. Cables for either LVD or HVD configurations are listed in
Table 4-8 on page 4-8; terminators are listed in “Direct Connection” on page 4-11.

Precautions
Table 1-13 lists potential equipment damage or bus-disabling situations that may arise if
the SCSI types are intermixed.
CAUTION:
Potential equipment damage: The single-ended, LVD, and HVD
alternatives are not compatible and cannot be mixed on the same bus.
Table 1-13. SCSI Device/Bus Types: Precautions
If you plug a… Into… The result is…

Single-ended bus Proper connection
Single-ended device LVD bus Single-ended mode
HVD bus Operation disabled
Single-ended bus Single-ended mode
Low voltage
LVD bus Proper connection
differential device
HVD Potential damage/disabled device
Single-ended bus Disabled device
High voltage
LVD bus Potential damage/disabled device
differential device
HVD bus Proper connection

HBA Requirements
CAUTION:
Mismatching SCSI operation types: The HBA in the customer’s server
must match the library’s SCSI bus type.
Figure 1-14 lists the different types of SCSI operation requirements.
Table 1-14. HVD and LVD Modifications
Low Voltage Differential High Voltage Differential

Library with MPC card – MPW card Library with MPC card– None
attached to MPV card1
Library with MPCL card – None Library with MPCL card – Jumper at J16
IBM Ultrium – None2. HP Ultrium – converter card2.
HP Ultrium – None2. HP Ultrium – converter card2.
Certance Ultrium – Set by model Certance Ultrium – Set by model
number2. number2.
Host Server – LVD Host Bus Adapter Host Server – HVD Host Bus Adapter
1. See Table 1-4 on page 1-10 for library feature number.
2. See Table 1-9 on page 1-14 for drive feature number.

Fibre Channel
■ Fibre Channel
Fibre Channel operation also requires certain considerations that must be taken into
account for proper operation. Cable information and operation topologies are explained
in the sections below.
Fibre Channel Cable Considerations

Table 1-15 lists the cable and connector specifications that the L700e library supports.
Note: Open Fiber Control (OFC) cables incorporate a safety mechanism that prevents
damage to the human eye when the connection (link) is disconnected.
Table 1-15. Fibre Channel Cables and Connectors
Distance
FC-0 Code Cable Type Connector
Meters Feet
50 µm Shortwave laser
2–500 6.5–1640 100-M5-SN-I Keyed Duplex SC
Multimode without OFC
Fibre Channel Topologies

The L700e supports the following Fibre Channel topologies:
• Switched Fabric
• Arbitrated Loop
Switched Fabric Topology

This is the recommended topology for the library.
Switched Fabric provides:
• Dynamic interconnections between the nodes connected to the fabric
• Multiple simultaneous Fibre Channel connections
If the library is connected to a Fibre channel switch/router or fabric-capable host, it will
configure to a switched topology. A switched fabric topology can support up to 16
million ports logged into the fabric.
Characteristics of switched fabric are:
• Any node can communicate with any other node
• A mix of attachments with different speeds and capabilities are permitted
• A fabric element such as a Fibre Channel switch or router is required
• A fabric can consist of a single fabric element or multiple elements

ESCON
Arbitrated Loop Topology

Arbitrated Loop provides:
• Multiple connections for devices that share a single loop
• Only point-to-point connections between an initiator and target during
communications
If the library is connected to an arbitrary loop, it will configure itself to work within the
arbitrated loop. An arbitrated loop can connect up to 126 ports. In an arbitrated loop:
• Only point-to-point communication is possible between one initiator and one target
at any time. (Other links on the loop act as repeaters.)
• The characteristics of all ports must be compatible (some examples: speed, medium)
While the library supports the arbitrated loop topology, StorageTek does not recommend
it for new or future implementations.
■ ESCON
ESCON operation with the T9840B and T9840C drives requires certain considerations
that must be taken into account for correct operation.
For the T9840B:
• Library firmware must be version 3.01 or later
• Client Server Component (CSC) software, version 4.1 or later, must be resident
within the host’s operating system
• ACSLS (Unix-based server) software, version 6.1.1 or later must be resident within
the server’s operating system.
For the T9840C:
• Client Server Component (CSC) software, version 5.0 or later, must be resident
within the host’s operating system
Cables and configuration are explained in the T9x40 Tape Drive Installation Manual,
part 95879.

FICON
■ FICON
FICON operation with the T9840B and T9840C drives requires certain considerations
that must be taken into account for correct operation.
For the T9840B
• CSC software, version 5.0 or later, must be resident within the host’s operating
system
For the T9840C
• CSC software, version 6.0 or later, must be resident within the host’s operating
system
• ACSLS (Unix-based server) software, version 7.0 or later must be resident within the
server’s operating system.
Cables and configuration are explained in the T9x40 Tape Drive Installation Manual,
part 95879.
■ Robotic Components
The library contains a robot, arrays of cells for storing cartridges, tape drives, and a CAP
for importing cartridges into or exporting cartridges from the library.
Client commands activate the robot. The library translates the client command into servo
commands to direct each motor within the library.
The robot contains three major components:
1. Theta motor (controls lateral movement)
2. Z column motor (controls vertical movement)
3. Hand-Camera (controls cartridge movement to and from cells, drives, and CAP)
These components are shown in Figure 1-7 on page 1-28. A detailed figure of the hand-
camera assembly is shown in Figure 1-8 on page 1-29.
The robot moves cartridges from the storage cells by rotating the Z column, moving the
hand-camera assembly up and down the Z column, and reaching into a storage cell to
grip a tape cartridge.
The robot stores tape cartridges in cell arrays that hold six tape cartridges per array.
The robot also transfers cartridges to/from the CAP and PTP.
The cell arrays are stacked in columns; the columns are arranged in a circle around the
robot.

Robotic Components
Figure 1-7. Robotic Components (C65056)
1. Theta motor
2. Z motor
3. Z column
4. Hand-camera assembly
5. Z carriage
C65056

Hand-Camera Assembly
■ Hand-Camera Assembly
The hand-camera assembly (Figure 1-8) consists of a gripper, a motor-driven drive belt
for gripper extension, and a bar code scanner (LED) card and camera (enclosed in a case
under the hand components).
The camera reads the volume serial numbers (VOLSERs) of tapes during an audit and
when cartridges are imported into the CAP. For mount and dismount activities, the
camera is not used since the VOLSERs and positions of all tapes are kept in the memory
of the MPC/MPCL card.
During machine initialization, the hand extension is checked below the calibration label
(at the bottom of the standard Drive Column 0).
Note: Cartridges left in tape drives will not be audited. However, volume information is
retained for drives loaded by the library.
Figure 1-8. Hand-Camera Assembly (C65057)
1. Gripper
3 2. Drive belt
3. Motor
2
4. LED (MPL)
card
4
C65057

Library Electronic Components
■ Library Electronic Components

The major electronic components of the library are shown in Figure 1-9 and
Figure 1-10 on page 1-31. These components are behind the right front door of the
library.
Figure 1-9. Library Electronic Components (1 of 2) (C65151)
1. Electronics module
frame
1
2. MPC/MPCL card
3. MPM (multiplexor card
for second drive column)
4. MPV card (not required
for LVD/SE operation on
MPCL card)
5. Compact PCI (CPCI)
2 module
6. MPU (fiber expansion)
or MPW (LVD SCSI)
card (not required for
3 LVD/SE operation on
MPCL card)
5
6
C65151

Library Electronic Components
Figure 1-10. Library Electronic Components (2 of 2) (C65058)
1. MPC/MPCL and
associated logic cards
2. Fan tray assembly
3. Standard DC power
supply
4. Standard AC power
distribution unit (PDU)
1 5. AC power cables
6. Standard PDU circuit
breaker
7. Optional second power
cable
8. Optional second PDU
14 circuit breaker
9. Optional AC PDU
10. Bulkhead
11. Optional second DC
power supply
2 12. Library-to-client SCSI
13
control cables (shown
in HVD position)
13. MPU (Fibre Channel),
MPW (LVD SCSI for
MPC card), or LVD/SE
12 SCSI (for MPCL card)
14. MPC/MPCL card
11
10
6
7
8 9
C65058

Library Power System
■ Library Power System

The library power system consists of:
• One or two AC power distribution units (PDUs) that:
- Operate within a line voltage of 90 to 265 VAC, 50 or 60 Hz
- Distribute AC voltage to the drives
- Are protected from overcurrent by circuit breakers
Note: When installing your drives in a library that has two AC PDUs, attach each
PDU to a separate branch circuit. Be sure that you have referred to
“Site Power Considerations” on page 1-34 to establish the site power
requirements.
• One or two DC power supplies that provide voltage to the library

The library may also contain an optional Uninterruptible power source (UPS) that:
• provides fully redundant power to the library and drives in the event of a power
failure
• supplies conditioning power to prevent surges, spikes, and brownouts
The UPS controls all the above through an intelligent switch. The feature includes two
battery packs, a power strip, and the rack-mounted switch. The optional conversion bills
are listed in Table 1-11 on page 1-20. The applicable cooling modification must be
installed if this feature is used (see “Rack Cooling” on page 1-17)
There are many possible power configurations available for the library and drives. These
are explained in “Library Power Configurations” on page 4-16.
DC Power Supplies
If your library has two DC power supplies, both supplies will power the library during
normal operation. If a fault is detected in one supply, the second DC power supply will
assume control and post the error to the FSC log.

Power Specifications
Library power specifications are listed in Table 1-16.
Table 1-16. Library Power Specifications
U.S./Canada:
100 to 127 VAC UL/CSA power cable
Power cable
International:
200 to 240 VAC HAR power cable
Input voltage
100 to 127 VAC / 200 to 240 VAC
ranges
Library: 1.0 A at 120 VAC (0.5 A at 240 VAC)
DLT 7000—DLT 8000: Refer to DLT manuals.
Input current DLT-S4: Refer to Quantum manuals
T9x40: Refer to T9x40 manuals.
Ultrium: Refer to specific manufacturer’s manual.
U.S./Canada:
Power Single-phase 100 VAC, 50 to 60 Hz, 15 A Service, 3 wire
configuration International:
Single-phase 200 to 240 VAC, 50 to 60 Hz, 10 A Service, 3 wire
Library only: 120 W
Power
DLT-S4: Refer to Quantum manuals
consumption
Library only: 410 Btu/hr
Maximum heat
DLT-S4: Refer to Quantum manuals
output

Site Power Considerations

Table 1-17 lists the maximum number of tape drives that may be installed on a single AC
circuit. Please note the differences between the Power Factor Correction (PFC) and non-
PFC drive configuration.
The maximum configuration of drives with non-PFC supplies requires two AC circuits.
Table 1-17. Maximum Number of Drives on Single AC Circuit
Voltage 120 VAC1. 220 VAC1.

Current Capacity 10 or 15 A
15 A 20 A 15 A or 20 A
(International)
Phase Single Phase Single Phase Single Phase Two Phase
Power Cord 10 or 15 A
Rating2. 15 A 15 A or 20 A 15 A
(International)
Plug Style Non- Non- Non- Non-
Locking3 Locking3 Locking3 Locking3
locking locking locking locking
Maximum Number of Drives Maximum Number of Drives
T9x40/ 12 12 12 12 9 12 9 12
DLT w/non-
10 10 10 13 5 16 5 20
PFC
DLT w/PFC 4. 16 16 20 20 20 20 20 20
Ultrium 16 16 20 20 20 20 20 20
1. Numbers in this table include library robotics requirements. It is recommended that site power be sized to
accommodate expansion to the maximum number of tape drives.
2. Two power cords are required if over 10 DLT/Ultrium or six T9x40 drives are installed.
3. Use locking plugs for non-power factor corrected (non-PFC) DLTs mixed with T9x40s or PFC DLTs.
4. PFC power supplies have less leakage current and lower peak current demand on the AC input. PFC
supplies are currently not available.
Use Table 1-17 to determine:

• The number of customer drives
• Whether the drives require locking or non-locking plugs
Note: All new DLT power supplies ship with the PFC power supply (85 W).
• If more than 10 DLT, 10 Ultrium, or six T9x40 drives must be installed (two power
cables required)
• The AC circuit the customer will supply
When your determination is made, select power cables from
“Power Cable Part Numbers” on page 1-35.

Power Cable Part Numbers

The customer must order the power cable and supply the correct receptacle. Power
cables for the tape library are listed in Table 1-18.
Table 1-18. L700e Power Cables
If the Library Contains...

Older DLT
Input Only T9x40/T10000 drives,
Country Drives, (with
Voltage newer DLT Drives, Ultrium Optional Redundant
non-PFC
Drives, or a mixture of T9x40 AC power option
power
and newer drives
supplies)
Nema 5–15P The customer must
U.S./ Nema 5–15P
100–127 10083634 provide two L5-30R
Canada 10083634
VAC receptacles.
15 A JIS 8303 JIS 8303
Japan
10083649 10083649
Locking1.
AS 3112
Australia IEC 60309
10083650
10083635
Locking
CEE 7/7
Europe2. IEC 60309
10083646
10083635
Locking
CEI.23
Italy IEC 60309
200–240 10083651 The customer must
10083635
VAC provide two Hubbell
10 or 15 A BS 546 or Locking 316R6W receptacles.
South
BS 1363 IEC 60309
Africa
10083655 10083635
Locking
South KS 8305
IEC 60309
Korea 10083656
10083635
Locking1.
United BS 1363
IEC 60309
Kingdom 10083653
10083635

Table 1-18. L700e Power Cables (Continued)
If the Library Contains...

Older DLT
Input Only T9x40/T10000 drives,
Country Drives, (with
Voltage newer DLT Drives, Ultrium Optional Redundant
non-PFC
Drives, or a mixture of T9x40 AC power option
power
and newer drives
supplies)
Locking
IEC 60309
200–240 410573502 The customer must
U.S./ NEMA 6–15
VAC or provide two Hubbell
Canada 10083644
10 or 15 A NEMA L6– 316R6W receptacles.
15P
10083645
1. Use locking plugs for DLTs or DLTs mixed with T9x40s.
2. Europe includes Germany, Norway, Sweden, Denmark, Finland, the Netherlands, Belgium, France, and
Switzerland.

Physical Specifications
■ Physical Specifications
The physical dimensions of the tape library are shown in Figure 1-11.
Table 1-19 on page 1-38 lists the variable weight specifications for the tape library.
Figure 1-11. Physical Dimensions—General (C65059)
C65059
1. Depth with expansion frame: 1.12 m (44 in.)

2. Height: 1.8 m (72 in.)
3. Width with covers: 1.6 m (62 in.)
4. Depth without expansion frame: 1 m (37.5 in.)
Total weight (approximate) of the library with covers: 345 kg (761 lbs)
Note: Add 150 mm (6 in.) for top clearance and 100 mm (4 in.) on sides for cooling.

Environmental Specifications
Table 1-19. L700e Weight Variations
10 DLT or 20 DLT or
12 T9x40 12 T10000
L700-E40 No Drives Ultrium Ultrium
Drives Drives
Drives Drives
Weight w/covers 345 kg 398 kg 451 kg 408 kg 444.6 kg
(761 lbs) (941 lbs) (995 lbs) (901 lbs) (980.6 lbs)
Shipping weight 503 kg (1109 See drive See drive See drive See drive
lbs) manual manual manual manual
Weight (w/expansion 413 kg 466 kg 519 kg 476 kg 512.8 kg
frame) (911 lbs) (1,027 lbs) (1,144 lbs) (1,049 lbs) (1,130.6 lbs)
Weight (w/expansion 504 kg 579 kg 610 kg 567kg 608.4 kg
frame and tapes) (1,111 lbs) (1,227 lbs) (1,344 lbs) (1,249 lbs) (1341.4 lbs)
Pass-thru Port Weight with
covers: 43
kg (92 lbs)
Shipping
weight: 97.5
kg (215 lbs)
■ Environmental Specifications
Table 1-20 lists the environmental consideration for the tape library.
\
Table 1-20. Library Environmental Specifications
Temperature
Operating 15° to 32°C (59° to 90°F)
Storage 10° to 40°C (50° to 104°F)
Shipping -40° to 60°C (-40° to 140°F)
Relative Humidity
Operating 20% to 80% (non condensing)
Storage 10% to 95% (non condensing)
Shipping 10% to 95% (non condensing)
Wet Bulb Maximum
Operating 29.2°C (84.5°F)
Storage 35°C (95°F)
Shipping 35°C (95°F)
Altitude
Operating 0 to 3.05 km (0 to 10,000 ft)
Storage 0 to 3.05 km (0 to 10,000 ft)
Shipping 0 to 15.24 km (0 to 50,000 ft)



Installing the Library and Drives 2
This chapter contains the procedures for unpacking and installing the library and drives.
Special installation considerations are included where applicable.
Installation of the L1400M library and drives is identical to the L700e, except for
differences identified in Appendix D.
■ Hardware Installation Checklist

Table 2-1 summarizes the steps required to install the library. Make sure all steps are
completed in the sequence listed.
Table 2-1. Hardware Installation Checklist
Item Procedure
❑ “Preface” on page xxi
❑ “Preparing the Library Location (Standard)” on page 2-3
❑ “Preparing the Library Location (Seismic Areas)” on page 2-6*
❑ “Unpacking the Library” on page 2-8
❑ “Removing the Library from the Pallet” on page 2-10
❑ “Moving the Library” on page 2-11
❑ “Securing the Library Position (Standard)” on page 2-14
❑ “Securing the Library Position (Seismic Areas)” on page 2-15*
❑ “Removing the Shipping Kit” on page 2-14
❑ “Installing the Expansion Frame” on page 2-18*
❑ “Installing Features” on page 2-55
❑ “Installing Tape Drives” on page 2-23
❑ “Installing Fibre Channel Components” on page 2-55*
❑ “Installing the L700-PTP” on page 3-1*
❑ “Installing Cables” on page 4-1
❑ “Connecting Power” on page 4-19
❑ “Configuring the Library” on page 5-1
❑ “Testing the Library” on page 6-1

Required Tools
Table 2-1. Hardware Installation Checklist (Continued)
Item Procedure
❑ “Placing the Library Online” on page 6-26
* If applicable
■ Required Tools
Tools you will need to install the library and its associated tape drives are:
• 3/4-inch wrench (STK tool crib part WR08), adjustable wrench (STK tool crib part
WR11), or socket wrench
• Phillips screwdriver
• Torx set
• 3/16-inch nut driver
• 5/16-inch nut driver
• Diagonal cutters or knife
• Laptop personal computer
• RJ45 cable (part 4108289xx)—included in shipping kit
• RJ45—DB9 adapter (part 10410823, included in shipping kit) or CSE DOS
Diagnostic cable—part 24100134
Additional tools you will need to install the expansion frame are:
• Adjustable wrench
• Flat blade screwdriver
• Flashlight
An additional tool you might need for the Pass-thru Port (PTP) installation is a small step
ladder.

Preparing the Library Location (Standard)
■ Preparing the Library Location (Standard)

Be sure to allow enough space for the library; plan the signal and power cable routing and
provide enough space to open all doors (Figure 2-1 and Figure 2-2 on page 2-5).
Note: For installations involving a PTP, see Figure 3-2 on page 3-4.
Provide 150 mm (6 in.) above the library and 100 mm (4 in.) on the sides for cooling
clearances.
Figure 2-1. Cable Access Locations (C65387)
4 3
C65387
1. Tape drive signal cables

2. Cables to/from 13U cabinet area
3. Power cable
Note: Safety agency standards require that your power receptacle is located within
2.8 m (9.2 ft) of the tape library. The power receptacle must also be easily
accessible.
In sites where the power cable is directly wired to a power source, the facility
must have a readily accessible disconnect device incorporated in the fixed
wiring (15 A).

R em arque : Les normes des organismes de sécurité requièrent que votre prise de
courant soit située à moins de 2,8 m de la bibliothèque. La prise de courant
doit être d’accès aisé.
Sur les sites où le câble d’alimentation est directement connecté à une

source d’alimentation, un système de déconnexion facile d’accès doit être
intégré au câblage fixe (15 A).
H inw eis: G emäß den geltenden sicherheitsrechtlichen V orschriften darf die

N etzsteckdose maximal 2,8 m von der Library entfernt sein. A ußerdem muß
die Steckdose gut zugänglich sein.
W enn das N etzkabel fest an die Stromquelle angeschlossen ist, muß sich in
der Festverdrahtung eine gut zugängliche U nterbrechungseinrichtung
befinden (15 A).
W skazów ka: Przepisy BH P w ymagają, aby skrzynka zasilania znajdow ała się w
odległości 2,8 m od biblioteki. D o skrzynki zasilania musi być łatw y dostęp.
W miejscach, gdzie kabel zasilania jest bezpośrednio podłączony do źródła
prądu, w układzie zasilania zamontow anym na stałe musi być w budowane
urządzenie pozw alające na łatw e odłączenie źródła prądu (15 A ).

Figure 2-2. Service Area Requirements (C65061)
C65061
1. Access door and right side door open: 2.3 m (7.6 ft)
2. Rear door and right front door open: 2.1 m (6.9 ft)
Note: If your installation requires a Pass-thru Port, see Figure 3-3 on page 3-5.

Preparing the Library Location (Seismic Areas)
■ Preparing the Library Location (Seismic Areas)

For sites in areas of seismic activity, the customer may wish to permanently fix the library
position for added stability. The wheel assemblies must be removed and the wheel
mounting studs used to permanently fix the library’s position.
Refer to Figure 2-3 on page 2-7 for locations of the wheel mounting studs.
WARNING:
Bodily injury/equipment damage: A licensed seismic engineer must be
consulted to verify seismic zone exposures and adequate site
preparation.
ADVERTENCIA:
Lesiones físicas/daños materiales: Debe consultarse a un ingeniero
especializado en sismología para verificar la exposición a zonas
sísmicas y preparar adecuadamente el emplazamiento.

Preparing the Library Location (Seismic Areas)
Figure 2-3. Library Floor—Wheel Stud Locations (C65275)
15
16
19 17
21 20 18
22
14 12
13
1 11
2
3
4
6 7
8 10
9
C65275
1. 31.28 mm (1.25 in.) 9. 1.5 m (60 in.) 17. 520.7 mm (20.5 in.)
2. 736.6 mm (29 in.) 10. 186.6 mm (7.3 in.) 18. 47.27 mm (1.86 in.)
3. 612.8 mm (24.1 in.) 11. 38.1 mm (1.5 in.) 19. 203.2 mm (8.0 in.)
4. 60.3 mm (2.4 in.) 12. 297.4 mm (11.7 in.) 20. 155.9 mm (6.14 in.)
5. 31.8 mm (1.3 in.) 13. 260.4 mm (10.25 in.) 21. 30.73 mm (1.21 in.)
6. 186.5 mm (7.3 in.) 14. 222.25 mm (8.75 in.) 22. 15.75 mm (0.62 in.)
7. 85.7 mm (3.4 in.) 15. 1.0 m (39.5 in.)
8. 1.07 m (42 in.) 16. 0.93 m (36.5 in.)

Unpacking the Library
CAUTION:
Frame damage: Do not attempt to use the holes for the shipping bolts to
permanently fix the library’s position. The frame may bend.
Be sure that the considerations below are followed:

1. Cooling clearances must be provided: 150 mm (6 in.) above the library, 114.3 mm
(4.5 in.) below the library, and 100 mm (4 in.) on the sides.
2. Allow service area access: 2.3 m (7.6 ft) wide by 2.1 m (6.9 ft) deep (reference
Figure 2-2 on page 2-5).
3. Plan for any unique cable paths that may be needed.
■ Unpacking the Library

You will need a diagonal cutters or knife to cut the shipping straps.
Refer to Figure 2-4 on page 2-9 and:
1. Remove and retain the shipping bill.
WARNING:
Personal Injury: Be sure no one is near the shipping straps when you are
ready to cut them. The straps are under tension and could strike
someone when cut loose.
ADVERTENCIA:
Lesiones físicas: Asegúrese de que no haya ninguna persona en las
proximidades de los zunchos cuando se disponga a cortarlos. Los
zunchos están tensados y podrían golpear a alguien al ser cortados.
2. While holding the shipping ramp against the library box covers, carefully cut the
three wrapping straps on the exterior of the packaging.
3. Remove the ramp and corrugated box covers.
4. Remove the shipping bag (not shown).

Unpacking the Library
Figure 2-4. Unpacking the Library (C65062)
5
C65062
1. Ramp 5. Ramp posts
2. Inner shipping box 6. 3/4-inch mounting bolts (4)
3. Shipping box and ramp strap 7. Washers (4)
4. Shipping pallet 8. Shipping box straps

Removing the Library from the Pallet
■ Removing the Library from the Pallet

Note: Some shipping agreements require the shipper to remove the library from its
shipping pallet. If this is the case, you may skip this section.
If you must remove the library from its pallet, perform the following procedure:
WARNING:
Heavy load. At least two people are required to remove the library from
its shipping pallet.
ADVERTENCIA:
Carga pesada. Para retirar la biblioteca del palet de transporte se
requieren como mínimo dos personas.
AVERTISSEMENT :
CHARGE LOURDE. Deux personnes au moins sont requises pour retirer la
bibliothèque de sa palette de transport.
VORSICHT:
HOHES GEWICHT. Um die Library von der Lieferpalette zu heben,
benötigen Sie mindestens einen Helfer.
OSTRZEŻENIE:
DUŻA WAGA. Co najmniej dwie osoby powinny wyjmować bibliotekę z palety
wysyłkowej.
1. Using a 3/4-inch (or adjustable) wrench or socket, remove the four 3/4-inch bolts
that secure the library to the pallet.
2. Remove the four wood blocks positioned near the bolts.
3. Position the ramp by aligning the holes of the ramp with the two posts on the pallet,
as shown in Figure 2-4 on page 2-9.
4. Seat the ramp securely upon the two posts.
5. With people on both sides of the library, carefully guide the library down the ramp.
6. Remove the ramp and pallet from your work area. You may re-use or dispose of the
shipping materials according to your local policies.

Moving the Library
■ Moving the Library

Use two people to move the library to its installation position. If the library fits through
the data center doors, proceed to “Positioning the Library” on page 2-14.
If the library does not fit through the building doors, refer to Figure 2-5 while following
the applicable procedures below.
.
Figure 2-5. Physical Dimensions–Detailed (C65028)
5
3
10 9 4
7 6
8
C65028
1. Rear door 7. Right front access door with facades - depth = 89

2. Rear door - depth = 114 mm (4.5in.) mm (3.5 in.)
3. Frame - depth = 737 mm (29 in.) 8. Left front access door with facade - depth =
4. Rear door and rear wall panel removed - 76 mm (3 in.)
depth = 826 mm (32.5 in.) 9. Left front access door with facade, rear panel
5. Rear door and front facade - depth = 953 mm removed - depth = 800 mm (31.5 in.)
(37.5 in.) 10. Left front access door with facade, rear panel
6. Front facade - depth = 89 mm (3.5 in.) attached - depth = 826 mm (32.5 in.)

Moving the Library
Removing the Rear Door

To remove the rear door to fit the library through a narrow opening:
1. Open the rear door.
2. Detach the lanyard strap by pulling it up off the plastic fastener at the frame.
WARNING:
Possible physical injury: Be careful when removing the door. Follow the
procedures in “Lifting Techniques” on page xxix.
ADVERTENCIA:
Posibilidad de lesiones físicas: Tenga cuidado al retirar la puerta. Siga
los procedimientos expuestos en “Lifting Techniques” on page xxix.
3. Lift the door straight up off the hinges and place the door aside.
Using a T-25 Torx driver, remove the four screws and four cable guides. If this procedure
gives you the required clearance, replace the hardware and covers you removed when the
library is moved through all building doors.
If you need more door clearance, follow the next procedure to remove the front facades.
Removal of the facade covers and operator panel will reduce the library depth by an
additional 89 mm(3.5 in.) at its widest protrusion.
Removing the Front Facades

To remove the front facades of the library:
1. Open the right front access door.
2. Detach the lanyard strap by pulling it up off the plastic fastener on the frame.
WARNING:
Possible physical injury: Be careful when removing the door. Follow the
ADVERTENCIA:
Posibilidad de lesiones físicas: Tenga cuidado al retirar la puerta. Siga
los procedimientos expuestos en “Lifting Techniques” on page xxix.
3. Lift the door straight up off the hinges and place the door aside.
4. Open the shipping kit (see “Removing the Shipping Kit” on page 2-14) and obtain
the library door key.
5. Open the left front access door.
6. On the interior side of the door, locate the T-25 Torx screw that retains the front
facade (approximately half way down, near the hinge) and remove the screw.

Moving the Library
7. At the front of the left library access door, lift the front facade straight up and place
it aside.
Removing the Operator Panel

To remove the operator panel:
1. Disconnect the cable connector at the front of the panel by squeezing and pulling the
connector.
2. Use a T-25 Torx driver to remove the two panel screws.
3. Carefully place the operator panel in the recessed tray.
Once the library is placed in its final location, replace the hardware, covers, and operator
panel.
Removing the Rear Cover and Door Hinges

If more door clearance, follow the next procedure to remove the rear cover panel and
rear door hinges.
1. Obtain a piece of firm cardboard (approximately 1/8 in. thick). Insert the cardboard
at the lower right corner of the rear cover panel, between the rear cover and frame.
This will release the spring steel retainer.
WARNING:
Possible physical injury: Be careful when removing the panel. Follow the
ADVERTENCIA:
Posibilidad de lesiones físicas: Tenga cuidado al retirar el panel. Siga los
procedimientos expuestos en “Lifting Techniques” on page xxix.
2. Lift the panel straight up and remove it from its mushroom retainers. You may also
remove the mushroom retainers by using a T-30 Torx driver.
3. If you need to remove the hinges that hold the rear door, use a T-20 Torx tool to
remove the hinge screws.
4. Once the library is moved through all building doors, replace the hardware and
covers you removed.

Positioning the Library
■ Positioning the Library

To position the library for installation:
1. Carefully roll the library to its installation location.
2. Position the library to allow space for maintenance and operator access. These space
requirements are shown in Figure 2-2 on page 2-5.
3. If your installation requires that you have cables routed underneath a raised floor, be
sure the floor cutouts are in the correct positions.
■ Removing the Shipping Kit

To remove the library shipping kit:
1. Insert a Phillips screwdriver into each screw on the right, side door latches; and turn
each screw counterclockwise to release the latches.
2. Lift both latches up and turn them both counterclockwise to release them and open
the right side door.
3. Open the installation kit and remove the library door key (part 310293301) from the
kit.
4. Open the right front door.
5. Insert the library door key into each key slot in the left access door and turn the key
counterclockwise.
6. Open the left library door.
■ Securing the Library Position (Standard)

To secure the library position:
1. Apply the four wheel chocks (part 4048) from the shipping kit to the four wheels of
the library.
2. Make sure the library does not move from its floor position.

Securing the Library Position (Seismic Areas)
■ Securing the Library Position (Seismic Areas)

WARNING:
Bodily injury/equipment damage: A licensed seismic engineer must be
consulted to verify building codes and installation criteria.
ADVERTENCIA:
Lesiones físicas/daños materiales: Debe consultarse a un ingeniero
especializado en sismología para verificar los códigos de construcción
y criterios de instalación.
For those customers wishing to permanently fix the library’s position:

1. Move the library into position and line up the wheel assembly mounting studs with
their designated positions above the floor or platform.
2. Secure the library into position using the nuts removed from the wheel assemblies.
Torque the nuts to 3.0 Nm (27 in.-lb) maximum
■ Unpacking the Library Interior

To unpack the interior portion of the library:
1. Locate and remove the Z column shipping pin (shown in Figure 2-6).
Figure 2-6. Z Column Shipping Pin (C65063)
C65063

Unpacking the Library Interior
2. Locate and remove the theta shipping pin (shown in Figure 2-7).
Figure 2-7. Theta Shipping Pin (C65102)
C65102
3. Retain the shipping pins. They are required for any maintenance procedures to the Z
and theta motors. A suggested storage location is behind the right front door.

Unpacking the Library Interior
CAUTION:
Hand-Camera Damage: Move the Z column and the Z carriage at the two
points shown in the following two figures. Excessive force will damage
the hand and its attaching hardware.
4. Move the Z column (as shown in Figure 2-8) to access the hand assembly.
Figure 2-8. Z Column Movement (C65064)
C65064

Installing the Expansion Frame
5. Raise the hand assembly to waist level as shown in Figure 2-9. Remove and discard
the foam packing material from inside the hand assembly.
Note: Make sure that the hand is left in the fully retracted position.
Figure 2-9. Moving the Z Carriage (C65065)
■ Installing the Expansion Frame

The frame adds 294 cartridge storage locations to the library. The installation procedure
should take about two hours to complete.
If your library requires an expansion frame, follow the procedure below. If no expansion
frame installation is required, proceed to “Installing Tape Drives” on page 2-23.
To prepare the library for the expansion frame:
1. Use a flat blade screwdriver to remove any theta stop from positions “1” or “3.”
(shown in Figure 2-10 on page 2-19). Only one theta stop should remain—the theta
stop in position “2” (full capacity).
Note: The library automatically configures for 1/3, 2/3, or full capacity when the
library is powered on and the firmware is loaded. If the theta stops are not in the
correct position for your library model, an error will occur.

Figure 2-10. Theta Stops—Standalone Library (C65122)
C
D
C65122
1. Stop A plus stop D = 1/3 capacity

2. Stop B plus stop D = 1/3 capacity with PTP (see “Theta Stop Position for 1/3 Capacity” on page 3-3)
3. Stop C plus stop D = 2/3 capacity position
4. Stop C alone = full capacity
WARNING:
Heavy load: Two or more people are required to remove the expansion
frame from its shipping package and install the expansion frame.
ADVERTENCIA:
Carga pesada: Para retirar el bastidor de expansión del embalaje e
instalarlo se requieren como mínimo dos personas.
AVERTISSEMENT :
CHARGE LOURDE. Deux personnes au moins sont requises pour retirer le
panneau de la bibliothèque et installer le cadre d’extension.
VORSICHT:
HOHES GEWICHT. Um die Abdeckung der Library zu öffnen und den
Erweiterungsrahmen einzubauen, benötigen Sie mindestens einen Helfer.
OSTRZEŻENIE:
DUŻA WAGA. Co najmniej dwie osoby powinny wyjmować panel biblioteki i
instalować zespół rozszerzenia biblioteki.

2. Using a Torx T-30 bit, remove the six mushroom attachments from the rear of the
library frame by turning them counterclockwise.
WARNING:
Possible head injury. Note the position of the theta lock bracket mounted
on the top inside surface of the library. Be careful not to hit your head on
the bracket.
ADVERTENCIA:
Posibilidad de lesiones en la cabeza. Observe la posición de la
abrazadera de fijación ortogonal montada en la superficie interior
superior de la biblioteca. Tenga cuidado de no golpearse la cabeza con
la abrazadera.
3. Position the robot hand at the top of the Z column and facing the tape drives
Decals on the library wall show panel and column locations. Viewed from the right,
rear of the library, locate the tape arrays at Panel 2, Column 4. These arrays must be
removed to allow you access to the mounting holes for the expansion frame. To
remove the arrays:
a. You might need a flashlight for this step. Refer to Figure 2-11 and insert a flat
blade screwdriver into the position shown.
Figure 2-11. Array Lock Removal and Replacement (C65148)
C65148
1. Insert screwdriver as shown
b. Gently pry up on the array lock and pull back on the bottom of the assembly to
remove it. Place the array lock aside.
c. Lift up and pull out the top array.
d. Continue removing the arrays until you have clear access to the mounting holes.
Place all arrays clear of your work area.

4. Move the robotic hand to gain access to theta stop 3 (refer to

Figure 2-10 on page 2-19). Remove theta stop number 3.
5. Refer to Figure 2-10 on page 2-19. If theta stop number 1 is present, remove this
stop also. The only theta stop that should remain is stop number 2.
6. Refer to Figure 2-12 while unpacking the expansion frame and its attachment screws
from the shipping package. Lay the expansion frame on its back.
Figure 2-12. Expansion Frame—Unpacking (C65031)
C65031
1. Plywood top 4. Cardboard frame
2. Foam cover 5. Expansion door
3. Side packing (2) 6. Pallet
7. Measure the distance from the floor of the room to the inside floor of the library.
8. Adjust the four leveling bolts on the expansion frame (measured from the inside
floor of the expansion frame to the bottom of the leveling bolt) to approximate the
distance measured in the previous step.

CAUTION:
Component Damage: Be careful not to bend the leveling bolts in the
following step.
9. Raise the expansion frame and position it up against the library frame opening.
10. Refer to Figure 2-13. Note the two alignment pins at the top and bottom of the
frame. Move the frame closely to the rear of the library.
Figure 2-13. Attaching the Expansion Frame (C65098)
C65098
1. Expansion frame 3. Mounting screws (6)

2. Alignment pin (2) 4. Leveling bolt (4)

Installing Tape Drives
11. Using an adjustable wrench, adjust the legs of the expansion frame until the pins on
the expansion unit align with the holes in the library wall:
a. Align the bottom pin on the expansion frame first
b. Align the top pin on the expansion frame next
12. When aligned, push the frame to mate with the alignment holes in the library wall.
13. From the interior of the library, thread the six 1/4-20 x 1/2-inch screws (supplied in
the expansion frame kit) through the library wall and into the expansion frame. Using
a T-30 Torx driver, tighten the screws.
14. Replace the arrays and array lock at Panel 2, Column 4.
■ Installing Tape Drives

Tape drives are shipped individually. Due to the size differences of the DLT, Ultrium, and
T9x40/T10000 drives, there are a variety of ways of installing the drives.
Note: If you plan to install other drives in the future, you should initially install drives in
the top slots and work down since drive numbers are assigned from top-to-
bottom (0–x).
If the initial drives are installed from the bottom slots and up, any additional
drive installation will cause the entire column of drives to be re-numbered from
the top to the bottom. This will involve extra work from the system viewpoint.
CAUTION:
Possible data loss: StorageTek does not advise mixing DLT 7000 and
DLT 8000 drives in the same library. If a DLT 7000 cartridge is inserted
into a DLT 8000 drive, the tape can be read and written in 7000 mode.
If a DLT 8000 cartridge is inserted into a DLT 7000 drive, the drive will
indicate “Medium Error/Calibration Error (03/8000)” if a read command is
issued and, as with most tape drives, will write over any data present on
the tape if a write command is issued at load point.

General Physical Considerations

Refer to Figure 2-14 and the following explanation for the physical location rules for
installing drives.
1. The first callout in Figure 2-14 shows that the uppermost drive slot in the drive
column can only be a DLT or Ultrium drive.
Figure 2-14. Tape Drive Installation Rules (C65107)
C65107
Note: T9x40/T10000-to-DLT (Ultrium) drive space ratios are shown. This does not
imply that you must install drives according to this illustration.
1. DLT or Ultrium drive only
2. Two T9x40/T10000 drives: space equivalent to three DLT or Ultrium drives
3. Three DLT or Ultrium drives: space equivalent to two T9x40/T10000 drives
4. Mixed T9x40/T10000 and DLT drives (shown) or three DLT or Ultrium drives or two
T9x40/T10000 drives

2. The second callout depicts the size ratio of the T9x40/T10000 drives to the DLT or
Ultrium drives. In size, two T9x40 drives fit in the same space as three DLT or
Ultrium drives.
CAUTION:
T9x40/ Drive Target Errors: Before installing T9x40 drives, be sure to
refer to “T9x40 and T10000 Considerations” on page 2-29.
3. The third callout shows this ratio again: three DLT or Ultrium drives fit into the
same space as two T9x40 drives.
4. The fourth callout depicts a mixture of T9x40/T10000 and DLT or Ultrium drives.
CAUTION:
Possible connector damage: Before installing any drive, be sure to
check the mating connector in the drive tower. The connector must move
freely or damage could occur when sliding in the drive tray.
You may also install six T9x40/T10000 drives plus one DLT or Ultrium drive in a
column, where the DLT or Ultrium drive occupies the top drive slot. Table 2-2 lists the
available combinations for one drive column.
Table 2-2. Drive Combinations (per drive column)
T9x40/T10000 SDLT/DLT or Ultrium

0 10
1 8
2 7
3 5
4 4
5 2
6 1
Drive positions and their internal library-to-drive numbers are automatically configured
during initialization. You must, however, configure their SCSI IDs and “on bus” or “off bus” status.
The configuration procedure is explained in Chapter 5, “Configuring the Library.”

Ultrium 2 SCSI and Fibre Channel Drives

Support for Hewlett Packard Ultrium 2 (LTO) SCSI drives is provided with library
firmware version 3.03 and later.
Support for IBM Ultrium 2 Fibre Channel drives is provided with firmware version 3.04
and later.
Ultrium 2 drive/tape specifics include:
1. Use of standard Ultrium 2 cartridges
2. Ability to read/write to Ultrium 1 tape media
3. Interface: Fibre Channel (IBM) or LVD (HP)
4. Model code: LTO2001
5. Feature code: HPLV (HP) or IBFC (IBM)
6. Cartridge memory: 4 KB
7. Cartridge Media ID: “L2” (200 GB)
The major improvements seen with the Ultrium 2 drives are:
• Increased native capacity of 200 GB
• Increased compressed capacity of up to 400 GB
• Data transfer rate of 40–80 MB/sec


Support for Hewlett Packard Ultrium 3 (LTO) SCSI and Fibre Channel, and HP/IBM
Ultrium 3 Fibre Channel drives is provided with library firmware version 3.08.01 and
later.
1. Uses standard Ultrium 3 cartridges
2. Reads/writes to Ultrium 2 tape media. Read only from Ultrium 1 tape media.
3. Interfaces: Native LVD SCSI (HP) or Fibre Channel (HP/IBM)
5. Feature codes:
• Hewlett Packard: HPLV (LVD) and HPFC (Fibre Channel)
• IBM: IBFC (Fibre Channel)
7. Cartridge Media ID: “L3”
• Increased compressed capacity of up to 800 GB
• Read/write to 400 GB WORM (Write Once Read Many) cartridges

Support for Hewlett Packard Ultrium 4 (LTO) SCSI and Fibre Channel, and HP/IBM
Ultrium 4 Fibre Channel drives is provided when the drives become available.
1. Uses standard Ultrium 4 cartridges
2. Reads/writes to Ultrium 3 tape media. Read only from Ultrium 2 tape media.
3. Interfaces: Native LVD SCSI (HP) or Fibre Channel (HP/IBM)
5. Feature codes:
• Hewlett Packard: HPSC (LVD) and HP2FC (Fibre Channel)
• IBM: IB4FC (Fibre Channel)
7. Cartridge Media ID: “L4”


• Increased compressed capacity of up to 1.6 TB
• Read/write to 400 GB and 800 GB WORM cartridges

T9x40 and T10000 Considerations

T9x40 and T10000 drives may only be installed on the shelves and tabs shown in
Figure 2-15.
Figure 2-15. T9x40 Drive Locations (C65413)
1 2
C65413
1. Shelf
2. Tab

Installing DLT 7000/8000 SCSI Drives

For DLT 7000/8000 SCSI drives, follow the procedure below to unpack and install the
drives.
DLT tape drives are shipped with the following, non-selectable configurations:
• DLT 7000 (manufacturer’s model number)
• DLT 8000 (manufacturer’s model number)
• SCSI HVD, single-ended, or LVD/SE operation (set at factory)
CAUTION:
Possible data loss: StorageTek does not advise mixing DLT 7000E and
DLT 8000 drives in the same library. If a DLT 7000E cartridge is inserted
into a DLT 8000 drive, the tape can be read but not written on. If a
DLT 8000 cartridge is inserted into a DLT 7000E drive, the drive detects
the tape as blank and will write over the information.
Make sure the labels match the drive type and interface required (Figure 2-16).
Figure 2-16. DLT Labels (C65115)
C65115
1. Manufacturer’s model number label

2. Single-ended or Differential label (and drive serial number)

CAUTION:
DLT equipment damage: Do not move the load latch of a tape drive by
hand until told to do so in later instructions.
1. Open the drive access section of the library (at the right side, as viewed from the
front of the library) by lifting up on the two latches. Turn the latches
counterclockwise and open the side door.
2. Open the drive package.
3. Remove the packing material.
Note: Check with the customer for a maintenance agreement on the drives. If the
drives are to be returned for repair, have the customer retain one shipping box
(with packing material) in case a drive must be returned to the factory. Some
maintenance agreements allow drive replacement by trained and certified
personnel on the customer’s staff.
4. Verify whether TERMPWR for DLT 7000/8000 drives is on or off (enabled or

disabled) for each tape drive. If needed, move the jumper to match your requirement.
• TERMPWR On: Install the jumper on the pins shown in Figure 2-17.
• TERMPWR Off: Remove the strap on the pins shown in Figure 2-17. You can
store the strap by placing it on one pin only.
Figure 2-17. Terminating Power Jumper—DLT 7000/8000 Drive (C65116)
2 1
3
C65116
1. DLT drive 3. TERMPWR jumper (shown enabled)

2. Load latch

CAUTION:
Loss of data or degradation of performance: StorageTek recommends
supplying terminating power (TERMPWR) from devices attached at both
ends of the SCSI bus. Industry standards advise that no more than three
devices provide terminating power to the bus.
Improper termination will cause I/O and read/write errors.
5. Carefully place each drive near the rear slots at the right side of the library.
CAUTION:
Potential bus error: Do not connect the customer’s SCSI bus cable to the
library or to the drive bulkhead until after you have configured the library
and the drives.
6. Remove the drive’s Y-cable and mounting screws from the drive box.
7. Attach the drive’s Y-cable to the drive bulkhead by:
a. Threading one of the jackscrews into the end of one of the two connectors at the
dual end of the cable. Thread the jackscrew all the way in and then back it off by
1/4-turn.
See Figure 2-18 on page 2-33 as you tilt the channel connector (with the
jackscrew end at the bottom) into the slot next to the desired drive location.
Note: It is easier to insert the connector if you tilt it away from the interior of
the drive bulkhead.
b. Work from the exterior of the drive bulkhead as you grasp the connector and
thread the second jackscrew into the top of the connector.
c. Make sure the connector aligns inside its slot and tightening both jackscrews
with a 3/16-inch nut driver. Do not overtighten.
d. Repeat Steps a through c for the second connector of the Y-cable.

Figure 2-18. Tape Drives—Rear View (C65124)

I
1. DLT or Ultrium power switch 3. Single end of SCSI Y-cable

2. Thumbscrew
e. Apply the correct SCSI icon label to the bulkhead to identify the type of drive
connection.
8. Look inside the drive column area and determine the slot to use for each drive.
9. Remove and discard the drive slot cover.
Note: To remove the cover, pull on the knob.
CAUTION:
Connector damage: Check the library drive connector and make sure it
is not stuck in a locked position from the vibration during shipping. This
connector provides power and library interface to the drive.
10. Following the lifting procedures described in “Lifting Techniques” on page xxix,
firmly grasp the drive at the rear with one hand and place the other hand under the
drive mounting plate.
11. Carefully guide the drive into its slot. Push it in as far as it will go and firmly seat the
drive.

CAUTION:
Component Damage: In the following step, do not overtighten the
thumbscrew.
12. Turn the thumbscrew clockwise until it is secure, do not overtighten the thumbscrew
13. Connect the single end of the Y-cable to the SCSI connector on the rear of the drive.
14. Place the drive’s power switch to the ON (|) position.
15. Install any other drives.
Installing SDLT/DLT-S4 SCSI Drives

Note: Library firmware must be Version 3.15.02 or later for DLT-S4 support.
Note: Check with the customer for a maintenance agreement on tape drives. If the
drives are returned for repair, have the customer retain one shipping box (with
packing material) in case a drive must be sent back to the factory.
4. On SCSI SDLT drives, check the rear of the drive for the terminating power
jumper selections (Figure 2-19).
Figure 2-19. Terminating Power—SDLT Drive (C65186)
1
SDLT
C65186
1. SDLT Drive
2. Terminating power jumper (shown enabled)

CAUTION:
Note: The SDLT drive may operate on either an HVD or LVD interface. If the library
is also to run on the same LVD bus, refer to “Library SCSI Operation” on
page 1-21.
5. For SCSI DLT-S4 drives, terminating power is enabled from the factory—there is
no need to apply jumpers..
Figure 2-20. DLT-S4 Drive (C67505)
DLT-S4
1 2 3 C65705
1. SCSI connector
2. TTI (library interface) connector
3. Power connector
Note: DLT-S4 SCSI drives operate only on an LVD interface. If the library is also to run on
the same LVD bus, refer to “Library SCSI Operation” on page 1-21.
CAUTION:
Potential bus error: Do not connect the customer’s SCSI bus cable to the
library or to the drive bulkhead until after you have configured the library
and the drives.
7. Remove the drive’s Y-cable and mounting screws from the drive box.


1/4-turn.
the drive bulkhead.
d. Repeat Steps a through c for the second connector of the Y-cable.
connection.
Note: To remove the cover, pull on the knob.
CAUTION:
Connector damage: Check the library drive connector and make sure it
is not stuck in a locked position from the vibration during shipping. This
connector provides power and library interface to the drive.
drive.
CAUTION:
thumbscrew.
13. Turn the thumbscrew clockwise until it is secure, do not overtighten the thumbscrew
14. Connect the single end of the Y-cable to the SCSI connector on the rear of the drive.
15. Place the drive’s power switch to the ON (|) position.
16. Install any other drives.

Installing DLT-S4 Fibre Channel Drives

Note: Library firmware must be Version 3.15.02 or later for DLT-S4 support.
Note: To remove the drive slot cover, pull on the knob.

drive.
CAUTION:
thumbscrew.
9. Refer to Figure 2-23 on page 2-42 and turn the thumbscrew clockwise until it is
secure.
Check with the customer for a maintenance agreement on tape drives. If the drives are
returned for repair, have the customer retain one shipping box (with packing material) in
case a drive must be sent back to the factory.
Note: For Fibre Channel cabling, see “Fiber Cable Routing” on page 4-13.

Installing Ultrium Drives—General

Note: Library firmware must be Version 3.15.02 or later for Ultrium 4 support.
Ultrium drives supported for library operation are manufactured by:
• IBM1
• Hewlett Packard2
• Certance.
Native operation for IBM and HP Ultrium SCSI tape drives is through an LVD interface.
However, these drives can be adapted to operate on an HVD interface with the use of
converter cards.
Certance drives will operate on either LVD or HVD interfaces, determined by the drive’s
part number (no adapter card required).
Note: Figure 2-21 on page 2-39 illustrates how to determine if the Ultrium drive is
setup for HVD operation. IBM and HP drives with converter cards are labeled
as such; you must remove the top cover to reveal the converter cards for IBM
and HP drives.
1.IBM Ultrium 1—Native LVD, Fibre Channel or, with a converter card, HVD. Ultrium
2 Fibre Channel requires Firmware Version 3.04 or later.
2.HP Ultrium 1—Native LVD or, with a converter card, HVD. Ultrium 2 SCSI requires
Firmware Version 3.03 or later. Ultrium 3 SCSI and Fibre Channel requires Firmware Ver-
sion 3.08.01 or later.

Figure 2-21. Ultrium Drives for HVD Operation (C65310)
3
1
HP IBM CERTANCE
C65310
1. Converter card
2. Converter card
3. Certance product label

Installing IBM Ultrium SCSI Drives

Note: IBM Ultrium 4 SCSI drives are supplied with terminating power enabled. Feature
switches (bottom of drive) 1 (9600 baud) and 2 (two stop bits) are ON. Library
firmware must be Version 3.15.02 or later for Ultrium 4 support.
4. Refer to Figure 2-22 while checking the rear of the IBM Ultrium SCSI drive for the
terminating power jumper selections.
Figure 2-22. Terminating Power—Certance and IBM Ultrium 2/3 Drives

(C65311)
CERTANCE IBM
1 3
2 4
C65311
1. Certance drive—shown with terminating power ON
2. IBM drive—shown with terminating power ON (The four jumpers - counting from
right to left - are address jumpers that must be in place for library operation.
Terminating power is the fifth jumper - counting from right to left)
Note: HP and IBM Ultrium 4 drives not shown. Terminating power is always ON
and can not be changed.

CAUTION:
Remove the top cover and verify whether TERMPWR for the IBM Ultrium drive is
on or off (enabled or disabled) for each tape drive. If needed, move the jumper to
match your requirement.
a. TERMPWR On: Install the jumper on the pins shown in
Figure 2-22 on page 2-40.
b. TERMPWR Off: Remove the strap on the pins shown in
CAUTION:
Configuration problem: Do not remove any jumpers except for
terminating power (if required). The drive’s SCSI address must be set as
15 (the four jumpers, counting from the right to the left).
1/4-turn.
the drive bulkhead.
d. Repeat steps a through c for the second connector of the Y-cable.
connection.


drive.
CAUTION:
thumbscrew.
secure.
Figure 2-23. Tape Drives—Rear View (C65124)

I
C65124
1. DLT or Ultrium drive power switch

2. Thumbscrews
3. T9x40 power switch

Installing IBM Ultrium Fibre Channel Drives


drive.
CAUTION:
thumbscrew.
secure.
10. Check with the customer for a maintenance agreement on tape drives. If the drives
are returned for repair, have the customer retain one shipping box (with packing
material) in case a drive must be sent back to the factory.
Note: For Fibre Channel cabling, see “Fiber Cable Routing” on page 4-13.

Installing Certance Ultrium Drives

For Certance Ultrium drives, follow the procedure below to unpack and install the drives.
Certance Ultrium tape drives are shipped as HVD or LVD according to their part
numbers.
Refer to Figure 2-21 on page 2-39 and make sure the labels on the drive match the drive
type and operation required.
4. Refer to Figure 2-22 on page 2-40 while checking the rear of the Certance drive for
the terminating power jumper selections.
CAUTION:
Verify whether TERMPWR for the Certance drive is on or off (enabled or disabled)
for each tape drive. If needed, move the jumper to match your requirement.
a. TERMPWR On: Install the jumper on the pins shown in
b. TERMPWR Off: Remove the strap on the pins shown in
CAUTION:
Configuration problem: Do not set any jumpers except for terminating
power. The drive’s SCSI address will be set at the library operator panel.


1/4-turn.
the drive bulkhead.
connection.

drive.
CAUTION:
thumbscrew.
secure.

Installing Hewlett Packard Ultrium SCSI Drives

For Hewlett Packard Ultrium SCSI drives, follow the procedure below to unpack and
install the drives.
Hewlett Packard Ultrium SCSI tape drives may be shipped with a converter card (LVD-
to-HVD). This allows you to use the HP drive with a standard HVD host bus adapter.
The label reveals the type of SCSI operation.
CAUTION:
4. The HP drive is internally set to supply terminating power (terminating power set to
ON). It can not be set to OFF.
CAUTION:
Configuration problem: Do not set any jumpers except for terminating
power. The drive’s SCSI address will be set at the library operator panel.
1/4-turn.
the drive bulkhead.

connection.

drive.
CAUTION:
thumbscrew.
secure.
Installing Hewlett Packard Ultrium Fibre Channel Drives

Following the lifting procedures described in “Lifting Techniques” on page xxix,
drive.

CAUTION:
thumbscrew.
secure.
8. Check with the customer for a maintenance agreement on tape drives. If the drives
are returned for repair, have the customer retain one shipping box (with packing
material) in case a drive must be sent back to the factory.
Note: HP drives must use the Port A interface connector on the drive tray. For Fibre
Channel cabling, see “Fiber Cable Routing” on page 4-13.
Installing SCSI Drive Cable Connectors

The following procedures describe how to install SCSI cable connectors for the drives
(Figure 2-24 on page 2-49).
Standard Drive Column 0 Connectors

Note: Drive Column 0 is the standard drive column included in all libraries. It is the
column that contains the calibration label at the bottom.
1. Open the right side door.
2. Remove the SCSI “Y” channel cable and mounting jackscrews from the drive
shipping box.
3. Thread one of the jackscrews into one end of the connector. Thread it all the way in
and then back it off by 1/4-turn.
4. Refer to the figure below and tilt the channel connector (with the jackscrew end at
the bottom) into the slot on the interior library bulkhead, next to the desired drive
location.

Figure 2-24. SCSI Tape Drive Cable Connectors (C65226)
1 2
C65226
1. Interior bulkhead view 2. Exterior bulkhead view
Note: It is easier to insert the connector if you tilt it away from the interior bulkhead.
5. Go around to the rear of the library, open the rear door and locate the connector at
the bulkhead.
6. Grasp the connector and thread the second jackscrew into the top of the connector.
7. Make sure the connector aligns inside its slot and tighten both jackscrews with a 3/
16-inch nutdriver. Do not overtighten.
8. Obtain the SCSI icon/label set (part 313611001) and apply the appropriate icon the
bulkhead.
9. Repeat this process for all channel connectors.
Note: Do not connect the client cables until the configuration is completed.
10. Open the cable clamp at the bottom right of the drive tray and insert the channel
cable.
11. Thread the two screws on the card into the connector mounting. Do not overtighten.
12. When you are finished installing all drives, place the drive power switches to the ON
(|) position.
13. If these are the only drives you are installing, proceed to
“Operating Options” on page 2-51. Otherwise, continue with the instructions below.

Optional Drive Column 1 Connectors

1. Open the small access door (located on the frame member between the two drive
columns) for the column 1 drive connectors by turning the five snap rings
counterclockwise.
2. Attach the SCSI “Y” channel cable to the bulkhead as described in steps 6 and 7 of
the previous procedure.
3. Insert the drive into its position in the column.
4. Open the cable clamp at the bottom right of the drive tray and insert the channel
cable.
5. Thread the two screws on the card into the connector mounting. Do not overtighten.
6. Place the drive power switch to the ON (|) position.
7. Repeat Steps 2 through 6 for each drive in the column.
Note: Do not connect the client cables until the configuration is completed.
8. Close and lock the small access door.

9. If these drives complete your installation, go to “Operating Options” on page 2-51
below. Otherwise, continue with the instructions below.
Installing T9x40 Drives

Refer to the T9x40 Tape Drive Installation Manual, part 95879, for instructions on installing
T9840/T9940 drives.
Note: If you are installing the Maintenance Switch for Matrix application with T9840B
drives, you must refer to the T9x40 Tape Drive Installation Manual, part 95879, for
specific instructions.
For Fibre Channel cable routing, refer to “Fiber Cable Routing” on page 4-13.
Installing T10000 Drives

Refer to the T10000 Tape Drive Installation Manual, part 96173, for instructions on
installing T10000 drives.

Operating Options
■ Operating Options
The MPC/MPCL controller card is factory-configured for SCSI operation and to:
• Supply terminating power from the library
• Operate on a high voltage differential interface
You may change either or both of these options by following the procedures below.
If the library is to operate on a Fibre Channel interface, you must install a conversion bill
(101672) that incorporates the MPV and MPU2 cards. Follow the directions enclosed
with the conversion bill; Fibre Channel cabling is discussed in
“Fibre Channel Operation” on page 4-12.
Library Terminating Power Option

The terminating power jumper is set to the ON location (library supplying terminating
power) at the factory, but you may change it to the OFF location, allowing only the host
to supply terminating power.
Note: In general, terminating power is supplied by devices at the extreme end of a bus.
To change the library terminating power to the OFF position:

1. Remove the six screws and cover from the MPC/MPCL card. The MPC/MPCL card
position is shown in Figure 1-10 on page 1-31.
2. Refer to Figure 2-25 on page 2-53 and check the location of the terminating power
jumper at the bottom, right of the MPC/MPCL card, J18.
3. Pull out the jumper and place it in the OFF position.
Library Single-Ended Operation

The MPC/MPCL cards are set to high voltage differential operation at the factory. You
may change the operation to single-ended (for the MPC card) or low voltage differential/
single-ended (for the MPCL card) by changing the jumper (J16) on the respective card.
MPC Card
To change a library containing an MPC card to single-ended operation:
1. Remove the six screws and the cover from the MPC card.
2. Refer to Figure 2-25 on page 2-53 and check the location of the single-ended or
differential jumper at J16.
3. Pull out the jumper and place it in the single-ended (SE) position.
4. Refer to Figure 2-26 on page 2-54 and, at the edge connector on the right side of the
MPC card, disconnect the cable from the rear (high voltage differential) connector
on the MPC card and move it to the front (single-ended) connector.

Operating Options
5. Single-ended operation requires a special terminator, part 10148002.
MPCL Card
To change a library containing an MPCL card to single-ended or low voltage differential
operation:
1. Remove the six screws and the cover from the MPCL card.
2. Refer to Figure 2-25 on page 2-53 and check the location of the single-ended or low
voltage differential jumper at J16.
3. Pull out the jumper and place it in the low voltage differential/single-ended position.
4. Refer to Figure 2-26 on page 2-54 and, at the edge connector on the right side of the
MPCL card, disconnect the cable from the rear (high voltage differential) connector
on the MPCL card and move it to the front (low voltage differential/single-ended)
connector.
5. For LVD operation, the library must be the last device on the SCSI bus and must use
a single, shielded cable (PN 3136668xx) with feed-through terminator.

Operating Options
Figure 2-25. Terminating Power and Operation Jumpers—L700e (C65067)
7 8
1 C65067
1. MPC/MPCL card 6. SCSI SE operation setting for MPC cards; LVD/

2. Terminating power jumper (J18) SE operation for MPCL cards (J16)
3. Terminating power ON position 7. SCSI SE or LVD/SE connection (front)
4. Terminating power OFF position 8. HVD connection (rear)
5. SCSI HVD operation setting (J16)

Operating Options
Figure 2-26. Library Control Cable Connections (C65147)
1
11
2
10 3
5
9
8
7
12 13
C65147
1. CSE (service): Command line interface (38,400 7. SCSI, HVD connection

baud) for firmware 3.0 or later only 8. SCSI, SE connection (MPC card) or LVD/SE
2. Test: PTP—serial connection; Pre-3.00 connection (MPCL card only)
firmware—reserved 9. Slot 0 (Fibre Channel expansion card
3. Ser 1 (serial): Firmware 3.00 and later—unused; 10. Slot 1 (not used)
Firmware 2.20 and earlier—diagnostic testing 11. MPK card (Personality/StorageTek L-Series
4. Ser 2 (serial) Library Admin) connector
5. ENET (Ethernet) 12. Bulkhead connector
6. SCSI, LVD connection (MPC card with MPV & 13. Bulkhead connector
MPW cards only)

Installing Features
■ Installing Features
If your library also requires additional features, follow the directions enclosed with each
package to install these on the library.
Installing Fibre Channel Components

Installing Fibre Channel components for T9x40/T10000 tape drive and library operation
is covered below. Fibre Channel cables are listed in Table 4-9 on page 4-12.
T9x40 Drives
Consult the T9x40 Tape Drive Installation Manual, part 95879, for directions on installing
and configuring the T9x40 drives.
T10000 Drives
Consult the T10000 Tape Drive Installation Manual, part 96173, for directions on installing
and configuring the T10000 drives.
Library
For library fiber operation, you must install the compact PCI bus (CPCI) component
(MPV card) and the fiber card (MPU card). Consult the directions enclosed with the
library Fibre Channel feature.
Adapting the Library for LVD Operation

For libraries operating on an LVD interface, the cable can be no longer than 12 m (39.4
ft). There must also be a corresponding LVD HBA in the client.
LVD operation for the libraries with MPC cards requires an MPW card (Conversion bill
101368). Libraries with the MPCL card do not require the conversion bill since the
MPCL can operate as native LVD/SE.
For LVD operation on the library interface, the library must be the last device on the SCSI
bus and must use a single, shielded cable (part 3136668xx) with feed-through terminator
attached.

Rack Mounted Components
■ Rack Mounted Components

The rack area may contain routers, switches, or hubs for Fibre Channel operation,
servers, or an alternate power configuration to supply continuous emergency power to
the library and drives.
General Considerations
WARNING:
Possible injury or equipment damage: Be sure that you have referred to
“Rack Safety and Precautions” on page xxxii before installing rack
components.
Requirements in the rack area of the library.

• The total maximum weight of equipment installed in this location cannot exceed 136
Kg (300 lbs).
• The customer must supply power to these components. Power cable space is
provided in the cutout area of the rear door.
• The ventilation openings in the rear of the cabinet must have at least 100 mm (4 in.)
clearance for proper air flow.
CAUTION:
Heat within rack area: Cooling considerations should be made based
upon the power dissipation within the rack space, as well as the external
library room ambient conditions. Cooling must be provided for moderate
power dissipation within the rack space. To aid this cooling, use the
conversion bill listed in Table 1-10 on page 1-18 to draw air from the front
of the rack space towards the rear door.
The cooling package conversion bill is sufficient for dissipating up to

1400 W (4777 Btu). The rack area is not recommended for high power
dissipation components such as multiprocessor servers or disk arrays.
• The fiber device (bridge, switch, or hub) must face the rear of the library to allow
proper cable routing to the drives. Cables that exit the fiber device must follow the
routing shown in the figure below.
Follow the directions:
• Enclosed with the fiber device for rack mounting the component into the 13U rack
area
• Supplied in the T9x40 Tape Drive Installation Manual, part 95879, for installing the
fiber option on T9x40 drives.

Redundant AC Power Option

The Redundant AC power option is manufactured by American Power Conversion
(APC). To install this option, follow the directions enclosed with the conversion bill/
feature. Retain the documentation on site.


Installing the L700-PTP 3
This chapter describes how to install the L700e Pass-thru Port (PTP). The PTP enables
one L700e library to pass a cartridge to another L700e library Installation of the PTP in
the L1400M library is identical except for differences shown in Appendix D
The steps for installing the PTP are:
1. Preparing the Libraries
2. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for the other library.Attaching the PTP Frame and Leveling
the Libraries
3. Installing PTP Cables
4. Installing the PTP Assembly
■ Requirements
Hardware and software requirements for PTP operation are outlined below.
Hardware
Hardware requirements for the PTP are:
• Both libraries must be L700e frames.
• The MPC cards in both libraries must be part 308390511 or higher – these cards
have higher fuse ratings required for PTP operation. The new MPCL cards also
support PTP operation.
• For 1/3 capacity libraries, see Figure 3-1 on page 3-2 for the correct position of the
theta stop.
Note: A small stepladder may also be required to install the PTP.

Requirements
Note:
Figure 3-1. Theta Stop Positions—Library with PTP (C65390)
C
D
C65390
1. Stop A plus stop D = 1/3 capacity
2. Stop B plus stop D = 1/3 capacity with PTP
Note: Columns 1 and 2 on Panel 2 cannot be used with the “1/3 capacity with PTP” option.
3. Stop C plus stop D = 2/3 capacity position
4. Stop C alone = full capacity
Firmware
The firmware required for PTP operation is Version 3.00 or higher.
Software
Software requirements for the PTP are either:
• For Unix-based servers, you must use Automated Cartridge System Library Software
(ACSLS) version 6.0.1 or higher, with the Special Program Enhancement (SPE) for
PTP operation, or
• For Microsoft Windows-based servers, you must use StorageTek Library Manager,
version 2.0 or higher.

PTP Definitions
■ PTP Definitions
The primary function of the PTP is to satisfy a cartridge mount operation when all drives
are busy within a library. The PTP passes the required cartridge to the other library, where
an idle drive can perform the mount operation.
The following terms are associated with PTP operation:
• Master: the library that powers the PTP motor.
• Standby: the attached library that has no power connections to the PTP motor.
• Source (or Home) Cell: the cell containing the cartridge that must be passed
• Destination: the location where the cartridge is to be passed (most frequently a tape
drive).
■ Preparing the Libraries

To prepare the libraries:
• Determine which library will be the Master and which will be the Standby.
• Determine if your option is a 1/3-capacity with a PTP— if so, you must set the theta
stops as shown in Figure 3-1 on page 3-2.
• Position the libraries.
• Remove the side panels of both libraries using the cover release tool (part
310229501), supplied with the PTP kit.
• Remove two 6-cartridge arrays to allow space for the PTP assembly.
Theta Stop Position for 1/3 Capacity

If a PTP library is to be configured as a 1/3-capacity, you must set the appropriate theta
stop position. This position is shown in Figure 3-1 on page 3-2.
Note: No change to theta stops should be made for the 2/3 or full capacity libraries.

Preparing the Libraries
Positioning the Libraries

Figure 3-2 illustrates the positions of the libraries for the PTP installation and the cable
access positions for both libraries.
Position the libraries as shown below, but leave approximately 1.2 m (4 ft) between the
libraries for removal of the side panels and the installation of the PTP.
Figure 3-2. Positioning the Libraries (C65372)
2 3
2
3
C65372
1. Tape drive signal cables

2. Cables to/from 13U cabinet area
3. Power cable

Allowing Access to Both Libraries

Figure 3-3 illustrates the amount of door clearance that is required when two libraries are
joined together by a PTP. Be sure to allow sufficient operator and maintenance access.
Figure 3-3. PTP Access Requirements (C65373)
C65373
1. Access door and right side door open: 2.3 m (7.6 ft)—for the PTP configuration, allow 5.8 m (19.2 ft) for
the two libraries plus PTP frame.
2. Rear door and right front door open: 2.1 m (6.9 ft)—for the PTP configuration, allow 4.2 m (13.8 ft) for
the two libraries

Removing the Library Side Panels

To remove the library side panels:
WARNING:
Lifting hazard: Use two people to remove the side panels.
1. Slide the cover release tool (part 310229501) under the section of the left side panel
on the Master library (see Figure 3-4). The location of the retaining clip can be found
by looking for the 38 mm (1.5 in.) gap between the panel and frame.
Figure 3-4. Cover Release Locations (C65374)
C65374
1. Mushroom fastener 3. Cover release tool

2. Retaining clip 4. 38 mm (1.5-in.) gap
2. Push up with the tool to release the latch.

3. Pull the panel up and release it from the library.
4. Place the panel aside.
5. Using a Torx T-30 driver, remove the six mushroom fasteners from the library.
6. Repeat steps 1 through 5 for the Standby library panel.

Removing the 6-Cartridge Arrays

Once you have removed the left covers from both libraries, you will have access to the 6-
cartridge array at the left of each library. These arrays must be removed from both
libraries.
To remove the arrays:
1. Open the access door on the first library.
2. Check that there are no cartridges in the cells at Panel 2, Column 3, Rows 0—5.
3. On the top of the library, remove the four T-15 screws that attach the array assembly.
4. Remove the array assembly by pulling upward, then outward.

5. Figure 3-5 illustrates the removal of the array retainer clip. Remove this clip.
Figure 3-5. Array Retainer Clip Removal (C65148)
C65376
1. Insert screwdriver tip as shown

6. Reinstall the array clip above Row 6 as shown in Figure 3-6.

7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for the other library.
Figure 3-6. Array Retainer Clip Insertion (C65377)
C65377

Attaching the PTP Frame and Leveling the Libraries
■ Attaching the PTP Frame and Leveling the Libraries

Attaching the PTP frame and leveling the libraries are done together. References to
“right” and “left” in the instructions are in relation to the front of each library.
CAUTION:
Hand or cartridge damage: You must be sure that the libraries and PTP
frame are level or damage to the customer’s cartridges or robotic hand
can result.
Be sure that both library walls are parallel to the PTP frame. The PTP frame mounting
holes are shown in Figure 3-7 on page 3-10. You must align the mounting screws on both
libraries as shown in Figure 3-9 on page 3-12. The sides and top of the libraries and the
PTP must be level and aligned.
1. Open the shipping container and remove the PTP assembly.
WARNING:
Lifting hazard: Use two people to lift and position the PTP frame.
ADVERTENCIA:
Riesgo al levantar: Para levantar y colocar en posición el bastidor PTP
se requieren como mínimo dos personas.
2. Remove the PTP frame from the shipping container.

3. Position the PTP frame between the libraries, making sure that, as you face the access
door of the Master library, the MPB logic card enclosure is visible.
Note: Determine if one library is higher than the other; if so you will first mount the
PTP frame to this library.
4. Using the 12 1/4 x 20 (T-30 bit) screws from the PTP kit, loosely attach six screws to
the side of the higher frame as shown in Figure 3-7 on page 3-10.

Figure 3-7. PTP Frame Mounting Screws (C65375)
1. Do not insert screws at these locations.
CAUTION:
Cable/Connector damage: Be careful not to damage the cables or the
serial port connectors when routing them through the grommets.
5. Unwrap the two cable bundles.
• Master PTP cables are routed from the right side of the PTP frame.
• Standby cables are routed from the left side (rear) of the PTP frame.

6. From inside the Master library, insert the large grommet from the PTP kit through the
upper part of the library wall (see Figure 3-8).
7. From inside the Standby library, insert the large grommet from the PTP kit through the
upper part of the library wall (see Figure 3-8).
Figure 3-8. Library Grommet and Cables (C65379)
C65379
8. Bring the PTP frame up closely to the higher library wall.

9. Carefully route the cables through the library wall grommet.
10. Carefully lift the PTP frame and insert the attachment/alignment holes over the six
screws on the side of the higher library.
11. Tighten the six mounting screws.
12. Carefully push the lower library up to the PTP frame.
13. Route the cables through the library wall grommet.
14. Install the remaining six T-30 screws into the holes on the side of the lower library.
Do not tighten these screws until leveling is completed.
15. If necessary, you adjust leveling by using the adjustable floor levelers, part
307505603. If your libraries require the levelers, insert the wheel levelers on the
wheels of both libraries as shown in Figure 3-9 on page 3-12 and

Figure 3-9. Leveling the Libraries (1 of 2) (C65378)
C65378
1. For this alignment hole condition, adjust the two front levelers.
2. For this alignment hole condition, adjust the two rear levelers.

Figure 3-10. Leveling the Libraries (2 of 2) (C65389)
2 C65389
1. For this condition, adjust the two outboard levelers.

2. For this condition, adjust the two inboard levelers.
16. Figure 3-9 on page 3-12 and Figure 3-10 illustrate which levelers must be adjusted to
correct out-of-level conditions.
As required, use a 3/4-inch socket wrench to adjust the height of the lower library so
that the library attachment screws are at the top of the PTP frame slots on both
libraries, as shown in Figure 3-9 on page 3-12.
The tops of the library frames and the PTP frame must be within 2.54 mm (0.10 in.).
17. Check that the sides of the PTP frame are correctly aligned with the library walls.
The sides of the library frames and the PTP frame must be within 1.27 mm (0.01 in.).

Installing PTP Cables
18. When both libraries are level (within 2.54 mm [0.10 in.]) and parallel to the frames
(within 1.27 mm [0.05 in.]), secure the PTP frame to the lower library wall.
■ Installing PTP Cables

PTP cables must be routed between both libraries. The power cable originates from the
master library; no power is supplied from the standby library.
The serial communication cables provide communication between both libraries. The
door interlock switches must be replaced in order for each library to detect if the other
library’s door is open. The final cable routing and tie wrap locations are shown in
WARNING:
Confined space: While working within the library, take care to avoid
bumping your head or catching your clothing on protruding edges.
ADVERTENCIA:
Espacio limitado: Al trabajar en el interior de la biblioteca, tenga cuidado
de no golpearse la cabeza o de engancharse la ropa en los bordes
salientes.

Master PTP Cables

The Master PTP cables are routed from the right side of the PTP frame, through the
grommets on the right side of the PTP frame.
CAUTION:
Cable/Connector damage: Be careful not to damage the cables or the
serial port connector when routing them through the grommets.
1. Insert the small grommet from the PTP kit through the right, bottom part of the
library door frame.
2. The old door interlock switch must be removed and replaced with the one supplied
with the PTP kit. The location of the door interlock switch is shown in Figure 3-11.
Figure 3-11. Door Interlock Switch Location (C65381)
C65381

3. Disconnect the cable to the door interlock switch (Figure 3-12).

Figure 3-12. Door Interlock Switch and CSE Port (C65380)
C65380
1. Door switch cables

2. Door interlock switch
3. Grounding cable
4. CSE port: used to download firmware into the MPB card only. See “Pass-thru Port” on page 5-44.
4. Remove the old door interlock switch (part 3102979xx) by squeezing the clamps and
pulling the switch out of its location.
5. Attach the replacement door interlock switch.
6. Reconnect the cable that you removed in step 3.
7. Loosely attach three roof tie wraps, as shown in Figure 3-15 on page 3-19—do not
tighten.
8. Route the PTP cables through the tiewraps.
9. Connect the second, new PTP cable to the new door interlock switch.
10. The clip for attaching the CSE connector is on the bottom of the connector. Insert
the CSE connector and the T15 self-tapping, ground screw to the interior, right door
frame (Figure 3-12).
11. Route the power cable and connector (P283) through the upper door frame grommet
and behind the library operator panel.

12. Remove the T-15 screws that secure the MPC/MPCL card cover and place the cover
aside.
13. Route the PTP power cable through the top left grommet above the MPC/MPCL
card.
14. Connect the PTP power cable to P283 (upper left, Figure 3-13) of the MPC/MPCL
card.
15. Reinstall the MPC/MPCL card cover.
Figure 3-13. PTP Power Connection (C65382)
C65382
1. PTP power connection (J283)

16. Route the serial connector through the lower grommet on the door frame, behind the
power cables, through the grommet, and attach it to the TEST jack on the side of the
MPC/MPCL card cage, as shown in Figure 3-14.
Figure 3-14. Serial Connector (C65383)
C65383
1. MPC/MPCL card
2. PTP power cable
3. Serial connector (route behind power cables)
4. Existing cable clamps
CAUTION:
Hand/Cartridge damage: Be sure that all cables are secured away from
the robot’s path of operation. Check particularly at the upper and lower
door frame as well as the ceiling of the library.
17. Secure this cable within the existing cable clamps.

18. Secure all other Master PTP cables with the 10 supplied tiewraps (refer to
Figure 3-15 for locations).
Figure 3-15. Master and Standby Tiewrap Locations (C65386)
2
1
1
2 1
1
STANDBY
C65386
1. Push-mount cable tie

2. Standard cable tie

Installing the PTP Assembly
Standby PTP Cables

1. Disconnect the cable to the old door interlock switch.
2. Remove the old door interlock switch (part 3102979xx) by squeezing the clamps and
pulling the switch out of its location.
3. Loosely attach three roof tie wraps, as shown in Figure 3-15 on page 3-19—do not
tighten.
4. Route the PTP cables through the tiewraps
5. Attach the replacement door interlock switch.
6. Reconnect the cable that you removed in step 1.
7. Connect the second, new PTP cable to the new door interlock switch.
8. Route the serial connector through the lower grommet on the door frame, behind the
power cables, and attach it to the TEST jack on the side of the MPC/MPCL card
cage, as shown in Figure 3-14 on page 3-18.
CAUTION:
Hand/Cartridge damage: Be sure that all cables are secured away from
the robot’s path of operation. Check particularly at the upper and lower
door frame as well as the ceiling of the library.
9. Secure the serial cable within the existing cable clamps.

10. Secure all other PTP cables with the 8 supplied tiewraps as shown in
■ Installing the PTP Assembly

The PTP assembly contains the motor, gears, and belts that move the PTP array from
one library to the other.
The motor must be at the Master’s side.
Note: It would be helpful to use a two-step folding ladder since the PTP assembly must
be lifted up and over the top of the PTP frame.
To install the PTP assembly:

1. Remove the PTP assembly from its shipping container.
2. Remove the packing foam.

Installing the PTP Assembly
WARNING:
Lifting hazard: The PTP assembly weighs 8 Kg (18 lbs). Use the lifting
procedures in “Lifting Techniques” on page xxix to position the PTP
assembly.
ADVERTENCIA:
Peligro de levantamiento: El conjunto de PTP pesa 8 kg (18 lbs). Siga las
instrucciones de levantamiento de “Lifting Techniques” on page xxix
para colocar en posición el conjunto de PTP.
CAUTION:
Equipment damage: The PTP must be positioned as shown in
Figure 3-16 on page 3-21 or you will damage the PTP or the library.
3. While holding the PTP assembly, move the 2-cell array toward the center, as shown
in Figure 3-16.
Figure 3-16. PTP Assembly (C65388)
C65388
4. Lift the PTP assembly over the top of the PTP frame and carefully lower the assembly
into the frame.
5. Align the assembly with the eight holes in the library frame.
6. Insert the eight 6 x 32 (T-15) screws provided in the kit and tighten the assembly.
7. Connect the power/signal cable from the PTP frame to the PTP assembly at
connector PMJ.

SCSI Library-to-Host Cabling
8. Attach the two library frame decorative covers.

9. Attach the two PTP frame decorative covers.
10. Secure the wheels of both libraries.
11. Scrap the following material removed for the PTP installation according to your local
policies
• two library arrays
• two sheet metal array holders
• side panels that were removed for the PTP installation
■ SCSI Library-to-Host Cabling

There are several library-to-host cabling options for libraries joined with a PTP. These
options are explained below; Figure 3-17 on page 3-23 illustrates the options.
HVD Operation
You have two options for SCSI HVD cabling:
1. Route a SCSI cable from each library’s bulkhead directly to the host’s HBA.
2. Alternately, you may daisy-chain the Master and Standby libraries together by routing
and connecting a SCSI cable (part 10083680, included in the PTP kit) from one
library to the other library. The minimum cable length for daisy chaining is
5 m (16.4 ft).
To install the daisy-chain SCSI cabling option:
1. Attach one end of the cable to the second connector on the first library’s
bulkhead; the connectors are shown in Figure 2-26 on page 2-54, callouts
number 12 or 13.
2. Route the cable to the second library and connect it to that library’s
bulkhead connector.
3. Terminate where required.
LVD Operation
For LVD operation, you must route a SCSI cable from each library’s bulkhead directly to
its corresponding HBA in the host. This is required since the cable for library LVD
operation is not a “Y-cable” as in the HVD configuration.

SCSI Library-to-Host Cabling
Figure 3-17. Library-to-Host Cabling for PTP Operation (C65450)
HVD: Daisy-chain
L700e PTP L700e

MPC or MPCL MPC or MPCL
To Host
T 10083680
HVD: Host Direct
L700e PTP L700e

MPC or MPCL MPC or MPCL
To Host To Host
T T
LVD: Host Direct
L700e PTP L700e

MPCL or MPW MPCL or MPW
To Host To Host
T T
Fiber Channel
L700e PTP L700e

MPU MPU
To Host, Switch, To Host, Switch,

Dual Port, FC HBA T Dual Port, FC HBA
C65450

PTP Configuration and Testing
Fibre Channel Operation

For Fibre Channel operation, you may:
• Route cables from each library’s MPU/MPU2 card to a Fibre Channel switch
• Route cables from each library’s MPU/MPU2 card to their corresponding HBAs in
the host
• Route both cables from each library’s MPU/MPU2 card to a single, dual port Fibre
Channel HBA at the host.
■ PTP Configuration and Testing

For PTP operation, the MPC and MPB cards must operate at firmware edition 3.0 or
later. When using the MPCL card, firmware must be at version 3.02 or later.
See “Pass-thru Port” on page 5-44.
Once you have loaded firmware, the operator panel will display L700E for PTP libraries;
L700 will be displayed for those libraries that do not have a PTP.
You must however, configure each library for its SCSI ID and other operational
characteristics, as outlined in Chapter 5, “Configuring the Library.”
Testing the PTP is explained in Chapter 6, “Testing the Library.”

Installing Cables 4
This chapter explains how to connect the following cables to the client system:
• Client-direct 1 (and Client 2, if applicable) library SCSI control cables
• Client SCSI data cables
• Client Fibre Channel cables
• Ethernet cable
• Library power cable
• Communication/Service cables
Note: When planning your cable needs, be sure to allow sufficient length to attach
drives within the library frame. For example: allow up to 4 m (13 ft) for
connecting a cable to the uppermost drive within the cabinet.
Cable installation for the L1400M library is identical to the L700e, with the following
exceptions:
• L1400M: the router must be connected to a L1400MP library in a PTP configuration.
• L1400M1: the L1400 interface controller must be connected to a L1400MP library in
a PTP configuration.
Refer to Appendix D for router/interface controller cable connection.
■ SCSI HVD Cable Paths

The customer may choose to separate the control path and the data paths. The control
path transfers client commands for library robotic operations and connects to an ACSLS
host using HVD or LVD SCSI communications, or fibre-optic communications. The
data path transfers data to and from the drives.
The following paragraphs and tables detail the various communication cables provided by
StorageTek. When applicable, the table has a short description of the interface cards
required on the library and on the ACSLS 44SB-150 server.
Note: No more than 21 SCSI cables may be connected to the library and its drives.
Alternately, you may combine both the control and data paths into one, single path.
However, consider performance characteristics when determining the number of devices
per SCSI path.
The library SCSI control and data path cables must be 68-pin high density (HD)
connectors at the library. While single-ended cables may be used, their connectors must
be adapted to a 68-pin differential configuration at the library connection.
Refer to Table 4-1 on page 4-2 for the daisy chain cables.

SCSI High Voltage Differential Connectors
Table 4-1. High Voltage Differential Daisy Chain Cables
Length Description Part

254 mm (10 in.) Drive-to-drive1. 313109302
457 mm (18 in.) Drive-to-drive2. 310292001
2.1 m (84 in.) Library-to-drive 313115701
1. For DLT drives in consecutive slot positions.
2. For T9x40 drives in consecutive slot positions.
■ SCSI High Voltage Differential Connectors

Supported SCSI HVD connectors for the library are shown in Figure 4-1 through
High Density 68-Pin VHDC Cables

For operating systems that support the VHDC (Very High Density Connector) cables at
the client SCSI card, the following cables are offered. The smaller, VHDC connector is
connected to the client SCSI card (Table 4-2 on page 4-3 and Table 4-3 on page 4-3).
Figure 4-1. 68-Pin VHDC Connector (C65155)
C65155

Table 4-2. 68-Pin Mini-D to 68-Pin VHDC HVD Cables
Length Above Floor PN Plenum PN

3 m (9.8 ft) 10083594
6 m (19.7 ft) 10083595
12 m (39.4 ft) 10083596 Not available
15 m (49.2 ft) 10083597
18 m (59.1 ft) 10083598
Notes:
Used with HVD connection between an L700 and a 44SB-150 Sun Server for ACSLS.
Requires feature 2012.
An L700 with an MPC card is configured by default for HVD SCSI. If your library is
equipped with an MPCL card and an HVD connection is required, then the HVD
attachment kit must be ordered to configure the MPCL card for HVD. A 44SB-150
with the “2012” feature will support an HVD connection to the library.
Table 4-3. 68-Pin Mini-D to 68-Pin VHDC Universal Cables
Length Above Floor PN Plenum PN

3 m (10 ft) 10083682
5 m (18 ft) 10083683 Not available
10 m (40 ft) 10083684
Notes:
Used with LVD connection between L700 and 44SB-150 Sun Server for ACSLS.
Requires feature SLVD.
An L700 library with an MPCL card (standard configuration) is configured by default
for LVD SCSI. If your library is configured with an MPC card and an LVD connection
is desired, then the LVD attachment kit must be ordered to configure the MPC card
for LVD. A 44SB-150 with the “SLVD” feature will support an LVD SCSI connection
to the library.

High Density 68-Pin Jackscrew Cables

High-density 68-pin high density jackscrew cables are used for the connections at the
library and drives (Table 4-4).
Figure 4-2. High Density 68-Pin Jackscrew Cable Connector (C65069)
C65069
Table 4-4. 68-Pin High Density Jackscrew Connector
68-Pin High Density Jackscrew Cable Part Numbers

Length Above Floor PN Plenum PN*
3 m (9.8 ft) 10083309 10083313
6 m (19.7 ft) 10083310 10083314
15 m (49.2 ft) 10083311 10083315
20 m (65.6 ft) 10083312 10083316
Note: Plenum rated cables will withstand higher temperatures.

Centronics 50-Pin Latch to 68-Pin Jackscrew Cables

When connecting to a RISC System/6000, a BULL DPX/20, or other system that uses a
Centronics 50-pin spring latch connector (Table 4-5), you must use one of the cables
listed in Table 4-6 on page 4-6.
Figure 4-3. Centronics 50-pin to 68-Pin Jackscrew Connector (C65070)
C65070
Table 4-5. Centronics 50-Pin to 68-Pin Jackscrew Cable Part Numbers
Centronics 50-Pin to 68-Pin Jackscrew Cable Part Numbers

9 m (29.5 ft) 10083359 10083368
15 m (49 ft) 10083361 10083370
24 m (78.7 ft) 10083364 10083373

68-Pin MD to 68-Pin Mini-Centronics Connector

When connecting to a RISC System/6000 or other system that uses a 68-pin mini-
Centronics connector, you must use one of these cables (Table 4-6).
Figure 4-4. 68-Pin Mini-Centronics Connector (C65292)
C65292
Table 4-6. 68-Pin Mini-Centronics Cables
68-Pin Mini-Centronics Cable Part Numbers

12 m (39.4 ft) 10083388 10083397

Special SCSI Adapter Cables

The cables listed below are used to adapt existing system cables to operate with the
library (Table 4-7).
Figure 4-5. 50-pin to 68-Pin Latch, Block and Rail Connector (C65071)
C65071
Table 4-7. Special SCSI Cable Adapters
50-Pin to 68-Pin Latch, Block and Rail Connector Part Number

Cable Length and Description Cable Usage Part Number
3 m (10 ft): HD 50-68 pin Sun/ Used to adapt the 50-pin HD 10083522
SPARC latch, block and rail adapter latch, block and rail to fit a
68-pin connection

SCSI Low Voltage Differential Cables
■ SCSI Low Voltage Differential Cables

Supported Universal SCSI (LVD or HVD) cables for the library are listed in Table 4-8.
Note: LVD operation for the libraries with an MPC card requires conversion bill
101368. Libraries with the MPCL card do not require the conversion bill.
Correct drive terminators must be used (see “Connection—General” on

page 4-9). Incorrect termination will cause I/O and read/write errors.
The library must be the last device on the SCSI bus and must use a single,
shielded cable (PN 3136668xx) with feed-through terminator.
Table 4-8. Universal 68-Pin MD to 68-Pin MD
Length Part Number
300 mm (11.8 in.) Drive-to-drive 10083675
500 mm (19.7 in.) 10083676
3 m (9.8 ft) 10083679
5 m (16.4 ft) 10083680
10 m (32.8 ft) 10083681
■ SCSI Control Connection

SCSI control connections depend on length requirements, the position of the
client in relation to the library, and the type of interface required (single-ended
or differential). Examples of HVD and LVD connections are shown in
“SCSI Library-to-Host Cabling” on page 3-22 and Figure 3-17 on page 3-23.
Library HVD control cables from the client or server connect to the MPC/MPCL card
through the two connectors at the front right bulkhead. One bulkhead connector is for
SCSI “in” signals, and the other is for SCSI “out” signals. These two cables/connectors
join into one connector at the MPC/MPCL card.
Library LVD control cables from the client or server connect to one bulkhead connector;
the library control cable (which contains an in-line terminator) is then routed from the
bulkhead to the MPC/MPCL card.
For connection to a Sun SPARC station, refer to:
• “Sun Server Connection— Single-Ended” on page 4-9,
• “Sun Server Connection—High Voltage Differential” on page 4-10 or
• “Sun Server Connection—Low Voltage Differential” on page 4-10
for directions that deal with this type of server.

SCSI Control Connection
Connection—General
To connect the server or client SCSI control cable:
• Bring the SCSI 68-pin cable from the server or client to the connectors on the right
front bulkhead.
• Connect the HVD SCSI server or client cable to one of the two connectors on
the MPC/MPCL card (Figure 2-26 on page 2-54).
• Connect the LVD SCSI server or client cable to one of the connectors on the
MPW card (for the MPC card—see Figure 2-26 on page 2-54) or the LVD/SE
connector on the MPCL card.
Note: For library LVD operation, be sure that:
• The library is the last device on the bus

• You use a single, shielded cable (PN 3136668xx) with feed-through terminator
• If the HVD path continues from this point, connect a second cable to the second
connector on the bulkhead. Route this cable through the hole in the library floor.
• Continue routing the cable under the frame (toward the rear of the library) and up
through the hole provided for the drive cables. Insert the cable into the first drive
channel connector (at the bulkhead).
• If the path terminates, connect a terminator at the other connector on the bulkhead:
• part 10148003 for HVD differential SCSI
• part 10148002 for HVD single-ended SCSI
• part 10148031 for LVD/SE differential SCSI
• Obtain the SCSI icon/label set (part 313611001) and apply the appropriate icon the
bulkhead.
Sun Server Connection— Single-Ended

Single-ended connections to the Sun server are as follows:
Note: It is suggested that this path be reserved for control functions only.
• Due to the length restriction of 3.7 m (12 ft), the server must be placed very close to
the library.
• The cable for this type of operation is 3 m (10 ft), high density, 68-to-50 pin, part
10083522. This cable fits all standard SPARC and RISC System/6000 single-ended
connectors.
A single-ended library connection is not generally recommended from the Unix host.
StorageTek does not offer a single-ended SCSI HBA for the 44SB-150.
The connection at the Sun server is 50-pin.

SCSI Control Connection
Sun Server Connection—High Voltage Differential

A high-voltage differential SCSI bus allows cable lengths up to 25 meters (approx 80
feet). This includes cabling inside each library that may be daisy-chained on a single SCSI
bus. The L700 library supports a differential connection. The SCSI connector on these
libraries is a 68-pin female micro-“D” (MD) connector. For differential SCSI capabilities
on the 44SB-150 platform, you must specify the “2012” feature (CB 63050). The SCSI
connectors on this dual-channel HBA are female 68-pin very high density cable
interconnect (VHDCI) connectors. The following HVD SCSI cables are available for
interconnection between the “2012” and any of the above-mentioned libraries:
Part Number Description

10083594 3 m (10 ft) 68 MD to 68 VHDCI
10083595 6 m (20 ft) 68 MD to 68 VHDCI
10083596 12 m (40 ft) 68 MD to 68 VHDCI
10083597 15 m (49 ft) 68 MD to 68 VHDCI
10083598 18 m (59 ft) 68 MD to 68 VHDCI.
Sun Server Connection—Low Voltage Differential

The L700 library supports both HVD and LVD SCSI. The SCSI connector on these
libraries is a 68-pin female micro-“D” (MD) connector. A low-voltage differential SCSI
bus allows cable lengths up to 12 meters. For the 44SB-150 to be LVD SCSI compatible,
you must specify feature “SLVD” (CB 62726). The SCSI connectors on this dual-channel
HBA are female 68-pin very high density cable interconnect (VHDCI) connectors. The
following LVD SCSI cables are available for interconnection between the “SLVD”
feature and any of the above-mentioned libraries:
Part Number Description

10083682 3 m (10 ft) 68 MD to 68 VHDCI
10083683 5 m (18 ft) 68 MD to 68 VHDCI
10083684 10 m (36 ft) 68 MD to 68 VHDCI

Direct Connection
SCSI Drive Connections

For SCSI operation, make sure that you comply with the length restrictions for your
channel type.
It is very important to label each drive with its server or client address. It is also important
to label the cables. These labels provide reliable identification for any future maintenance
on the drives.
CAUTION:
System Degradation: Do not connect SCSI cables to the drives until they
are configured for operation.
■ Direct Connection
For installations requiring SCSI direct data path configurations, for each drive:
1. Open the left rear door.
2. Connect the client data cable to the appropriate connector at the rear library frame
for the first drive.
3. Install a terminator on the second drive connector at the rear library frame:
• part 10148002 (single-ended)
• part 10148003 (HVD)
• part 10148031 (LVD/SE)
Daisy Chain Connection

For installations requiring SCSI daisy-chained data path configurations:
1. Open the left rear door.
2. Connect the client data cable to the appropriate connector at the rear library frame.
3. Install a short SCSI jumper cable (at the rear of the library frame) from the second
connector of the first drive to the next drive connector in the chain.
4. Continue the daisy chain until you reach the last drive on the chain.
5. Install a terminator on the last drive connector on the rear library frame:
• part 10148002 (single-ended)
• part 10148003 (differential)
• part 10048031 (LVD/SE)

■ Fibre Channel Operation

Fiber operation for the library interface requires:
• The optional MPV logic assembly, also referred to as the compact peripheral
component interconnect (CPCI) assembly. This card is attached to the MPC/MPCL
card.
• The optional MPU card that is inserted into the MPV. This card contains a Class 1
laser required for Fiber optic operation.
Examples of library-to-Fibre Channel host connections are shown in
Fibre Channel Cables

Part numbers and descriptions for Fibre Channel (SC connector) cables are listed in
Table 4-9.
Table 4-9. Fiber Optic Cables: 50 µm Multimode, SC-to-SC Connectors
Description—Plenum-rated* Part
5 m (16.4 ft) 10800123
20 m (65.6 ft) 10800125
50 m (164 ft) 10800127
100 m (328.1 ft) 10800128
250 m (820.2 ft) 10800129
500 m (1640.4 ft) 10800130
Note: Plenum-rated cables have a higher flammability rating and are used for under-
floor applications.
LC connectors are the industry standard for all 2 Gb-capable Fibre Channel devices such
as the T9840B tape drive. Table 4-10 through Table 4-12 on page 4-13 list the
2 Gb-capable cables and adapter.

Table 4-10. LC-to-SC Cables
Description Length Part

Optical Cable, LC to SC Duplex, Riser 10 m (32.8 ft) 10800231
Optical Cable, LC to SC Duplex, Riser 50 m (164 ft) 10800232
Optical Cable, LC to SC Duplex, Riser 100 m (328 ft) 10800233
Optical Cable, LC to SC Duplex, Plenum 10 m (32.8 ft) 10800234
Optical Cable, LC to SC Duplex, Plenum 50 m (164 ft) 10800235
Optical Cable, LC to SC Duplex, Plenum 100 m (328 ft) 10800236
Note: An MPU card is required when using these cables for connection between an
HBAJ-001 or HBAJ-002 on the 44SB-150 Sun Server and an L700 library.
Table 4-11. LC-to-LC Cables
Description Length Part

Optical Cable, LC to LC Duplex, Riser 10 m (32.8 ft) 10800221
Optical Cable, LC to LC Duplex, Riser 50 m (164 ft) 10800222
Optical Cable, LC to LC Duplex, Riser 100 m (328 ft) 10800223
Optical Cable, LC to LC Duplex, Plenum 10 m (32.8 ft) 10800224
Optical Cable, LC to LC Duplex, Plenum 50 m (164 ft) 10800225
Optical Cable, LC to LC Duplex, Plenum 100 m (328 ft) 10800226
Note: An MPU2 card is required when using these cables for connection between an
HBAJ-001 or HBAJ-002 on the 44SB-150 Sun Server and an L700 library.
Table 4-12. LC-to-SC Adapter Kit

Description Part
LC-to-SC Adapter kit (1 Gb limitation) 312105301
Fiber Cable Routing

Note: The L700e frame contains holes above the tape drive area that may be used to
route fiber cables that are located above the library.
Follow the instructions in “Fiber-optic Cable Installation” on page xxxi and

“Fiber-optic Cable Handling” on page xxxii. Route fiber cables according to
Figure 4-6 on page 4-14 and Figure 4-7 on page 4-15.

Figure 4-6. Fiber Cable Positioning (1 of 2) (C65268)
1 2
3
4
6
7
6
C65268
1. Rear view (Cable access area) 6. Fiber cable routing to MPU (from client or hub)
2. Front view (electronics module) 7. Fiber cable routing from client
3. Drive Column 1 cable access hole 8. Fiber cable routing to Column 0 drives
4. Fiber hub, bridge, or switch 9. Fiber cable routing to Column 1 drives
5. Drive Column 0 cable access hole

Figure 4-7. Fiber Cable Positioning (2 of 2) (C65301)
1
1. View from right access door
2. Fiber cables from hub to second drive
2 column
3. Cable access hole
4. Cable channel (door shown open)
C65301
Fibre Channel Connection – Library

After following the directions outlined in “Fiber-optic Cable Installation” on page xxxi,
connect the client fiber cable to the MPU card, at the lower right of the MPC/
MPCL card.
The MPU card must be placed in the lower slot on the MPV card.

Library Power Configurations
Fibre Channel Connection – Drives

After following the directions outlined in “Fiber-optic Cable Installation” on page xxxi,
connect the client fiber cable to each drive, on the rear of the drive tray.
Note: For HP Ultrium Fibre Channel drives, you must use only the Port A connector (the
lower right connector on the drive tray).
Ethernet Cable
If your installation requires an Ethernet connection:
1. Open the right front door and route the Ethernet cable up through the hole in the
library floor.
2. Connect the cable to the “Enet” connector on the MPC/MPCL card.
■ Library Power Configurations

Library power configurations are explained below. If your installation contains the APC
redundant AC power option, follow the directions enclosed with that option’s conversion
bill.
WARNING:
Electrical hazard: Do not connect the power cable until told to do so in
the instructions. Be sure the circuit breakers at the library power supply
and for the power outlet are turned off.
The AC PDUs supply voltage to the drive columns and library DC power supplies.
Consider the following requirement and recommendation:
1. No more than 10 DLT/Ultrium drives or six T9x40/T10000 drives may be
connected to one PDU. If there are two drive columns in the library, you must have
two PDUs to distribute voltage to the two drive towers.
2. If you have two PDUs, an additional DC power supply is recommended to provide
power redundancy for the library
Note: When installing your drives in a library with two AC PDUs, attach each PDU to
a separate branch circuit. Be sure that you have referred to
“Site Power Considerations” on page 1-34 to establish the site power
requirements.

Library Power Configurations
Drive Column Power

There are two drive column power cable configurations for the library:
• Single power cable
• Two power cables
To determine the type you have for your machine, check the cables behind the PDU;
single power cables will have only one cable, two power cable models will have
connectors marked PWR1 and PWR2.
Drive Column—Single Power Cable

The diagram for the single drive column power cables is shown in
Figure A-10 on page A-12.
Some power configuration examples for single drive column power cables:
• If you have two drive columns, two PDUs, and a total of six DLT/Ultrium drives,
you might place three drives in one column and three drives in the other column. If
one AC power circuit should fail, you would still have three operational drives.
• For two client operation, if you have two drive columns, two PDUs, and a total of 12
DLT/Ultrium drives you might place
• Three drives for Client 1 and three drives for Client 2 in one column
• Three drives for Client 1 and three drives for Client 2 in the second column
If one AC power circuit should fail, you would still have three working drives to each
client.
Drive Column—Two Power Cables

Newer machines incorporate two power cables into each drive column. This enables more
power configurations for the customer. The diagram for the two drive column power
cables is shown in Figure A-11 on page A-13
Newer models may be configured so that half of the drives in one column are connected
to one PDU and the other half are connected to another PDU. An example configuration
is shown in Figure 4-8 on page 4-18.
Connecting Drive Power Cables

If there is one drive column power line running from each drive column, the plug for the
column is connected at the rear of the PDU.
If there are two power lines running from each drive column, the plug labeled PWR1
denotes the lower half of the drive column; PWR2 denotes the upper half of the column.
You may cross-couple the power plugs at the rear of the PDUs. One example of this
configuration is shown below.
Note: It is advisable to label which drives are connected to each PDU.

Routing the Library Power Cable
Figure 4-8. Drive Column Power Configuration Example

(Two Power Cables) (C65797)
DRIVE DRIVE
COLUMN 0 COLUMN 1
DRV DRV
DRV DRV
DRV DRV
DRV DRV
DRV DRV
DRV DRV
DRV DRV
DRV DRV
DRV DRV
DRV DRV
PWR 1
PWR 2 PWR 2 PWR 1
PDU PDU
(STANDARD) (OPTIONAL)
AC IN AC IN
C65297
■ Routing the Library Power Cable

To route the power cable, refer to Figure 4-9 on page 4-20 and perform the following:
1. Place the library circuit breaker in the down (OFF) position.
2. Remove the nut that holds the cable strain relief in place (use a 5/16-inch nut driver
or remove the Torx bit from your driver). Place the strain relief plate to the side.
3. Insert the female connector through the hole in the library floor. Be sure the power
cable is labeled with the customer’s circuit breaker number and location.
Note: If your installation requires this cable to be under the floor, carefully pull the
cable up through the hole in the floor.
4. Insert the power cable connector into the bottom of the AC power distribution unit.
5. Replace the strain relief bracket and nut as shown in Figure 4-9 on page 4-20.

Connecting Power
Note: Safety agency standards require that your power receptacle is located within 2.8
m (9.2 ft) of the tape library. The power receptacle must also be easily accessible.
In sites where the power cable is directly wired to a power source, your facility
must have a readily accessible disconnect device incorporated in the fixed
wiring (15 A).
Rem arque: Con fo rmémen t aux normes des agences de sécurité, la p rise
d ’alimenta tion électrique doit ê tre située à moins de 2,8 m de la
biblio thèque. La p rise d ’alim enta tion doit égalemen t ê tre facile d ’accès.
Su r les sites où le câble est ra ccordé directeme nt à une source
d ’alimenta tion, un dispositif de déconnexion facile d ’accè s doit ê tre
incorporé au système de câblage fixe (15 A).
Hin w eis: Gemäß den siche rheitsrech tlichen Vo rsch rifte n darf die Ne tzsteckdose
maximal 2,8 m von Lib rary e ntfe rn t sein. Auße rdem muß die Steckdose
gu t zugänglich sein.
Wenn das Ne tzkabel fest an eine Stromquelle angeschlossen ist, muß sich
in der Festve rd rah tung eine gut zugängliche Un te rb rechu ngseinrich tung
be finden (15 A).
Uw aga: Wymogi BHP stan ow ią, że gniazdo zasilania pow inno zna jdow a ć się w
odległo ści 2,8 m od biblio te ki i że pow inno by ć ła tw o dostępne.
W mie jscach, gdzie kabel zasilania jest bezpośrednio pod łączony do źród ła
zasilania, w sie ć zasila jącą nale ży w mon tow ać ła tw o dostępny w yłącznik
g łów ny (15 A).
■ Connecting Power
To connect the library power cable to its power source:
1. Label the cable with the library address/location.
2. Connect the male end of the power cable into the wall outlet.
3. Turn ON the circuit breaker for the wall outlet.
4. Lift up (ON) the library circuit breaker.
The library will begin its initial program loading of the embedded firmware.
Refer to Chapter 5, “Configuring the Library” to configure the library and drives.

Connecting Power
Figure 4-9. Library Power Cable (C65066)
1. Power cable
2. Strain relief

Communication/Service Cables
■ Communication/Service Cables
Three types of connections from a laptop device are available for service representatives:
1. Firmware (lower than 2.20 only) connection (SER1 port on the MPC card only—the
MPCL card cannot operate with firmware earlier than version 3.02)
2. Full service connection: Firmware 3.00 and later and diagnostic testing connection
(CSE port [also known as the Command Line Interface or “CLI” port] on the MPC/
MPCL card)
3. MPB (PTP) connection: Firmware 3.00 and later for the MPB only, CSE (CLI port)
in door frame of Master library.
Both connections use RJ45 cables (part 4108289xx) and require either a RJ45—DB9
adapter (part 10410823, included in shipping kit) or CSE DOS Diagnostic cable (part
24100134) at the laptop connection.
For either connection, your laptop computer must be set for RS423 or RS232 serial
protocol:
• 38,400 baud
• Eight bits
• No parity bit
• One stop bit
Firmware 2.20 and Earlier

To load firmware edition 2.20, run diagnostic tests from the laptop, or to extract detailed
FSC information, connect the RJ45 cable from the laptop to the port labeled SER1 on
the MPC card.
Note: This applies to MPC cards only; MPCL cards must be at version 3.02 or later.
Firmware 3.00 and Later

To load firmware edition 3.00 or later, run diagnostic tests from the laptop, or to extract
detailed FSC information, connect the RJ45 cable from the laptop to the port labeled
CSE on the MPC/MPCL card.
CAUTION:
System interruption: When using the CSE port, you may not be
prompted to ensure that the device is offline.

Communication/Service Cables

Configuring the Library 5
This chapter describes how to configure the library and its associated drives.
Library firmware resides within a Flash PROM chip on the MPC/MPCL controller card
When the library is powered-on, it performs the initialization of the robotic components
and automatically configures the library size. You must, however, configure the library
and drives to enable full initialization, audit, testing, and online capabilities.
To configure library capacity in an L1400M library, refer to Appendix D. All other library
configuration is identical to the L700e.
■ L700e Capacity Variations

The capacity variations available for the L700e are listed in Table 5-1 and Table 5-2.
Figure 5-1 on page 5-2 through Figure 5-4 on page 5-5 illustrate these variations.
Refer to Appendix A, “Library Elements and Diagrams” for cell (element) locations.
Table 5-1. Capacity Variations—1 Drive Column
Standalone Library Single Library with PTP*

Size Capacity Size Capacity
1/3 (➀) 216 cells 1/3 (➀) 210 cells
2/3 (➁) 384 cells 2/3 (➁) 378 cells
Full (➂) 678 cells Full (➂) 672 cells
Note: These are the capacities of each PTP library; double these numbers for the
combined total.
Table 5-2. Capacity Variations—2 Drive Columns
Standalone Library Single Library with PTP*

Size Capacity Size Capacity
1/3 (➀) 156 1/3 (➀) 150
2/3 (➁) 324 2/3 (➁) 318
Full (➂) 618 Full (➂) 612
Note: These are the capacities of each PTP library; double these numbers for the
combined total.

5-2
Figure 5-1. Standalone Capacity Diagram—1 Drive Column (C65087)
L700e Capacity Variations

3
2
1
PANEL 3 PANEL 0 PANEL 1 PANEL 2
COLUMNS COLUMNS DOOR COLUMNS

ROWS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 2 3 4 CAP B CAP A 0 1 2 3 4
0
6
12
Revision AA
18
24
COLUMNS
0 1 2
30
36
DRIVE
41 COLUMN 0
RESERVED
95843
CELLS
C65087
95843
Figure 5-2. Standalone Capacity Diagram—2 Drive Columns (C65088)

3
2
1

ROWS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 2 3 4 CAP B CAP A 0 1 2 3 4
0
6
12
Revision AA
18
24
COLUMNS
0 1 2
30

36
41
DRIVE DRIVE RESERVED
COLUMN 0 COLUMN 1 CELLS
C65088
5-3
5-4
Figure 5-3. PTP Capacity Diagram—1 Drive Column (C65405)

3
2
1

ROWS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 2 3 4 CAP B CAP A 0 2* 3 4
0
8
9
6
12
Revision AA
18
24
COLUMNS
0 1 2
30
36
DRIVE
41 COLUMN 0
RESERVED
CELLS
= PASS-THRU PORT (PTP) [Panel 2, Column 3 numbering begins with the first array cell below the PTP.]
95843
NOTE: Columns 1 and 2 on Panel 2 are unavailable for the 1/3 - size library with the PTP C65405
95843
Figure 5-4. PTP Capacity Diagram—2 Drive Columns (C65406)

3
2
1

ROWS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 2 3 4 CAP B CAP A 0 2* 3 4
0
8
9
6
12
Revision AA
18
24
COLUMNS
0 1 2
30

36
DRIVE DRIVE
COLUMN 0 COLUMN 1
41
RESERVED
CELLS
= PASS-THRU PORT (PTP) [Panel 2, Column 3 numbering begins with the first array cell below the PTP.]
NOTE: Columns 1 and 2 on Panel 2 are unavailable for the 1/3 - size library with the PTP C65406
5-5
Operator Panel Entry
■ Operator Panel Entry

You can enter all configuration data through the operator panel. If you have installed the
StorageTek L-Series Library Admin, you can also enter some configuration data through
a workstation or a PC that is contains a Netscape or Microsoft browser. For more
information, access the online help files for the StorageTek L-Series Library Admin.
The following sections describe the operator panel procedure.
■ Operator Panel Navigation

This operator panel function buttons are explained below. Refer to
Figure 5-5 on page 5-7 for an illustration of the operator panel. The buttons used for
configuration are:
• Up arrow—moves the cursor up the display or scrolls up the display
• Down arrow—moves the cursor down the display or scrolls down the display
• SELECT—selects the item in the menu
• MENU—initially places you into the Main Menu screen or, if you are already within a
sub-menu, returns you to a previously selected screen

Operator Panel Navigation
Figure 5-5. Operator Panel (C65047)
11
2 10
3 9
LIBRARY SERVICE
ACTIVE REQUIRED
MENU SELECT
OPEN OPEN
CAP
A CAP
B
RESET
4 5 6 7 8
C65047
1. SERVICE REQUIRED indicator: 6. MENU button

Steady = library inoperative, 7. RESET button
Blinking = fan failure 8. Scroll down button
2. LIBRARY ACTIVE indicator 9. SELECT button
3. CAP A/B Open indicator 10. Scroll up button
4. CAP A open/close button 11. Menu display screen
5. CAP B open/close button

Library Information
■ Library Information
Before starting the configuration procedure, read the explanations in this chapter,
determine your selections, and write your configuration information into Table 5-3 and
Table 5-4 on page 5-9.
CAUTION:
System Degradation: Make sure that the library and associated drives
are offline to the system before starting configuration.
■ Configuration Selections
Fill in the following two tables with your library and drive configuration options.
Table 5-3. Library/Network Configuration Record
Configuration Option Selection

Auto Clean enabled or disabled
T9840 cleaning cartridge warning count
DLT cleaning cartridge warning count
DLTtape S4 cleaning cartridge warning count
Hewlett Packard Ultrium cleaning cartridge
warning count
IBM Ultrium cleaning cartridge warning
count
Certance Ultrium cleaning cartridge warning
count
Media Check
Date
Ethernet address Not configurable: pre-set at the factory
Fast Load enabled or disabled
IP address
Library capacity Automatically configured during IPL
Library name
Library SCSI ID
Library SCSI type Automatically configured during IPL

Configuration Selections
Table 5-3. Library/Network Configuration Record (Continued)
Library Worldwide ID Not configurable: pre-set at the factory

Network gateway address
Automatically configured during IPL. Libraries
Pass-thru Port connected with a PTP display L700e on the
operator panel.
Port 0 Address (library)
Port 0 Worldwide ID (library) Not configurable: pre-set at the factory
Subnet netmask address
Configured only if SNMP maps library names to
Domain Name Service (DNS)
IP addresses.
Configured to enable dynamic rather than static
Dynamic Worldwide Name (dWWN)
names
Simplified Network Management Protocol Configured after general configuration is
(SNMP) completed; see Appendix B, “SNMP.”
Time
Web password
Table 5-4. Drive Configuration Selections
SCSI or Fiber On or Off SCSI ID or On or Off

Drive # Drive #
ID* Bus Fiber ID* Bus
Note: You cannot set any configuration data at the operator panel for T9x40/T10000 drives running
on Fibre Channel.

Library Entries
■ Library Entries
Four entries are required for a library—other entries vary with your options:
1. Library SCSI ID or Fibre Channel Port 0 address
2. Drive Fast Load enable/disable
3. Date
4. Time
Note: The procedures below assume that you will make all entries during one operator
panel entry session. Each item is saved as it is changed, except for the library’s
SCSI ID or Fibre Channel Port 0 address: to save a revised library SCSI ID, you
must reset the library by pressing the RESET button.
Setting the Library’s SCSI ID

If the control path for the library is SCSI, you must enter the library’s SCSI ID at the
operator panel, from the Lib SCSI I/F Config Menu.
Note: The information below explains special circumstances for selecting a SCSI ID
(address) for the library:
1. When configuring the library to a Unix-based workstation, StorageTek
recommends that you use a dedicated SCSI client host bus adapter (HBA):
• For wide SCSI adapters, you may assign any address from 0 to 14 for the
library.
• For narrow SCSI adapters, the range of addresses is 0 to 6.
2. If you choose to use the embedded system bus on the SPARC station, select
address 6, 5, 2, or 0 for the library; the remaining targets are reserved for Sun
peripherals.
3. For IBM RISC System/6000 machines, available addresses on the embedded
system bus are 6, 5, 3, and 2.
Note: If the customer is using Automated Cartridge System Library Software
(ACSLS), its level must be:
• Version 5.3.2 or higher for standalone library operation

• Version 6.0.1 or higher, with the Special Program Enhancement (SPE)
for PTP operation
• Version 6.1.1 or higher for T9840B ESCON operation

Library Entries
To set the library’s SCSI ID:

1. From the online status screen, press the MENU button.
The Main Menu appears.
2. Press the down arrow button until the cursor underscores CONFIGURATION.
3. Press the SELECT button.
The Main Configuration Menu appears and the cursor lines up with LIBRARY
CONFIG.
The Lib Config Menu appears and the cursor lines up with LIB SCSI I/F
CONFIG.
The Lib SCSI I/F Config Menu appears. (This menu also displays the type of SCSI
interface: differential or single-ended.)
6. Press the arrow buttons until the cursor underscores SCSI ID.
The Set Lib SCSI ID Menu appears.
8. Press the up and down arrow buttons to select the correct ID.
9. Press the SELECT button to save the changes. (You may press the MENU button to
abort.)
10. If the library SCSI ID is the only configuration value you wish to set at this time,
press the RESET button. If you wish to set other configuration values before you
reset the library, continue with the next section.
Setting the Library Fibre Channel Port 0 Address

If the control path for the library is Fibre Channel, you must set the Library’s Fibre
Channel Port 0 address. The library Fibre Channel Port 0 address locates the library’s
Port 0 on the Fibre Channel loop. Set the library Fibre Channel Port 0 address from the
Lib Fibre I/F Config Menu.
Note: Before you enter a Port 0 address, you must first set the library’s Fibre Channel
hard address option to enabled.
If you configure the library for soft addressing, you are allowing the network’s
software to configure the Port 0 address. For this addressing approach, you must
set the Fibre Channel hard address option to disabled.
The default for the hard address option is disabled.
Consult with the system administrator before selecting the library’s Port 0
addressing option.

Library Entries
To set the library Fibre Channel Port 0 address:

The Main Menu appears.
2. Press the down arrow button until the cursor underscores CONFIGURATION.
The Main Configuration Menu appears and the cursor lines up with LIBRARY
CONFIG.
The Lib Config Menu appears and the cursor lines up with LIB FIBRE I/F
CONFIG.
The Lib Fibre I/F Config Menu appears and the cursor lines up with PORT 0
CONFIGURATION. This menu also displays the library’s worldwide ID (the node
ID) and the Port 0 worldwide ID (the port ID). These two IDs are set at the factory
and cannot be changed. Each ID is 64 bits and uses the IEEE registered format.
The Fibre Port 0 Configuration menu appears.
If you want to allow the network’s software set the library Port 0 address, set the hard
address option to DISABLED by:
a. Pressing the arrow buttons until the cursor underscores AUTO ADDRESS.
b. Pressing the SELECT button. The Port Hard Address Edit Menu.
c. Pressing the up and down arrow buttons to select DISABLED.
d. Pressing the SELECT button to save the selected option.
Note: The default for the hard address option is DISABLED.
7. If you want to set the library Port 0 address, you must set the HARD ADDRESS
option to ENABLED, enter a port address by:
a. Selecting ADDRESS from the Fibre Port 0 Configuration menu. The Port
Address menu appears.
b. Pressing the up and down arrow buttons to select a digit for each field in the
three-field address. Permissible addresses are 001 through 125.
c. Pressing the SELECT button to save the address.
8. If the library Fibre Channel Port 0 address is the only configuration value you wish to
set at this time, press the RESET button. If you wish to set other configuration
values before you reset the library, continue with the next section.

Library Entries
Port 0 Worldwide ID
When a library has a Fibre Channel interface, the Port 0 worldwide ID identifies the
library’s Port 0 (that is, the lower MPU card) on the Fibre Channel system.
The ID is automatically displayed when you access the Fibre Channel Interface
Configuration Menu. It cannot be changed.
Library Worldwide ID
When a library has a Fibre Channel interface, the library’s worldwide ID identifies the
library as a node on the Fibre Channel system. The ID is automatically displayed when
you access the Fibre Channel Interface Configuration Menu. It cannot be changed.
Enabling or Disabling Fast Load

These two terms are defined as follows:
Fast load on: The robot mounts a tape to a drive and then immediately reports the
move completed.
Fast load off: The robot mounts a tape to a drive and waits at the drive location until
the tape is completely loaded before reporting the move completed.
Note: Some host software does not support the fast load enabled option. Check with
the customer for their requirement.
Enable or disable the Fast Load feature from the Lib Config Menu.
To set this feature:
1. At the Lib Config Menu screen, press the arrow button until the cursor underscores
FAST LOAD.
An editing screen appears.
3. Press the up and down arrow buttons to select either ON or OFF.
abort.)
5. If you have already changed the library’s SCSI ID or Port 0 address and are planning
to exit the Main Configuration Menu at this time, you must press the RESET button.
If you want to set other configuration values, continue with the next section.
If you have not changed the library’s SCSI ID or Port 0 address and are not setting
other configuration values, press the MENU button until you exit all menus.

Library Entries
Setting Media Check

The library can check LTO, DLT, SDLT, or DLTtape S4 cartridges for proper orientation
in the storage cells and CAP during audit.
To set this value:
1. At the Lib Config Menu, press an arrow button to underscore:
Media Check
2. Press the SELECT button. An editing screen appears.
3. On the editing screen, use the UP and DOWN arrows to select ON or OFF.
4. When the screen displays the desired setting: Press the SELECT button to save the
changes. Press the MENU button to abort.
Setting the Date

Set the date and time from the Lib Config Menu:
DATE.
3. On the editing screen:
a. Press the up and down arrow buttons to select a value for each portion (field) of
the date.
b. Press the SELECT button to move right to the next field.
c. Press the MENU button to move left to the previous field.
4. When the screen displays your desired setting, press the SELECT button from the
right-most field to save the changes. You may press the MENU button from the left-
most field to abort.
If you wish to set other configuration values, continue with the next section.

Library Entries
Setting the Time

Set the time from the Lib Config Menu. FSC log entries correspond to this time setting:
TIME.
a. Press the up and down arrows to select a value for each portion (field) of the
time.
right-most field to save the changes. (You may press the MENU button from the left-
most field to abort.)
Installing a Personality Module

If the customer is planning to use the StorageTek L-Series Library Admin, you must
install its personality module and other components according to the documentation
included in the StorageTek L-Series Library Admin shipping package. You should consult
this documentation for instructions on setting required configuration data.
Setting the Web Password

If you installed the StorageTek L-Series Library Admin, you must set a Web password at
the operator panel. For instructions on setting this value, see the documentation that
shipped with the StorageTek L-Series Library Admin.
Note: If the password requires resetting, contact Customer Support for the procedure.

Drive Entries
■ Drive Entries
SCSI Drives
Notes: To configure a T9x40 drive:
1. The drive must have firmware version 1.24 or higher. Check the drive’s
firmware version, by selecting DRIVE INFO from the Main Menu.
2. Configuring a T9x40 drive might involve more than setting the drive’s SCSI
ID and bus status. For information about T9x40 drive configuration options
and instructions, refer to the T9x40 Tape Drive Service Reference Manual, part
95740.
Two entries complete the configuration options for each SCSI drive:
• SCSI ID
• Bus status (on or off bus)
Note: On Bus means that the drive is on the same SCSI bus as the library. Off Bus
means that the drive is not on the same SCSI bus as the library.
CAUTION:
System configuration problems: When adding or replacing a drive,
always check and, if necessary, configure the drive’s SCSI ID at the
library’s operator panel.
Set the drive SCSI IDs and bus status from the drive configuration menu. You can enter
both values for each drive at the same time.
1. At the Main Configuration Menu, press an arrow button until the cursor underscores
DRIVE CONFIG.
The screen lists all installed drives with the cursor aligned with the first drive on the
list.
An example of the format is:
00 DLT7000 ID:__
ON BUS: ON
The first two digits are the drive’s logical number (the number that the library has
assigned the drive). The tape library sets this number during its automatic
configuration sequence (at power-on or reset). It is an internal number only and is
shown for information only.
Note: The uppermost drive within the column is designated as “0,” the next is “1,”
and so forth.

Drive Entries
Next to the logical number is the drive type (DLT 7000 in this example). To the right
of the drive type is the ID or SCSI address. On the next line is the drive’s bus status.
Ultrium drives display as:
• IBM LTO for IBM Ultrium drives
• CER LTO for Certance Ultrium drives
• HP LTO for Hewlett Packard Ultrium drives
Drive information might also appear on the menu as:
• FIBRE I/F if the drive is a Fibre Channel drive
• INVALID if the drive’s SCSI ID is an invalid address
3. Press the arrow buttons to scroll to the drive you wish to change and press the
SELECT button.
The Set Drive SCSI ID Menu appears.

Note: The operator panel displays only 16 lines per menu. If the library contains
more than eight drives, you must use the down arrow button to scroll to
drives 09 and above.
4. Press the up and down arrow buttons to change the ID.

5. Press SELECT to save your changes.
A message screen appears to indicate that the library is saving the new ID. Then the
drive configuration menu reappears.
Notes: The new SCSI ID for a T9x40 drive might not appear right away.
6. Press the arrow down button to get to the drive’s second line of information (the
drive’s bus status field).
The Set Drive SCSI Bus Menu appears.
8. Press the up and down arrow buttons to change the bus status to ON or OFF.
abort.)
The drive configuration screen reappears.
10. Continue these steps until all drives are configured.

Drive Entries
T9x40 Drives
To configure a T9x40 drive:
1. The drive must have firmware version 1.24 or higher. Check the drive’s firmware
version, by selecting DRIVE INFO from the Main Menu.
2. Configuring a T9x40 drive might involve more than setting the drive’s SCSI ID and
bus status.
For information about T9x40 drive configuration options and instructions, refer to
the T9x40 Tape Drive Service Reference Manual, part 95740
LTO Fibre Channel Drives

Note: Drive Fibre Channel addressing information may also be set through the CLI
interface; it may be read, but not entered, through the Lib Admin interface.
You may either set a hard Fibre Channel address for LTO drives or allow the address to
be set automatically, as arbitrated through the Fibre Channel loop. You set the drive’s
Fibre Channel address from the Drive Config Menu.
If you configure the drive for soft addressing, you are allowing the network’s software to
configure the Port 0 address. For this type of addressing, you must set the Fibre Channel
soft address to 126.
The default address for Fibre Channel drives is Port enabled, hard address = 80.
To set up the Fibre Channel address:
1. At the Main Configuration Menu, press an arrow button until the cursor underscores
DRIVE CONFIG.
The screen lists all installed drives with the cursor aligned with the first drive on the
list.
FIBRE I/F displays if the drive is a Fibre Channel drive.
3. Press the arrow buttons to scroll to the drive you wish to configure and press the
SELECT button.
The screen displays:

• the drive’s number
• the drive’s World-Wide Name
• if Port A is enabled – Port A must always be enabled.
• if hard addressing is enabled
• the Loop ID

Network Entries
CAUTION:
Configuration error: Information may also be supplied for Port B.
Disregard Port B settings; Port B Fibre Channel operation is not
supported at this time.
4. Be sure that Port A is enabled. If not, use the arrow buttons to scroll, then line up the
cursor with Port is: Disabled and press the SELECT button. Follow the
directions on the next screen to set Port A to enabled.
5. To set the Loop ID, use the arrow buttons to scroll to Loop ID and press SELECT.
6. The next screen gives you instructions for setting hard or soft addresses:
• Valid hard addresses are 1 – 125
• To enable hard addressing, use addresses 1 – 125
• To enable soft addressing, use address 126
Select your addressing type and address according to the instructions on the screen
display.
abort.)
■ Network Entries
Using the Network Config Menu, six entries can be set for the library’s network
configuration:
1. Library name
2. IP address
3. Network gateway
4. Subnet mask
5. DNS Configuration1
6. SNMP
Note: You may need to consult with the systems administrator for some information.
You also may view the library’s Ethernet address.
1.You must enter data for the DNS Configuration if your SNMP agent is set to trap named
recipients instead of numbered recipients.

Network Entries
Viewing the Ethernet Address

This is a six-byte address, unique to each library. The address is written into the MPC/
MPCL card at the factory and cannot be changed. An example of an Ethernet address is
00:10:4f:00:05:01.
To view the Ethernet address:
1. At the Main Configuration Menu, press the arrow down button to line up the cursor
with NETWORK CONFIG.
The Network Config Menu appears with the library’s Ethernet address at the bottom
of the screen.
Setting the Library Name

The system administrator might assign the library a name. The name is mapped to the IP
address but does not affect operation. To set the library name:
1. At the Network Config Menu, press an arrow button until the cursor underscores
LIBRARY NAME.
a. Use the up and down arrow buttons to select a value for each character (field) in
the name.
b. Use the SELECT button to move right to the next field.
c. Use the MENU button to move left to the previous field.
Note: Do not enter a library name longer than 30 characters.
4. When the screen displays your desired setting, press the SELECT button twice to
save the changes. You may press the MENU button from the left-most field to abort.

Network Entries
Setting the IP Address

The system administrator might assign the library an IP address, which makes the library
accessible through a network. This is a four-byte address that must be set with
information obtained from the system administrator. The address identifies the library
and makes it accessible through a network.
An example of an IP address entry is 192.0.0.1
Note: To use the StorageTek L-Series Library Admin, you must set the library’s IP
address at the operator panel.
To set the IP address:

LIBRARY NAME.
a. Use the up and down arrow buttons to select a value for each three-digit field in
the address.
Note: Do not leave the first field equal to zero (000)
b. Use the SELECT button to move right to the next field.
c. Use the MENU button to move left to the previous field.
right-most field to save the changes. You may press the MENU button from the left-
most field to abort.
Setting the Network Gateway Address

A network gateway in a large network allows devices on one subnet to interface with
devices on another subnet (see “Setting the Subnet Mask Address” on page 5-22). This
four-byte address must be specified by the system administrator.
Note: Entering this address is optional. It serves to indicate the gateway connection
between subnets, but it is applicable only when such a connection exists and is
necessary for library operation. Consult with your systems administrator for
additional information.

Network Entries
To set the network gateway address:

NETWORK GATEWAY.
a. Press the up and down arrow buttons to select a value for each three-digit field in
the address.
4. Press the SELECT button from the right-most field to when the screen displays your
desired setting to save the changes. (You may press the MENU button from the left-
Setting the Subnet Mask Address

This is a four-byte notation (specified by the system administrator) to resolve routing
within the customer’s intranet. This address makes the library accessible through a subnet
on a large network. An example of a subnet mask entry is 255.255.254.0.
To set the subnet mask address:
SUBNET MASK.
a. Press the up and down arrow buttons to select a value for each three-digit field in
the address.
4. Press the SELECT button from the right-most field when the screen displays your

Network Entries
DNS Configuration
Note: You must enter the Domain Name Service (DNS) configuration only if your
Simplified Network Management Protocol (SNMP) agent is set to trap named
recipients; if SNMP is set for numbered recipients, no entries are required.
For more information regarding SNMP, see Appendix B, “SNMP.”

The first entry you must make for the DNS Configuration is the Domain Name (DMN)
field.
1. Press the arrow button until the cursor underscores DMN.
a. Press the up and down arrow buttons to select a value for each letter in the
domain server’s name.
4. Enter the main server’s name, being sure to append the suffix .com at the end.
The second entry you must make is the primary DNS server’s IP address.
1. Press the arrow button until the cursor underscores SVR Primary.
a. Press the up and down arrow buttons to select a value for each number in the
primary domain server’s IP address.
c. Press the MENU button to move left to the previous field.Press the SELECT
button. An editing screen appears.

Dynamic Worldwide Name
The third entry you may make is the secondary DNS server’s IP address. This assumes
that your site has a secondary (or backup) server; if not, this entry is not required.
1. Press the arrow button until the cursor underscores SVR Secondary.
a. Press the up and down arrow buttons to select a value for each number in the
secondary domain server’s IP address.
c. Press the MENU button to move left to the previous field.Press the SELECT
button. An editing screen appears.
If you are planning to exit the Main Configuration Menu at this time, you must press
the RESET button. If you wish to set other configuration values, continue with the
next section.
If you have not changed the library’s DNS configuration and are not setting other
configuration values, press the MENU button until you exit all menus.
SNMP - Simple Network Management Protocol

SNMP configuration is performed after the library’s regular configuration is completed;
see Appendix B, “SNMP” for procedures.
■ Dynamic Worldwide Name

Dynamic Worldwide Name is a feature added into Version 3.02 firmware.
Background
To correct re-configuration problems within a customer’s Fibre Channel network, 3.02
firmware includes the dynamic Worldwide Name (dWWN) enhancement. Previously,
Fibre Channel devices contained fixed Worldwide names within the network. If a device
(for example, a defective tape drive) required replacement, the new device was detected
by the network as “unknown” and re-configuration of the network was required.
When enabled, dWWN assigns names to library drive slots rather than devices. When a
drive is replaced, the new drive receives the same name as the one replaced, thereby
eliminating the need for system re-configuration There are three Worldwide Names
reserved for each drive: Node, Port A, and Port B.
Note: This feature requires corresponding drive code that supports the dynamic
Worldwide Name feature as well. IBM Ultrium 1, 2, and 3 Fibre Channel drives
and Hewlett Packard Ultrium 3 drives support dWWN.

Dynamic Worldwide Name
Microcode for other drives is in process and will be released with the next drive
firmware versions.
Enabling dWWN
The dWWN feature (default set to OFF) is enabled through the CLI interface and, once
enabled, the library must be IPLed.
CAUTION:
Changing the dWWN feature must be coordinated with the system
administrator. The feature is usually enabled at installation time.
A record of the configuration should be kept; this is not only something

that should always be done, but it absolutely essential with the dWWN
feature to eliminate system issues in the case of an MPC/MPCL failure.
System problems: When enabling dWWN, all drives must be at the

proper firmware level. If a drive has downlevel firmware, it will remain in
the “configuring” state and unavailable for host use. To enable dWWN:
1. Through the CLI interface, type in

a. wwn xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
(where “xxx:xxx:xxx:xxx” equals the 12-digit serial number of the library—
located on the agency approval sticker of the library). Be sure that each 3-digit
group is separated by a colon.
and press ENTER.
b. Type in wwn enable and press ENTER.
2. IPL the library.
Implications for an MPC/MPCL Replacement

When replacing the MPC/MPCL cards, however, you must configure dWWN before
bringing the library and drives online. To do this:
1. Be sure the library and all drives are unavailable to the system.
2. Make sure that any applications that use the library or drives have been suspended.
3. Record all library and drive configuration data so that each field can be set to its
proper value.
CAUTION:
Errors: You will receive errors if you power-off the drives before
powering-off the library.
4. Power-off the library.

5. Power-off each drive individually.

Screen Characteristics
6. Disconnect the fiber cable from the library’s MPU card.

7. Replace the MPC/MPCL card.
CAUTION:
Errors: Do not power-on the drives until told to do so in these
instructions.
8. Power-on the library only.

9. Re-enter the library serial number and re-configure the dWWN feature on the MPC/
MPCL card to ON from the CLI interface (as described in
“Enabling dWWN” on page 5-25).
10. Enter the identical configuration data for the library that was previously active. (Refer
to the data that you previously saved.)
11. Power-on each drive individually.
12. IPL the library.
13. Verify or set configuration data for each drive. (Refer to the data that you previously
saved.)
14. Reconnect the fiber cable to the library’s MPU card.
15. Have the operator make the library and all drives available to the system.
16. Make sure that all applications that use the library and drives are working correctly.
Implications for Drive Removal/Replacement

The dWWN feature also has implications for drive removal or replacement. Consult the
L700/700e Tape Library and L700-PTP Service Manual, part 95846, for details.
■ Screen Characteristics
You also can change the operator panel’s screen characteristics from the main
configuration menu. The screen characteristics are saved in non-volatile memory.
To change the contrast and backlight (or brightness) of the operator panel screens:
1. At the main configuration menu, press an arrow button until the cursor underscores
DISPLAY INFO.
2. Press the SELECT button. The display information menu appears.
3. Press the arrow buttons to line up with the desired screen characteristic: CONTRAST
or BACKLIGHT.
4. Press the up and down arrow buttons to change the count value.

StorageTek L-Series Library Admin Entries
Note: To reset the screen characteristics to the default values, line up the cursor with
DEFAULT SCREEN CHARACTERISTICS and press the SELECT button.
abort.)
6. If you have already changed the library’s SCSI ID and are planning to exit the Main
Configuration Menu at this time, you must press the RESET button. If you try to
exit the main configuration menu, a message appears requesting that you reset the
library.
If you have not changed the library’s SCSI ID, you may exit the configuration menu
to do other tasks.
■ StorageTek L-Series Library Admin Entries

The StorageTek L-Series Library Admin is an optional (standard with the L1400M
library) Web-based interface to the library. Its model is HRZN-002, feature code LS4x for
the L700e library. If this interface is required, you must enter two values at the operator
panel:
• The library’s IP address
• The library’s Web password
For instructions on how to make these entries and use the interface to change
the library’s configuration or monitor library activity, see
Appendix C, “StorageTek L-Series Library Admin” and the documentation included in
the StorageTek L-Series Library Admin shipping package.
■ Auto Clean
The information below describes the auto clean enabled or disabled feature.
These two terms are defined as follows:
Auto Clean When a drive requires cleaning, the operator enters the compatible
Disabled: cleaning cartridge into the CAP, using the Clean Drive routine. The robot
retrieves the cartridge, mounts the tape into the drive, and returns the
cartridge to the CAP when cleaning is complete. The operator then
removes the cleaning cartridge from the CAP and manually keeps track
of its usage.
Auto Clean When a drive requires cleaning, the robot retrieves a compatible cleaning
Enabled: cartridge from the reserved cell in the library (these cell locations are
shown in Figure 6-6 on page 6-12) and mounts it into the drive. When
the cartridge dismounts, the robot returns the cleaning cartridge to its cell
location within the library. The MPC/MPCL card keeps track of usage
and posts an FSC in the log when the warning threshold is reached.

Auto Clean
Cleaning Cartridge Requirements

Valid cleaning cartridges are those that match the drive types installed in the library.
Other requirements are:
• All cleaning cartridges must have a “CLN” in their VOLSER label.
• T9840 cleaning cartridges must also have a “U” on their media ID labels.
• T9940 cleaning cartridges must have a “W” ID label.
• T10000 cleaning cartridges must have a “CT” ID label.
• Ultrium cleaning cartridges must either have labels specific to the drive
manufacturer or they must be a universal cleaning cartridges for all Ultrium
drives.
For more label information, see “Cartridges and Labels” on page 6-1.
Cleaning Cartridge Usage

Cleaning cartridges are used when the drive requires a cleaning. The drive request is sent
from the drive to the host—the library does not request a cleaning action.
If there are multiple cleaning cartridges per drive types:
• One cartridge is used until it reaches its warning count before proceeding to the next
cartridge.
• Once all cartridges have reached their warning counts, the library rotates through the
cartridges until each cartridge reaches its expired status.
• When all cartridges are expired and a drive requires cleaning, mounts still occur, but
the library operator panel displays an asterisk on the top line and the drive status
screen displays “clean needed.” The “clean needed” status remains until a new
cleaning cartridge is entered into the library to satisfy the cleaning requirement.
See also “Setting the Warning Count” on page 5-31 and
“Cleaning Cartridge Expiration” on page 5-32 for more information.
Enabling Auto Clean

There are two ways to enable Auto Clean:
1. Manually load valid cleaning cartridges into any of the 11 cells that are reserved for
cleaning and diagnostic cartridges. For the locations of these cells, refer to
2. Import valid cleaning cartridges into the reserved cell through the CAP (see
“Importing Cleaning Cartridges through the CAP” on page 5-29).
The Auto Clean feature is automatically enabled if you load even one cleaning cartridge
into the reserved cell area.

Auto Clean
Manually Installing Cleaning Cartridges

To manually install cleaning cartridges in the reserved cells:
1. Unlock and open the front doors.
2. Verify that the cleaning cartridges are right side up (the VOLSER numbers should be
closest to the top edge and facing outward).
WARNING:
Confined space: While reaching inside the library, take care to avoid
bumping your head or catching your clothes on protruding edges.
ADVERTENCIA:
Espacio limitado: Al trabajar en el interior de la biblioteca, tenga cuidado
de no golpearse la cabeza o de engancharse la ropa en los bordes
salientes.
CAUTION:
Potential static electricity damage to electrical components. Take
precautions against electrostatic discharge by touching gray, unpainted
metal (such as the library’s frame) before reaching into the library. Avoid
touching any electrical component.
3. Place cleaning cartridges into any of the 11 designated cells.

4. Close and lock the front access door.
Note: Once cleaning cartridges are entered, be sure to set the cleaning cartridge
warning count. The warning count generates FSCs into the FSC log to notify
you that the cartridge is about to expire. The warning count should never exceed
the maximum warning count displayed on the operator panel (shown in the
CLEANING INFORMATION Menu).
Importing Cleaning Cartridges through the CAP

A second way to enable Auto Clean is by importing cleaning cartridges from the CAP
into the reserved cells.
Note: To import cleaning cartridges using the CLEANING INFORMATION menu,
you must be sure that:
• Only cleaning cartridges are entered—no data cartridges are allowed

• Cleaning cartridges are entered into CAP A only
To import cleaning cartridges through the CAP:
1. Press the MENU button to return to the Main Menu.
2. Press the arrow buttons until the cursor underscores CLEANING INFORMATION.
The panel displays the Cleaning Info menu.

Auto Clean
4. Press the arrow buttons until the cursor underscores IMPORT CARTRIDGE.
CAUTION:
Possible halt to operation or damage to components. You must enter the
cartridges properly or you could damage the robot or the drive, or cause
the library to stop operating. Use only the correct cartridges for the drive
types within the library.
6. Load cartridges into the magazine. You can do this one of two ways:
a. Pull out and down on the magazine handle; then insert the cartridges
b. Remove the magazine by lifting it out, insert the cartridges, and then replace the
magazine
CAUTION:
Possible damage to the hand assembly. Before loading the magazine
into the CAP, remove the magazine’s retention cover by lifting the side
edge.
7. Enter the cartridges into the magazine so that the cartridges lie flat, with the
VOLSER label facing toward you, the customer label facing down, and the reel
facing away from you.
8. Return the magazine to its closed position. (If you have used a retention cover on the
magazine, remove the cover before replacing the magazine.)
9. Press the SELECT button on the operator panel to close the CAP.
The cleaning cartridges are audited by the robot and their types and VOLSERs are
listed on the operator panel. You must now select each cartridge at the operator
panel to import it into the library.
10. Select the cleaning cartridges you want to import by:
a. Moving the cursor to the desired cartridge entry on the list
b. Pressing the SELECT button. A selected cleaning cartridge is then highlighted
(in reverse video)
c. Repeating Steps a and b until you have selected all the cartridges you want to
import
Note: There is no undo available on this menu. If you select a cartridge by mistake,
you must exit the menu by pressing the MENU button. Then you must start
again at Step 10.

Auto Clean
11. Press the SELECT button to initiate the import.

Note: Once cleaning cartridges are entered, be sure to set the cartridge warning count
and life. The warning count generates FSCs into the FSC log to notify you that
the cartridge is about to expire. The warning count should never exceed the
maximum warning count displayed on the operator panel (shown in the
CLEANING INFORMATION Menu).
Setting the Warning Count

After a predetermined count, a cleaning cartridge must be replaced and disposed of at the
site.
If Auto Clean is enabled, use the operator panel to set the warning count of a cleaning
cartridge.
The warning count should be set lower than the cartridge’s recommended usage (or
“maximum warning count” displayed on the operator panel); this allows time to obtain a
replacement cleaning cartridge. For example, if the maximum warning count equals 20
uses, you may want to set the warning count to 17 (or other, lower number).
Always replace a used cleaning cartridge with a new, unused cleaning cartridge.
Note: You should periodically check the status of the cleaning cartridges.
See “Cleaning Cartridge Usage Count” on page 5-40 for directions.
To set the cleaning cartridge warning count:
The main menu screen appears.
2. Press the arrow button until the cursor lines up with CLEANING INFO.
The CLEANING INFO screen appears, displaying the number of cleaning cartridges
in the reserved area.
4. Press an arrow button until the cursor is at the appropriate cleaning cartridge’s
WARNING COUNT.
5. Press the SELECT button for your choice.
An editing screen appears. The editing screen displays the current setting for the
cartridge warning count. The maximum warning count is shown below the current
setting.
The warning count should never exceed the maximum warning count displayed on
the operator panel.
6. Press the arrow buttons to change the warning count.

Auto Clean
abort.)
8. Press the MENU button to return to the library status screen.
Cleaning Cartridge Expiration

A cleaning cartridge is determined as expired when the following sequence occurs:
• A drive has requested to be cleaned
• A cleaning cartridge is mounted on the drive
• After the cartridge is dismounted, the drive still requests a cleaning operation
You can determine if there is an expired cleaning cartridge by:
1. Viewing its usage as described in “Cleaning Cartridge Usage Count” on page 5-40.
If the usage count for a cleaning cartridge has exceeded its warning count, the export
screen displays: EXPIRED.
2. Viewing its usage through the StorageTek L-Series Library Admin screen
3. Observing that an asterisk (*) appears on the operator panel display; for example,
STK L700 (Code 3.00.13)*.
Exporting Cleaning Cartridges through the CAP

When one or more cleaning cartridges have expired, you can export them from the
reserved cells to the CAP with this procedure:
4. Press the arrow buttons until the cursor underscores EXPORT CARTRIDGE.
The Export Clean Cartridges screen appears, which lists all reserved cell cleaning
cartridges by drive type, VOLSER, and usage count.
6. Select the cleaning cartridges you want to export by:
a. Moving the cursor to the desired cartridge entry on the list
b. Pressing the SELECT button. A selected cleaning cartridge is then highlighted
(in reverse video)
c. Repeating Steps a and b until you have selected all the cartridges you want to
export
Press the SELECT button to start the export.

Verifying Configuration
■ Verifying Configuration
When you have completed all configuration entries, the operator panel notifies you if the
entries require you to press the RESET button.
When the library becomes ready, go through the configuration screens to verify that all
information is complete.
Procedures for monitoring library status information—such as checking the latest
firmware additions of the cleaning cartridge usage count, library personality, and
StorageTek L-Series Library Admin information—are included in the sections below.
■ Monitoring Status Information

Note: With 3.00.xx firmware and later, an asterisk (*) may appear on the operator panel
display; for example, STK L700 (Code 3.02.00)*. This denotes an
expired cleaning cartridge. To determine which cartridge has expired, see
“Cleaning Cartridge Usage Count” on page 5-40.
You can monitor CAP, library, remote user, and drive status information through the
library status screen (Table 5-6). This is the main screen on the operator panel. It displays
after initialization is complete, and it displays when you press the MENU button while
you are viewing the Main Menu.
Figure 5-6. Example Library Status Screen (C65330)
1. CAP status message

2. Library status message
3. Drives status messages
4. Remote users status message

Monitoring Status Information
You also can monitor drive information, CAP magazine status, the cleaning cartridge
usage count, and the library’s personality information through operator panel menus.
CAP Status
The first line of status information on the library status screen displays the condition of
the CAP. Table 5-5 lists the status messages that might appear on this line.
Table 5-5. CAP Status Messages
Status Message Explanation

OPEN The CAP door is currently open. (The Open indicator also is
on.) The customer may insert cartridges or remove the CAP
magazines. But they cannot view the CAP magazine contents
through the operator panel menus.
CLOSED The CAP door is currently closed.
CLOSED(LOCKED) The CAP door is currently closed and locked. Before a
customer can open the CAP door, the customer must issue a
command from the network’s system console.
TRANSITION The CAP door has stalled while attempting to open.
CAP (A, B, or The CAP is closing and the library is auditing the cartridges
blank) Closing in the CAP (3.08 firmware or higher.).
and Auditing
CAP (A, B, or The library has detected an upside-down LTO, DLT, SDLT,
blank) Open Row or DLTape S4 cartridge in the CAP and the CAP has opened.
NN Upside-Down The row location of the upside-down cartridge is identified
by NN (3.08 firmware or higher.).
UNKNOWN The library does not recognize the current state of the CAP
door.

Library Status
The library status line on the status screen displays the current state of the library.
Table 5-6 explains the status messages that might appear on this line.
Table 5-6. Library Status Messages

LIB MAIN DOOR OPEN The library’s front door is open. When you close it,
the library resets (initializes)
LIB INIT REQUIRED The library requires initialization. You must press the
RESET button.
LIBRARY NOT READY The library is not available to perform operator-
requested actions. Some status information might be
available through the network interfaces.
LIBRARY READY The library has completed initialization and is ready
to perform requested actions.
LIB MAINTENANCE MODE The library is offline because it is performing
diagnostic tests.
INTERVENTION The library is experiencing a problem. You should
REQUIRED note the FSC and take appropriate action.
LIB UNKNOWN STATE The library does not recognize its current state. You
should note the FSC (if the library has issued one)
and take appropriate action.
Remote Users Status

Following the library status line is a message indicating the number of users who are
currently accessing the library remotely. Currently, the status message on this line never
changes.

Drive Status
Table 5-7 summarizes drive status messages that might appear on the library status
screen:
Table 5-7. Drive Status Messages

INIT REQUIRED Drive must be initialized.
NOT CONNECTED Drive is not connected to a SCSI bus.
UNKNOWN DRIVE The library does not recognize the type of drive in this location.
NOT COMMUNICATE Drive is not communicating with the client or the drive power
is off.
NOT FUNCTIONAL Drive is not operating properly.
NOT LOADABLE The robot cannot load a cartridge into this drive.
EMPTY No cartridge is loaded in this drive.
CARTRIDGE IN Drive contains a cartridge, but the cartridge is not loaded into
the drive.
CLEAN NEEDED Drive requires cleaning.
CLEAN FAILED The attempt to clean this drive failed.
LOADING The library is mounting a cartridge to this drive.
REWOUND The cartridge in this drive has been rewound.
UNLOADING The robot is dismounting a cartridge from this drive.
LOADED The robot has loaded a cartridge into this drive.
REWINDING The cartridge in this drive is being rewound.
BUSY Drive is performing a read or write operation.
CLEANING Drive is being cleaned.
Note: The operator panel displays only 16 lines per screen. If the library contains more
than eight drives, use the down arrow button to scroll to drives 09 and above.

Drive Information
To view details about an installed drive, including its serial number and firmware version:
1. Press the MENU button to display the Main Menu.
2. Press an arrow button until the cursor lines up with DRIVE INFO.
A list of all installed drives appears.
4. Press the arrow buttons until the cursor underscores the desired drive.
5. Press the SELECT button. The Drive Information Menu appears. The screen lists
the manufacturer, model, status, serial number, interface type, and firmware version
of the selected drive. See Table 5-7 on page 5-36 for a list of drive status messages.
CAP Magazine Status

To check the status of a CAP magazine and its contents:
1. Press the MENU button to display the Main Menu.
2. Press an arrow button until the cursor lines up with CAP STATUS.
A blank screen appear.s
4. Press the SELECT button again.
The CAP Contents menu appears. The screen lists the VOLSER of each cartridge in
an installed magazine or it lists a status message. See Table 5-8 for the status
messages that appear on this list.
Note: Each CAP has four magazines, numbered one through four, from the top
location to the bottom.
Table 5-8. CAP Magazine Slot Status Messages

EMPTY Magazine slot does not contain a cartridge.
UNKNOWN Magazine slot contains a cartridge, but the library has not yet
performed the necessary audit to identify the cartridge.
UNREADABLE Magazine slot contains a cartridge, but the camera could not
read the cartridge’s VOLSER label.

CAP States
When ejecting or entering cartridges through the CAPs, the following CAP states may be
displayed (Table 5-9):
Table 5-9. CAP States
State Explanation
CAP A (B) Open Specified CAP is open for ejection or entry of cartridges
CAP A (B) Closed Specified CAP is closed and locked
CAP A (B) Transition Specified CAP is stalled during an open or close transition.
This message indicates a problem and an error is posted to
the FSC log.
CAP A (B) Unknown Specified CAP is in an unknown state. Consult the FSC log.
Library Personality Information

Viewing library personality information lets you determine who library’s vendor is and
whether the personality module for the StorageTek L-Series Library Admin product is
present and enabled.
To view the library’s personality information:
2. Press the arrow buttons until the cursor underscores CONFIGURATION.
The panel displays the Main Configuration Menu.
4. Press the arrow buttons until the cursor underscores PERSONALITY MODULE.
The panel displays the Personality Module Info screen.
6. Press the down arrow to view a second screen of information.

7. Press the MENU button to exit the Personality Module Info screen.
The status messages in Table 5-10 might appear on the Personality Module Info
screen:
Table 5-10. Personality Module Status/Info Screen
Message Explanation
Status:
PRESENT A recognizable personality module is attached to the logic card.
NOT PRESENT No personality module is attached to the logic card.
UNKNOWN No valid vendor information has been loaded into this library.
Type:
NORMAL No personality upgrade is currently active; the factory-installed
personality and vendor information are in effect.
UPGRADE A personality upgrade is available.
USED UPGRADE A personality upgrade is available, but the upgrade has been
previously used.
WRITE IN A personality upgrade is in progress.
PROGRESS
VERSION: The version number for the personality module. If a personality
module is not present, this is the version of the vendor information.
LIBRARY The identity number for the library vendor.
VENDOR ID:
LIBRARY The name of the library vendor.
VENDOR NAME:
LIBRARY If TYPE is NORMAL, this is the product name assigned by the
PRODUCT library vendor. If TYPE is UPGRADE, this is the name of the
NAME: product for which the upgrade is valid.
SCSI VENDOR The library vendor name reported on the SCSI or Fibre Channel
NAME: interface.
SCSI PRODUCT The library product name reported on the SCSI or Fibre Channel
NAME: interface.
Horizon:
ENABLED The personality upgrade for the StorageTek L-Series Library Admin
product is available on the installed personality module.
DISABLED The personality upgrade for the StorageTek L-Series Library Admin
product is not available.

Final Steps
Cleaning Cartridge Usage Count

The cleaning cartridge usage count assumes that you have loaded cleaning cartridges into
the reserved cells. To check the usage count of all cleaning cartridges (those in the
reserved cells and those in the CAP):
4. Press the arrow buttons until the cursor underscores CLEAN CARTRIDGE
INFO.
The Clean Cartridges screen appears, listing all installed cleaning cartridges by drive
type, VOLSER, and usage count.
Note: If the usage count for a cleaning cartridge has exceeded its warning
count, the export screen displays EXPIRED. The customer must
remove this cartridge from the library.
See “Exporting Cleaning Cartridges through the CAP” on page 5-32.
6. Press the MENU button to exit the Clean Cartridges screen.
■ Final Steps
When the library and all drives are configured, the final steps before testing the library
are:
• Power off the library.
• Open the right side door.
• Be sure that all drive power switches are in the ON (|) position.
• Power on the library. The initialization sequence (described below) begins.

Initialization Sequence
■ Initialization Sequence
An IPL occurs when the library powers on or the RESET button is pressed. The IPL
process consists of functional firmware loading, calibration of the library’s robotic
mechanisms, and an audit of the cartridges.
The MPC/MPCL card directs the initialization process, which consists of the following:
• Initialization and calibration of robotic mechanisms
• Calibration of the vision system
• Motion testing
• Hand-camera assembly testing
• An audit of tapes within the library
• Drive targeting and check for “in flux” condition on DLT drives
• Audit of reserve cells
• Load handle cycling (for DLT drives)
These steps are explained in the following sections.
Initialize and Calibrate Mechanisms

Robotic mechanism parameters are loaded into processor memory and calibration
routines are executed. The initialization process requires a maximum of five minutes.
Monitored in this sequence are:
• Reach safe position—the reach mechanism fully retracts and the reach safe sensor
must be detected before any theta or Z motion is initiated. This prevents possible
damage to the hand assembly or a customer tape.
• Z motor calibration—the Z mechanism moves from end-stop to end-stop. The
distance and time for this motion is compared against the mechanism parameters
within the firmware.
• Theta motor calibration—the theta mechanism moves from theta-stop to theta-stop.
The distance and time for this motion is compared against the mechanism
parameters within the firmware.
The library size (1/3, 2/3, and full) is determined during this step.

Vision Calibration
After calibration of the robotic motors, the robot moves to the vision calibration decal
(below drive column 0 at Panel 0). Thresholds for the line scan camera are:
• Target—readability and accuracy of the target image for locating array positions
• Bar code—readability and accuracy of bar code information
Note: The camera is operational:
• During initialization
• During audit
• When tapes are entered into a CAP
During normal operation, the camera is turned off and tapes are located by referencing
the VOLSER and cell location within the MPC/MPCL card memory.
Hand-Camera Assembly Testing

Calibration and testing of the hand assembly is accomplished near the vision calibration
decal. The proximity sensor is aimed at the decal and tested to be “on.” The hand is then
moved away from the decal and the sensor is tested to be “off.”
The gripper mechanism is extended to test for proper opening and closing.
Audit
The next step for initialization is the audit of the library. The audit process requires five
minutes.
Audit Definition
An audit is the process of checking each cell within a library. If a cell contains a tape, the
camera reads the VOLSER and transfers this data to the MPC/MPCL card. The MPC/
MPCL card calculates the robotic position of the hand assembly (by referencing the theta
and Z positions) and catalogs the tape location by:
• VOLSER
• SCSI element number or Panel, row, column
If a customer cell is empty, the location is recorded as “cell empty.” The reserved cells
(explained below) are checked for cleaning cartridges (which automatically configures the
auto clean option) and for diagnostic test cartridges.
When all customer and reserved cell locations are read and cataloged, the library audit is
complete.
However, the library audit information must be requested by the host system to update its
tape volume database. Once the robot has audited the library, the MPC/MPCL card
downloads the information and no further robotic action is involved.

This two-step process—library audit and host update—ensures that both the library and
host have current (and identical) listings of the library contents.
Note: Cartridges left in drives are not audited.
Audit Conditions
An audit begins when:
• You power-on the library
• You open and close the library access door
• A system request to audit the library is entered at the host console
Media Check
If an upside-down LTO, DLT, SDLT or DLTape S4 cartridge is found during audit, and
the Media Check option on the Library Configuration menu is set to ON, the following
message appears on the Operator Panel (3.08 firmware or higher):
*****************************);
>>> Failed Media Checking <<< );
UPSIDE-DOWN TAPE DETECTED! );
Location: (see below)
Panel NN, Column NN, Row NN,
Press <SELECT> to DISABLE the
Media Checking option.
Locations that may appear are:
• Storage Cell
• CAP (A or B)
• Drive
• Playground
• Pass-thru-Port
• In-transit
• Unknown Location
NN is the panel, column, and row number of the upside-down cartridge.
If this message appears, open the rear door or CAP, reorient the cartridge, then close the
rear door or CAP.
This process repeats until all upside-down cartridges are reoriented.
Drive Targeting
In the next step of the initialization process, the robot moves to each drive and calculates
the position of the drive’s target. This ensures accurate loading of tapes during machine
operation. For DLT drives, the load handles are checked for “in flux” conditions. Any
handles found to be in flux are lowered by the MPC/MPCL library controller.

Updating Firmware
Audit of Reserved Cells

After drive targeting, the robot audits the 12 cells of the reserved area, located below
CAP B (for libraries with two CAPs) or below the front viewing window (for libraries
with one CAP). This area is explained in “Reserved Cell Descriptions” on page 6-12. If
there are no DLT drives within the library, this is the final initialization step.
Load Handling Cycling

If DLT drives are present and they require cycling of the load handles, all handles are
raised to the loading position.
■ Updating Firmware
Library firmware is factory-installed on all new machines. It resides within a Flash PROM
chip on the MPC/MPCL controller card for the L700e library and within the MPB Pass-
thru Port (PTP) controller card for the PTP.
CAUTION:
Possible component damage: Updating firmware for libraries
connected by a PTP requires a special process. If this process
is not followed, you could damage the MPC (MPCL)/MPB cards.
Pass-thru Port
Carefully read the procedures below and consult the “readme” file that accompanies the
firmware before downloading firmware to libraries connected by a PTP. If not followed,
you could damage the MPC/MPCL card. Each library monitors the other library’s door
switch—if one library door is opened during the firmware download, this causes an
interruption to the procedure and cause damage to the MPC/MPCL card.
CAUTION:
Controller card damage: The location of the command line
interface (CLI) port has changed with edition 3.00 and later
firmware. It is now designated the CSE port (J30) on the MPC/
MPCL card.
To load only the MPB firmware, you must use the CLI port
(designated as the CSE port) in the Master library’s door frame.
See Figure 3-12 on page 3-16 if you are unfamiliar with the
location of this port.
You can download MPC/MPCL and MPB firmware from the Customer Resource Center
(CRC) Web site at http://www.support.storagetek.com. Click “Tape Storage,” then
“L700,” and finally “Code.” Select the file you need based upon:
• Whether you are updating the MPC/MPCL or MPB firmware
• The download procedure you wish to use

Updating Firmware
Download Methods
There are four methods you can use to download firmware.
1. SCSI Write Buffer command—directions for this method can found on the CRC
Web site:
• Log-in to the CRC
• Select “Product Information”
• Select “Current Products”
• At “Choose a Product Family,” scroll down, select “Tape and Tape Automation,”
and click Next
• Select “L700 Tape Library”
• Select the L700/180 Tape Libraries Interface Reference Manual
• Refer to the information in the Write Buffer command (3Bh)
2. SCSI toolbox—consult the SCSI Toolbox manual on the CRC Web site for
directions:
• Under Support Tools, click “CS Tools.”
• Then “Docs”
• Then “SCSI/Fibre Toolbox User’s Guide.”
3. StorageTek L-Series Library Admin—refer to the CRC Web site for “StorageTek L-
Series Library Admin” purchasing and ordering information.
4. L700e command line interface (CLI) ports for the MPC/MPCL
(see Figure A-9 on page A-10 and Table A-1 on page A-10) or MPB cards
(see Figure 3-12 on page 3-16).
Methods 1 through 3 allow loading of MPB firmware through the MPC/MPCL card only.
Method 4 is the only method that can be used to directly load MPB firmware.
Download File Types

Before using one of the methods described in the section above, determine which
firmware file type you wish to download:
• For all libraries, download the mpcbootxyyzz.prm file.
• For MPC/MPCL firmware only, use the mpcxyyzz.prm file.
• For MPB firmware only, use the mpbxyyzz.prm file; this file is loaded through the
CSE port (CLI) that is located in the door frame of the Master PTP library. This port
is for the MPB card only and firmware editions 3.00 or later.
• For both the MPC/MPCL and MPB cards, use the mpcxyyzzmpbxyyzz.prm file.
This loads the MPC/MPCL firmware first, then the MBP firmware.
Consult Table 5-11 on page 5-46 for your download options.

Updating Firmware
Table 5-11. Firmware Download Options

To Version
From MPC 3.00 and MPC 3.02 or

MPC 2.xx MPC 3.xx and
3.01 later
Version1 (Version 1 MPB 1.xx file
(Version 1 (Version 2
header) (Version 2 header)
header) header)
MPC 2.xx Lib Admin, SCSI, Lib Admin, SCSI, Lib Admin, SCSI,
and MPC CLI and MPC CLI and MPC CLI
port using MPC port using port using N/A
release.prm file mpcxyyzz.prm mpcxyyzz.prm
file2 file
MPC 3.xx Lib Admin, SCSI, Lib Admin, SCSI, Lib Admin, SCSI, Lib Admin, SCSI, and MPC/
and MPC CLI and MPC CLI and MPC/MPCL MPCL CLI port using
port using MPC port using CLI port using mpcxyyzzmpbxyyzz.prm
release.prm file mpcxyyzz.prm mpcxyyzz.prm file3
file2 file2
1. 2.xx release.prm files used a Level 1 download header. For compatibility, 3.00 and 3.01 firmware use a
Level 1 header also. Version 2.xx to 3.02 allow both Version 1 and 2 headers to be loaded into an MPC
card. This allows 2.xx firmware to load 3.00 firmware. Version 3.00 or later firmware can accept either a
Level 1 or 2 download header.
Starting with 3.00 and later, a Version 2 header is used to ensure the correct loading of files into the MPC
card. The MPCL card allows only a Version 2 header file to be loaded and thus requires 3.02 or later
firmware.
2. Where mpc or mpb are the card designators and “xyyzz” is the firmware revision: “x” denotes the major
revision number, “yy” is the minor revision number, and “zz” is the build number. For example, MPC
revision 3.01.24 would be represented as mpc30124.prm.
3. An mpcxyyzzmpbxyyzz.prm file can only be loaded into an L700e library pair joined by a PTP. If a PTP
is not present and functional, the download will fail.

Updating Firmware
Recommended Download Sequences

Since downloading firmware to multiple processor cards in new, the recommendations
and cautions are made below.
CAUTION:
Controller card damage: Be sure that all activity in both libraries is
quiesced before starting either procedure or controller card damage will
occur. Do not open and close a library’s access door during the
procedure. Do not press the operator panel’s RESET button on either
library until the operator panel indicates to do so.
Separate Controller Card Method

One method is to load firmware to the MPB card first, then the Master’s MPC/MPCL
card, and finally the Standby’s MPC/MPCL card.
Note: This is the safest and preferred method of upgrading firmware.
For two L700e libraries with a PTP installed:

1. Download the MPB firmware (mpbxyyzz.prm) file through the MPB CLI port.
2. In the Master library, if not already resident, load the mpcbootxyyzz.prm file.
3. Load the MPC/MPCL firmware (mpcxyyzz.prm file) through the CSE port on the
MPC/MPCL card.
Note: Do not IPL the Master library at this point.
4. In the Standby library, if not already resident, load the mpcbootxyyzz.prm file.
5. In the Standby library, load the MPC/MPCL firmware (mpcxyyzz.prm file) through
the CSE port on the MPC/MPCL card.
6. After firmware loading in both libraries is completed, press RESET on both library
operator panels.

Updating Firmware
Combined Controller Card Method

Note: This method is provided only for those accounts that do not have access to a CLI
port, requiring firmware to be loaded through either the SCSI or Lib Admin
interfaces. This method also requires more time.
A second method is to load firmware to the MPB and Master library’s MPC/MPCL card
first, then load the firmware to the Standby library’s MPC/MPCL card.
For two L700e libraries with a PTP installed:
1. In the Master library, if not already resident, load the mpcbootxyyzz.prm file.
2. Load the mpcxyyzzmpbxyyzz.prm file through the CSE port on the Master MPC/
MPCL card; this loads firmware to both the MPB card and the Master’s MPC/MPCL
card.
3. In the Standby library, if not already resident, load the mpcbootxyyzz.prm file.
4. Load the Standby MPC/MPCL card using the mpcxyyzz.prm file.
5. After firmware loading in both libraries is completed, press RESET on both library
operator panels.
Firmware Editions
After copying the firmware to your personal computer (PC), you must also have the
following to download the firmware to the MPC/MPCL card:
• An RJ45 cable (part 4108289xx)
• An RJ45—DB9 adapter (part 10410823) or CSE DOS Diagnostic cable
(part 24100134).
Firmware 2.xx
With 2.xx firmware, there are two ways to download MPC firmware:
Note: The MPCL card must be 3.02 or later.
1. The DOS method—requires approximately 20 minutes.

2. The Hyperterminal method—requires only eight minutes.
The Hyperterminal method is the preferred method since it requires less download time
and also because it will be the only method available for many future libraries.

Updating Firmware
Firmware 3.00 and Later

With firmware edition 3.00 or later, you can only use the Hyperterminal method to
download firmware to the library.
Download times vary, depending upon which controller card is being upgraded:
• MPC/MPCL only (mpcxyyzz.prm file) requires eight minutes
• MPB only (mpbxyyzz.prm file) requires three minutes
• MPC/MPCL and MPB (mpcxyyzzmpbxyyzz.prm file) requires 33 minutes
CLI Port - DOS Method

To download the firmware:
1. Connect the RJ45 serial cable to the CSE port on the MPC/MPCL card.
2. Open a DOS window on your PC.
3. Create a directory on the C drive (mk dir).
4. Insert the firmware diskette into the personal computer.
5. Change to the directory on the diskette drive (cd directory name).
6. Copy the flash97.exe program and the firmware file release.prm to the
directory you created on the C drive (copy flash.exe c:/directory name and
copy release.prm c:/directory name).
7. From the directory on your personal computer, type in:
flash97 release.prm
8. When prompted, enter the port number being used on the personal computer
(generally port 1) and press <Enter> (or return).
CAUTION:
Equipment Damage: Do not attempt to do perform any operations on the
personal computer or library until the operator panel displays DOWNLOAD
COMPLETE. Damage to the MPC/MPCL or MPB processor cards may
occur if you do not wait for the process to complete.
9. After several seconds, the personal computer displays and updates the number of
bytes being sent. The download takes about 20 minutes.
10. The L700e operator panel displays: DOWNLOADING.
11. After the personal computer displays FILE TRANSFER COMPLETED
SUCCESSFULLY, the operator panel displays: DOWNLOAD COMPLETE. Wait for
this sequence to complete.

Updating Firmware
12. Activate the firmware by pressing the RESET button on the operator panel.
Note: The fault symptom code (FSC) dictionary is also contained on this firmware
diskette. The file name is fsc.txt and, when proper security safeguards are
followed, this file may also be copied to a file on your personal computer.
CLI Port - Hyperterminal Method

Note: This method is the only valid method for 3.00 and later firmware.
CAUTION:
Controller damage: To use this method for a single library, the library
must be fully initialized and the access door must be closed.
Controller damage: To use this method for a PTP library, both libraries
must be fully initialized and both access doors must be closed.
It is best to read through this procedure first before attempting it since there is a
two minute time limit after step 5.
To download the firmware:
1. Copy the release.prm firmware file to the directory you created on the C drive
(copy release.prm or abcxyyzz.prm c:/directory name)
2. Attach your PC to the Command Line Interface (CLI) port:
• Labeled CSE on the MPC/MPCL card
• Labeled CSE on the door frame of the Master library for the MPB only).
3. From your PC:
a. For older machines, go to Start ➔Programs ➔Accessories ➔Hyperterminal and
open a Hyperterminal session.
b. For WIN2000 machines, go to Start ➔ Programs ➔ Accessories ➔
Communications ➔ Hyperterminal and open a Hyperterminal session.
4. Within the file properties, configure the connection as follows (Table 5-12):
Table 5-12. Hyperterminal Connection
Older PCs WIN2000 PCs

Baud rate = 38,400 Baud rate = 38,400
Data bits = 8 Data bits = 8
Parity bit = None Parity bit = None
Stop bit = 1 Stop bit = 1
Direct to comm flow = none Hardware flow control = xon/xoff
Click on OK.

Updating Firmware
5. In the Hyperterminal window, click on ENTER.

The CLI> prompt appears.
6. Type in: download and press the Enter key.
A message appears stating that you have two minutes to begin sending the new
firmware version.
7. At the top of the window, find the TRANSFER button and point to SEND FILE.
A box appears, allowing you to browse to the file location of the firmware you copied
in step 1.
8. Double click on release.prm.
The SEND FILE box appears, showing the pathname and the protocol chosen.
Protocol should be set to Z-MODEM.
9. Click on SEND.
The status window for the transfer appears.
CAUTION:
Equipment Damage: Do not attempt to perform any operations on the
personal computer or libraries until both operator panels display
DOWNLOAD COMPLETE. Damage to the MPC/MPCL or MPB processor
cards may occur if you do not wait for the process to complete.
If, for any reason, the download does not complete successfully, ensure
that the xon/xoff setting is valid for the current Hyperterminal session,
then retry the download immediately. Do not reset, power cycle, or open
a library access door.
10. Wait for the following prompt: Reboot ‘yes’?

Notes: If you downloaded firmware only to the MPB card, it reboots automatically and
will not prompt you to reboot.
If you downloaded the mpcxyyzzmpbxyyzz.prm file, the Master library must be
reset or power cycled before the MPB firmware is activated.
Respond with ‘yes’ to reboot the machine and activate the firmware. (Or
you may power cycle or IPL the library to activate the firmware.)
If you do not reboot, power cycle, or IPL the library to activate the new
firmware, the old firmware version will remain active. When the next reboot,
power cycle, or IPL occurs, the new firmware becomes active.
When the reboot is complete, verify that the version is correctly listed on the
operator panel.
The fault symptom code (FSC) dictionary is also contained on this firmware
diskette. The file name is “fsc” and, when proper security safeguards are
followed, this file may also be copied to a file on your personal computer.

Updating Firmware

Testing the Library 6
This chapter lists cartridges and labels, describes how to install diagnostic and cleaning
cartridges within the library, and explains diagnostic tests that are performed before
placing the library online. For more information regarding Ultrium drives, refer to the Open
Systems Tape Drives Information Manual, MT 9120.
Note: The customer must not use DATA D3 (helical recording) cartridges or 3480
cartridges in the L700e library.
■ Cartridges and Labels

Pre-labeled cartridges are available from StorageTek. For information on ordering these
cartridges, see “Ordering Tape Cartridges/Labels” on page 6-7.
StorageTek does not supply cartridge labels. For a supplier of labels only, see
“Ordering Tape Cartridges/Labels” on page 6-7

Cartridges and Labels
DLT and SDLT Cartridge Components

Components of the DLT and SDLT cartridges are shown in Figure 6-1.
Figure 6-1. DLT and SDLT Cartridges (C65074)
1. SDLT cartridge
2. DLT cartridge
3. Write protect
switches
4. Volume serial
number
(VOLSER) labels
1
Note: DLTtape S4 cartridge information is supplied in Quantum publications for the

DLT-S4 drive. DLTtape S4 cartridges are black in color.

T9840 Information
T9840 cartridge components are shown in Figure 6-2.
Figure 6-2. T9840 Cartridge (C65073)
1
1. Customer label
2. Media ID label:
R = data
U = cleaning
3. Volume serial number
(VOLSER) label
4. Write-protect switch
3
C65073
T9940 Information
T9940 tape cartridge components are shown in Figure 6-3.
Figure 6-3. T9940 Tape Cartridge (C65337)
1
1. Write-protect switch
2. Volume serial number (VOLSER)
label
3. Media ID label:
P = data
W = cleaning
2
C65337

T10000 Information
T10000 tape cartridge components are shown in Figure 6-4.
Figure 6-4. T10000 Tape Cartridge (C65337)
Top View
1
1. Cartridge label area on the rear of the cartridge
(shown with a label in place)
Bottom View
2. Leader access door
3 3. Hub
4
Front View
4. File protect switch (The arrow indicates the direction
in which you move to switch to file protect the
cartridge.)
5. Finger grips
5
C65680

Ultrium Information
Figure 6-5 illustrates an Ultrium data cartridge. Table 6-1 through Table 6-3 on page 6-6
shows the cartridge codes for Ultrium cartridges.
Figure 6-5. Ultrium Cartridge (C65306)
1
3
2
C65306
1. Write protect switch: 2. Volume serial number (VOLSER) label

Red = data cartridge 3. Access door
Gray = cleaning cartridge 4. Leader pin
Table 6-1. Ultrium 1 Cartridge Codes
Ultrium 1 Media
Label Type of Cartridge
Data cartridge
L1 100 GB
LA 50 GB
LB 30 GB
LC 10 GB
Cleaning
CU plus CLN Universal cleaning cartridge for Ultrium drives
Diagnostic
Lx plus DG Diagnostic cartridge (apply a DG label to a blank data cartridge to
be used for diagnostic tests)

Ultrium 2 Media
Data cartridge
L2 200 GB
Cleaning
CU plus CLN Universal cleaning cartridge
Diagnostic
L2 plus DG Diagnostic cartridge (apply a DG label to a blank data cartridge to

Ultrium 3 Media
Data cartridge
L3 400 GB
LT 400 GB WORM (used for Ultrium 3 or 4)
Cleaning
CU plus CLN Cleaning cartridge for Hewlett Packard
Diagnostic

Ultrium 4 Media
Data cartridge
L4 800 GB
LU 800 GB WORM (used for Ultrium 4 only)
Cleaning
CU plus CLN Cleaning cartridge for Hewlett Packard
Diagnostic

StorageTek provides labeled Ultrium cartridges only; unlabeled cartridges or sheets of

cartridge labels are not supplied. When ordering cartridges, the customer can choose
between two human-readable label alignments: horizontal label alignment or vertical
alignment.
Ordering Tape Cartridges/Labels

Contact your authorized selling agent for StorageTek-approved labeled cartridges.
Note:
• You must select the volume serial number (VOLSER) range and other label options
when ordering cartridges.
• If you choose to order additional labels, order them from any standard media vendor
(such as those listed above).
Labels used in StorageTek libraries can be made by any vendor that produces a label that
meets the StorageTek Label Specification. Some vendors (not all inclusive) are:
• EDP/Colorflex http://www.colorflex.com
• NetC http://www.netcllc.com
• WrightLine/American Eagle Systems http://www.americaneaglesys.com
• Dataware http://www.datawarelabels.com
These Web sites contain links to third party sites. These links are provided as a
convenience to you and not as an endorsement by StorageTek. StorageTek is not
responsible for the content of these linked Web sites and does not make any
representations regarding the content or accuracy of any content on such Web sites.
For technical questions, contact the StorageTek Sales Support at:
Telephone: 1.800.ask4stk (1.800.275.4785)
E-mail: sales_support@storagetek.com.

Cartridge Label Examples
■ Cartridge Label Examples

Table 6-5 through Table 6-7 on page 6-10 show examples of the various cartridge labels
used by the library drives. Be sure the customer uses the proper labels for each drive type.
Table 6-5. Label Examples—Data Cartridges
DLT/SDLT LTO T9X40 T10000
8
9
N
2
8 5 7
2 J L
6 H
8 M
U 2
2 L3 4 4
T1
C2 3
1 P
C65558 C65559 C65560 C65669
Data Cartridge Media ID Labels

The DLTtape Media ID The LTO Media ID (2) is The Media ID label (3) for The Media ID label (4) for
(1) is incorporated into incorporated at the end of the T9x40 is at the end of the T10000 is at the end
the tape label, and the tape label, and the tape label, and of the tape label, and
includes: includes: includes: includes:
B = DLT1 L4 = 800 GB P = 9940 (shown) T1 = T10000 (shown)
C = DLTtape III L3 = 400GB (shown) R = 9840 TS = Sport cartridge
D = DLTtape IV L2 = 200GB
E = DLTtape III-XT L1 = 100 GB
S = Super DLTtape I LA = 50 GB
2 = Super DLTtape II LB = 30 GB
(shown) LC = 10 GB
4 = DLTtape S4 LT = 400 GB WORM
(L3 and L4 only)
LU = 800 GB WORM
(L4 only)

Table 6-6. Label Examples—Diagnostic Cartridges
D
D
G
G
D
G O
O
1 O
O 2
O L3 2 4
T1
12 3
1 R
C65561 C65562 C65563 C65670
Diagnostic Cartridge Media ID Labels

DG = Diagnostic, plus DG = Diagnostic, plus DG = Diagnostic, plus DG = Diagnostic, plus
the media ID label (1) the Media ID label (2) the Media ID label (3) the Media ID label (4)
to identify the type of to identify the type of to identify the type of to identify the type of
cartridge. cartridge: cartridge: cartridge:
B = DLT1 L4 = 800 GB P = T9940 data T1 = T10000
C = DLTtape III L3 = 400GB (shown) R = T 9840 data TS = Sport cartridge
D = DLTtape IV L2 = 200GB (shown)
E = DLTtape III-XT L1 = 100 GB
S = Super DLTtape I LA = 50 GB
2 = Super DLTtape I LB = 30 GB
(shown) LC = 10 GB
4 = DLTtape S4 LT = 400 GB WORM
(L3 and L4 only)
LU = 800 GB WORM
(L4 only)

Table 6-7. Label Examples—Cleaning Cartridges
C
C
L L
C N N
L
O
N O
1 O
O 2
O CU 2 4
CT
1S 3
1 U
C65564 C65565 C65566 C65671
Cleaning Cartridge Media ID Labels

CLN = Cleaning, plus CLN = Cleaning, plus CLN = Cleaning, plus CLN = Cleaning, plus
the media ID label (1) the media ID (2) label the media ID label (3) the media ID label (4)
to identify the type of to identify the type of to identify the type of to identify the type of
cartridge: cartridge: cartridge: cartridge:
B = DLT1 CU = Universal U = T9840 (shown) CT = T10000
C = DLTtape III, Cleaning W = T9940
DLTtape IV, and (shown)
DLTtape III-XT
S = Super DLTtape I
and Super DLTtape II
(shown—a CLN + S
SDLT cleaning
cartridge may also be
used for DLT-S4 drives)
4 = DLTtape S4

Installing Diagnostic and Cleaning Cartridges
■ Installing Diagnostic and Cleaning Cartridges

If you are installing diagnostic and cleaning cartridges, they should be placed within the
library prior to initialization.
Use diagnostic cartridges to run motion and loading tests for cartridge drives.
CAUTION:
System Degradation: Be sure to check with the customer for the drive
cleaning option they want to use. The auto clean option is automatically
configured when cleaning cartridges are placed in the reserved area.
Automatic cleaning activates the robot to load and unload a cleaning cartridge when a
drive requires cleaning.
Labeling Cartridges
Figure 6-1 on page 6-2 and Figure 6-2 on page 6-3 show the correct placement of labels
for cartridges.
To apply the diagnostic and cleaning labels:
1. Apply labels from the appropriate cartridge label packages within the installation kit:
2. Attach a CLN label to all applicable universal cleaning cartridges.
3. Attach a DG 000 label to all applicable diagnostic cartridges.
Diagnostic and Cleaning Cartridge Cells

The “Reserved Cells” area (shown Figure 6-6 on page 6-12) is reserved for cleaning and
diagnostic cartridges for each drive type. The reserved cells are located below CAP B (for
libraries with two CAPs) or below the front viewing window (for libraries with only
one CAP).

Installing Diagnostic and Cleaning Cartridges
Figure 6-6. Reserved Cells (C65075)
1. Location of reserved cells

2. In-transit cell (Leave empty)
3. Diagnostic/Cleaning cartridges
Reserved Cell Descriptions

The reserved cells, located within the library’s left access door, are composed of two
types: a single, in-transit cell and diagnostic/cleaning cells. These are described below.
In-transit Cell
In Figure 6-6, the top cell is reserved for in-transit cartridges and used as a drop-off cell.
Do not place a cartridge into this cell. This cell has two functions:
1. It allows the robot to swap tapes within the library.
2. Under the following conditions, it may also be used as a drop-off cell if the robot has
a cartridge in the hand/camera assembly and the library loses power:.
• the cartridge cannot be returned to its source cell
• the cartridge cannot be placed into its destination cell
• during such a power-off condition, the cartridge will never be placed into a drive
When power is restored, the robot automatically places this cartridge into the
drop-off cell as part of the robotic initialization sequence.

Preparing DLT Drives
Diagnostic/Cleaning Cells
You may place any type of cleaning or diagnostic cartridge into the other 11 cells.
Alternately, these 11 cells may be left empty.
CAUTION:
System Degradation: Reserved cells are limited to cleaning and
diagnostic cartridges only. Do not place data cartridges into the
reserved cells.
Ask the customer if the auto clean option is desired. If host software
supports this option, you may place cleaning tapes in the lower 11 cells.
When the robot detects cleaning cartridges, the library automatically
configures auto clean.
If auto clean is not desired, do not place cleaning tapes in these cells.
To manually install diagnostic and cleaning cartridges:

Note: Diagnostic cartridges must be manually placed into the reserved cells; cleaning
cartridges may either be installed manually or may be imported through the CAP.
1. Open both the right and left front doors of the library.
2. Make sure the top cell is empty.
3. Place cleaning and diagnostic cartridges into any of the other 11 cells in the reserved
area. If you are unsure of how to place tapes within cells, refer to
■ Preparing DLT Drives

Note: This section covers DLT drives that contain load handles only. DLT-S4 drives do
not contain a load handle.
There should be no need to check the load handles on DLT drives. As part of the
initialization sequence, the load handles of the DLT drives are:
1. Checked for an “in flux” condition (handle requires cycling); if such a condition
exists, the MPC/MPCL card cycles the handles to the “down” position.
2. As the final step in the initialization sequence, the MPC/MPCL card cycles the
handles to the “up” position.
The following procedures describe how you must manually load and unload DLT drives
if the drives require manual intervention.

Manually Loading DLT Drives

An operate handle is attached to the front of the drives to permit loading of tapes by the
robot.
CAUTION:
DLT equipment damage: Do not move the load handle of a drive by hand
until power is applied to the drive and the green OPERATE HANDLE LED
on the drive face is ON (solid, not flashing). The latch is equipped with a
breakaway feature to prevent damage. If the latch breaks away, return it
to one of the positions shown Figure 6-7 on page 6-15. The procedure
below must be followed or damage to the loading mechanism or drive
could occur.
You must wait for the DLT drives to initialize (about 10 seconds) in order to see the
Operate Handle indicator light up for each drive.
CAUTION:
DLT equipment damage: Be sure the drive is operating and the
OPERATE HANDLE indicator is on before attempting to raise the drive
handle. The handle can be raised only when the drive is operating and
the OPERATE HANDLE indicator is constantly on. A safety mechanism
protects the drive if it is not in the proper state when the handle is
operated. To operate the handle on the DLT drive, the green OPERATE
HANDLE light on the front of the drive must be constantly on (not
flashing).
At power on, with the handle in the up position, the OPERATE HANDLE light flashes.
Wait for the OPERATE HANDLE light to stay on constantly and then manually lower
the drive handle. When the light is constantly on, raise the handle. The drive is now ready
to accept a tape.
Insert the tape completely into the drive until it remains in the receiver on its own; lower
the handle to start the load operation of the tape.
Manually Unloading DLT Drives

To manually unload a DLT drive, press the Unload button on the drive operator panel.
Wait for the green OPERATE HANDLE light to be constantly on. When these two
conditions are met, you may raise the handle. The tape ejects approximately 10 mm
(0.5 in.) from the drive opening.
CAUTION:
Possible tape damage: Wait for approximately five seconds before
pulling the tape from the drive. Failure to wait for this time period may
cause the drive/cartridge leaders to snag or damage one or both of the
leaders. If the leaders are snagging, re-insert the cartridge and repeat
the preceding procedure.

Figure 6-7. Manually Loading DLT Drives (C65076)
1 2
4 3
5
4 7
C65076
1. Cartridge hook (up) 5. Cartridge hook (up)

2. Hub (up) 6. Hub (down)
3. Handle (down) 7. Handle (up)
4. Handle (down)

Preparing SDLT/DLT-S4 Drives
■ Preparing SDLT/DLT-S4 Drives

Figure 6-8 shows examples of the SDLT drive for procedures in the following
paragraphs.
Figure 6-8. Mounting and Dismounting Cartridges from SDLT Drives (C65573)
C65573
1. Bezel 3. Indicator
2. Dismount button
Manually Loading SDLT Drives

To mount a cartridge to an SDLT drive:
1. Locate a cartridge.
2. Insert the cartridge into the drive using the direction shown in Figure 6-8.
3. Wait for the indicator on the front panel of the drive to stop blinking.

Media Statistics Table
Manually Unloading SDLT Drives

To dismount a cartridge from an SDLT drive:
Note: The dismount is partially obscured by the bezel.
Do not hold the button down.

1. Press the dismount button on the front panel of the drive.
One of the following conditions can occur:
• After the tape rewinds, the cartridge ejects from the drive.
Remove the cartridge from the drive.
• The cartridge fails to eject after the tape rewinds. Refer to the drive
manufacturer’s documentation to correct this condition.
2. Gently pull the cartridge out from the drive.
■ Media Statistics Table

VOLID reporting at load time to T9x40/T10000 drives is supplied in the T9x40/T10000
drive error log and is only available for the StorageTek drives listed in Table 6-8.
The Media Statistics Table is a new feature that allows the Service Engineer to
periodically check for media or a drive that is causing operational issues. The table lists
cartridge VOLID label, drive serial number, Fault Type (Load, Unload, Media), the
number of occurrences, and the date/time stamp of the last occurrence. Due to memory
constraints, the table is limited to 30 entries. A new entry in the table is made whenever
the VOLID, Drive, or Type differ from entries already in the table. If the identical VOLD,
Drive, and Type already exists in the table, the number of occurrences for the matching
line item is increased by one.
Statistics are more fully explained in “Library Statistics” on page C-5.
Table 6-8. VOLID Reporting
Drive Firmware Version

T9840A 1.32.102D (or later)
T9840B 1.32.3xx (or later)
T9840C 1.34.5xx (or later)
T9940A 1.32.213C (or later)
T9940B 1.32.414 (or later)
T10000 1.28.101 (or later)

Subsystem Operational Checks
■ Subsystem Operational Checks

To test library operation before placing the machine online, diagnostic tests should be
run. The two diagnostic tests we suggest are the Get-Put and the Mount-Dismount tests.
CAUTION:
System interruption: If you wish to run tests from a laptop device, you
should connect the laptop to the CSE port (38,400 baud) on the MPC/
MPCL card.
Be sure the library is idle and not in use before running tests. The CSE
(command line interface) does not give a warning that the library will be
taken offline.
Get–Put Loop Diagnostic Test

The Get-Put loop diagnostic test validates cell-to-cell move capabilities using a diagnostic
cartridge. The robot:
• Retrieves (gets) the diagnostic cartridge from its reserved cell
• Moves the hand and cartridge laterally and vertically
• Places (puts) the cartridge back into the reserved cell
To run the Get-Put diagnostic test:

1. Be sure that the library is offline.
2. Make sure the main access door is closed and the library menu is displayed.
3. Be sure there is a diagnostic cartridge in the reserved area.
4. From the status screen, press the MENU button on the operator panel.
5. Using the down arrow button, move the cursor down until it is next to
DIAGNOSTICS.
6. Press SELECT.
The DIAGNOSTICS screen appears.
7. Press the down arrow button to move the cursor next to GET-PUT Loop.
8. Press SELECT.
The GET/PUT option screen appears. Follow the screen directions to set the
number of times you want the test to run.
9. You will be prompted to confirm that you want the library in Maintenance Mode
(offline) before beginning the test (ARE YOU SURE?). Confirm this by pressing
the SELECT button.

If an error is encountered, consult the Event log for the FSC listed.
To re-start this test or to begin another test, press MENU to return to the
DIAGNOSTICS menu.
Mount-Dismount Loop Diagnostic Test

The Mount-Dismount loop diagnostic test validates the ability of the robot to load a
cartridge to and unload a cartridge from a tape drive. The robot:
• Retrieves a diagnostic cartridge
• Loads the tape into a drive
When the drive dismounts the cartridge, the robot:

• Retrieves the cartridge
• Places it back into its reserved cell.
To run the Mount-Dismount diagnostic test:

1. Be sure that both the library and target drive are offline.
2. Make sure the main access door is closed and the library menu is displayed.
3. Be sure there is a diagnostic cartridge in the reserved area.
4. From the status screen, press the MENU button.
The main menu appears.
5. Press the down arrow button to move the cursor down until it is next to
DIAGNOSTICS.
7. Press the down arrow button to move the cursor next to DRIVE DIAGNOSTICS.
8. Press SELECT.
The list of available drives appears.
9. Press the arrow button to move the cursor to the drive you wish to mount.
The list of drive diagnostic tests appears.
11. Press the arrow button to move the cursor to MOUNT/DISMOUNT LOOP.
12. Press SELECT.
the SELECT button.

If an error is encountered, consult the Event log for the FSC listed.
DIAGNOSTICS menu.
PTP Test
The PTP test simulates a cartridge pass-thru operation between two libraries connected
by a pass-thru port.
Note: There are only two PTP cartridge cells: one above and one below the target. The
top recess cannot be used as a cartridge slot.
This test:
• Places a diagnostic tape from the source library into the upper PTP cell
• Moves the cartridge to the destination library
• The destination library robot removes and then returns the tape to the PTP cell
• The tape is then either returned to the source library (where it is placed into its home
cell) or assigned a new cell in the destination library, depending on the software.
To start the PTP test:
1. Be sure that both libraries are offline.
2. Make sure that there is no cartridge in either of the PTP cells.
3. Make sure the main access doors are closed and the library menu is displayed.
4. Be sure there is a diagnostic cartridge in the reserved area of the source library.
5. From the status screen, press the MENU button.
The main menu appears.
6. Press the down arrow button to move the cursor down until it is next to
DIAGNOSTICS.
8. Press the down arrow button to move the cursor next to PTP DIAGNOSTICS.
9. Press SELECT.
The operator panel displays: NUMBER OF LOOPS = 1
10. If you wish to change the number of loops, press the arrow button. The up arrow
increases the number; the down arrow decreases the number.
11. Press SELECT to start the test (or press MENU to stop or exit the test).
the SELECT button.

If an error is encountered, an FSC appears, indicating the fault.

DIAGNOSTICS menu.
Other Diagnostic Tests

You might want to run all diagnostic tests. Descriptions of other tests are given below.
Clean Drive Mounts and dismounts a specified cleaning cartridge to/from a drive.
Note: This routine does not require the library to be offline. Be sure to instruct the
operator how to run this routine.
Mount Mounts a diagnostic cartridge to a selected drive.

Dismount Dismounts a diagnostic cartridge from a selected drive.
Run Drive Checks whether the drive is functioning. This test applies to DLT 8000,
Check T9x40, and T10000 drives only
Mount- Mounts and dismounts a diagnostic tape from the selected drive.
Dismount
Demo Mode Starts a Get-Put Loop with customer cartridges to simulate machine
operation. See the caution below.
CAUTION:
Audit update required: When DEMO MODE completes, you must IPL the
library to re-audit the library. You must then notify the customer to
update the host cartridge database.

Loading Tapes into the Library
■ Loading Tapes into the Library

When diagnostic tests are completed successfully, the customer may load their
production tapes inside the library. The most efficient way to load a great quantity of
tapes into the library is to manually load them into the array cells. Figure 6-9 and
Figure 6-10 on page 6-23 illustrate this method.
Figure 6-9. Placing Tapes into Array Cells—T9x40 and T10000 (C65683)
1 1
T9840 T9940
T10000
C65683
1. Cartridge label

Loading Tapes into the Library
Figure 6-10. Placing Tapes into Array Cells—Ultrium and DLT (C65333)
1. Ultrium cartridge 3. DLT cartridge

2. Ultrium cartridge label 4. DLT cartridge label
Once they have loaded all their tapes, close and lock the main door. The robot
automatically audits the tapes and their locations within the library.
When they place the library online, they must enter the command to update the host’s
tape database. The library audit information is then sent to the host.
Customers may also import tapes through the CAP. The CAP operation is explained in
the following section.

CAP Operation
■ CAP Operation
Cartridges are imported into and exported from the CAP. Each CAP has four magazines,
numbered one through four, from the top location to the bottom. Each cell location in a
CAP is assigned an element number (see Figure A-1 on page A-2 through
Figure A-4 on page A-5).
To import cartridges, you may place the cartridges in any position in the magazine or CAP
cell (Figure 6-11 through Figure 6-14). When the CAP door is closed, the robot audits all
CAP cell locations for cartridges.
For exporting cartridges, however, the robot places the target cartridge into the lowest
available element number first. Therefore, an export process within a library that has two
CAPs, for instance, begins at the optional CAP (CAP B) since it has the lowest element
number.
Figure 6-11. Loading the CAP—DLT Tape Cartridge (C65149)
C65149

CAP Operation
Figure 6-12. Loading the CAP—T9x40 Tape Cartridges (C65150)
C65150
Figure 6-13. Loading the CAP—T10000 Tape Cartridges (C65681)
C65681

Placing the Library Online
Figure 6-14. Loading the CAP—Ultrium Tape Cartridges (C65308)
C65308
■ Placing the Library Online

When the customer is ready to use their library for production, have the operator enter
the system command to place the drives and library online.
Refer the customer to the L700e Tape Library Hardware Operator’s Guide, part 95845, for
instructions on operating the library.

Library Elements and Diagrams A
This appendix provides:
• Wall diagrams of the tape library elements for both L700e standalone libraries and
L700e libraries joined with a PTP. Refer to Appendix D for L1400M library wall
diagrams.
• An illustration of the MPC/MPCL logic card
• An overall diagram of the library.
Wall diagrams depict the SCSI elements for all cell locations. The locations are noted at
the top of the columns in hexadecimal (denoted by the “h” at the end of the number) and
decimal.
Drive types and locations will vary with your tape library options. Each drive column
displaces 60 cell locations.
95843 Revision AA A-1

A-2
Figure A-1. Standalone Tape Library Elements—1 CAP, 1 Drive Column (C65077)
PANEL 3 PANEL 0 PANEL 1 PA N E L 2
COLUMNS COLUMNS DOOR COLUMNS COLUMNS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 0 1 2 3 4
Ah
568h 592h 5BCh 5E6h 610h 63Ah 664h 3E8h 3F4h 400h 42Ah 454h 10 496h 4C0h 4EAh 514h 53Eh
ROWS 1384 1426 1468 1510 1552 1594 1636 1000 1012 1024 1066 1108 1174 1216 1258 1300 1342
CAP A
0
6
12 3F3h 3FFh
1011 1023
Revision AA
18
24 1Dh
29
47Eh 48Ah
1150 1162
30
36
41
591h 5BBh 5E5h 60Fh 639h 663h 68Dh DRIVE 429h 453h 47Dh RESERVED 489h 495h 4BFh 4E9h 513h 530h 567h
1425 1467 1509 1551 1593 1635 1677 COLUMN 0 1065 1107 1149 CELLS 1161 1173 1215 1257 1299 1341 1383
95843
C65077
95843
Figure A-2. Standalone Tape Library Elements—1 CAP, 2 Drive Columns (C65078)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 0 1 2 3 4
Ah
52Ch 556h 580h 5AAh 5D4h 5FEh 628h 3E8h 3F4h 400h 40Ch 418h 10 45Ah 484h 4AEh 4D8h 502h
ROWS 1324 1366 1408 1450 1492 1534 1576 1000 1012 1024 1036 1048 CAP A 1114 1156 1198 1240 1282
0
6
12 3F3h 3FFh 40Bh 417h

1011 1023 1035 1047
Revision AA
18
24 1Dh
29
442h 44Eh
1090 1102
30
36
41
555h 57Fh 5A9h 5D3h 5FDh 627h 651h DRIVE DRIVE 441h RESERVED 44Dh 459h 483h 4ADh 4D7h 501h 52Bh
1365 1407 1449 1491 1533 1575 1617 COLUMN 0 COLUMN 1 1089 CELLS 1101 1113 1155 1197 1239 1281 1323
C65078
A-3
Figure A-3. Standalone Tape Library Elements—2 CAPs, 1 Drive Column (C65079)
A-4 Revision AA 95843
95843
Figure A-4. Standalone Tape Library Elements—2 CAPs, 2 Drive Columns (C65080)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 0 1 2 3 4
Ah 1Eh
52Ch 556h 580h 5AAh 5D4h 5FEh 628h 3E8h 3F4h 400h 40Ch 418h 10 30 45Ah 484h 4AEh 4D8h 502h
ROWS 1324 1366 1408 1450 1492 1534 1576 1000 1012 1024 1036 1048 CAP B CAP A 1114 1156 1198 1240 1282
0
6
12 3F3h 3FFh 40Bh 417h

1011 1023 1035 1047
Revision AA
18
24 1Dh 31h
29 49
442h 44Eh
1090 1102
30
36
41
555h 57Fh 5A9h 5D3h 5FDh 627h 651h 441h RESERVED 44Dh 459h 483h 4ADh 4D7h 501h 52Bh
1365 1407 1449 1491 1533 1575 1617 1089 CELLS 1101 1113 1155 1197 1239 1281 1323
C65080
A-5
Figure A-5. PTP Tape Library Elements—1 CAP, 1 Drive Column (C65391)
Figure A-6. PTP Tape Library Elements—1 CAP, 2 Drive Columns (C65392)
Figure A-7. PTP Tape Library Elements—2 CAPs, 1 Drive Column (C65393)
Figure A-8. PTP Tape Library Elements—2 CAPs, 2 Drive Columns (C65394)
Figure A-9. MPC/MPCL Card Diagram (C65068)
J283 J36
J24
J550 J30
J28
J282
J211
J33
J241
J32
J15
J281
J18
J53
J43
J19S
J19D
J551
J570
J571 J16
C65068
Table A-1. MPC/MPCL Card Connectors
Connector Function
J283 PTP power (Unused in standalone library)
J36 Servo signal lines
J24 Tape Transport Interface (TTI) for Drives 0 to 9
J550 Library personality/StorageTek L-Series Library Admin (MPK card)—as required.
• Pre-3.00 firmware: Dumb terminal port, used only to load pre-2.00 firmware
J30
• 3.00 and later firmware: Command Line Interface (CLI). Laptop connection: 38,400 baud rate.
CSE Port
Used for Hyperterminal downloading port for firmware, running diagnostic tests, and examination
RS 423
of FSC log.
J282 • Pre-3.00 firmware: Engineering use only.
TEST Port • 3.00 and later firmware: Pass-thru port serial connection (Unused in standalone library)
RS423
• Pre-3.00 firmware: Used for laptop command line interface (CLI) connection:
J33
38,400 baud rate. Used for Hyperterminal downloading port for firmware (editions
SER1 Port
2.20 and later), running diagnostic tests, and examination of FSC log.
RS423
• 3.00 and higher firmware: Engineering use only.

Table A-1. MPC/MPCL Card Connectors (Continued)
Connector Function
J32
SER2 Port Not used.
RS423
J15
Ethernet connector (TCP/IP)
ENET Port
J19D SCSI HVD
J19S SCSI Single-ended (MPC) or SCSI LVD/SE (MPCL)
J16 Single-ended or differential selection jumpers
J18 Terminating power jumper
J211 Connector for PCI (MPV) expansion card: MPU attaches for fiber (MPC or MPCL);
MPW attaches for SCSI LVD (MPC card only)
J28 Operator panel
J241 Tape Transport Interface (TTI) connection to MPM multiplexor card for Drives 10 to
19
J281 Engineering use only
J53 CAP and door
J570 DC power in from second MPF (DC power) supply
J571 DC power in from first MPF (DC power) supply
J551 DC fans
J43 Servo power to robot and hand-camera assembly
Note: If the MPV card (PCI expansion bus) is present, an MPU card might be attached to this card.
The MPU card contains a Class 1 laser product that complies with sections 21CFR 1040.10 and
1040.11 of the Food and Drug Administration (FDA) regulations.
Class 1 laser products do not require any special safety precautions.

A-12
Figure A-10. Library Block Diagram (Single Drive Column Power Cable) (C65215)
DC TO FANS + HALL EFFECTS
ELECTRONICS MODULE
DC IN MPF
Note: Figure A-10 is representative of earlier machines.

DC PS DRV DRV
CAP 1
(OPTIONAL)
SCSI PIGTAIL
DRV DRV
TO BULKHEAD
CAP 0 J551 J570
J53 TTI
DRV DRV
MPC CONTROLLER
DOOR J28
INTF TTI MUX BACKWARD
EXPANDER CURVED
J571 DRV DRV

IMPELLER
DC IN MPF
OPERATOR DC PS
PANEL DRV DRV
SERVO BUS
Revision AA
DRV DRV
HAND ASSEMBLY
MPL
MPP MPS ILLUM DRV DRV
PRY THETA
MOTOR DRV DRV
CAMERA GRIPPER
SOLENOID SCSI
MPI
CLOCK TERM
SPRING DRV DRV POWER
CAMERA Z
REACH DRV DRV
HAND PRX
MOTOR MOTOR
MPH
Z LOOP PDU SCSI PDU

(STANDARD) TERM (OPTIONAL)
POWER
AC IN AC IN
95843
C65215
95843
Figure A-11. Library Block Diagram (Two Drive Column Power Cables) (C65296)
DC TO FANS + HALL EFFECTS
PTP
MOTOR
DC IN MPF
Note: Figure A-11 is representative of machines manufactured after April 2000.

DC PS
(OPTIONAL) DRV DRV
J283 J551 J570

SCSI PIGTAIL DRV DRV
CAP 1 J282 TO BULKHEAD
MPC/MPC2 CONTROLLER
DRV DRV
CAP 0 J53 TTI
BACKWARD
CURVED
DRV DRV
DOOR TTI MUX IMPELLER
INTF J28 J571 EXPANDER
DRV DRV
Revision AA
OPERATOR DC IN
MPF
PANEL
DC PS
SERVO BUS DRV DRV
HAND ASSEMBLY DRV DRV

MPL
ILLUM
MPP MPS
DRV DRV
PRY THETA
MOTOR SCSI
TERM
CAMERA GRIPPER
DRV DRV POWER
MPI SOLENOID
CLOCK
SPRING
DRV DRV
CAMERA Z
REACH PRX
HAND MOTOR
MOTOR
MPH
PDU SCSI PDU
(STANDARD) TERM (OPTIONAL)
Z LOOP POWER
AC IN AC IN
C65296
A-13

SNMP B
This appendix provides the implementation of the Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP) for the L700e library.
■ Overview
StorageTek’s L-series libraries supports Version 1 of the simple network management
protocol (SNMPv1). SNMP is an application layer protocol that performs network
management operations over an Ethernet connection using a User Datagram Protocol
(UDP/IP).
SNMP allows systems administrators to query the library for configuration, operation,
and statistical information. SNMP also allows the library to inform the systems
administrator of potential problems.
Systems administrators and network managers use SNMP to monitor and receive status
from the library, such as:
• Operational state of the library (such as microcode level, serial number, online)
• Status of the cartridge access port (such as open, closed, number of cells)
• Library elements (number of hands, columns, panels, cells, CAPs)
• Number of storage cells and media types stored in the library
• Number and types of tape drives installed in the library
• Plus many other variables defined in the database
Figure B-1 on page B-2 illustrates a simple network block diagram that identifies the
locations of the SNMP software application, DNS servers, and Library Admin. This
figure also identifies the IP addresses, shows a map of DNS names, and other
components involved in that configuration (such as operator panel, Ethernet
connections, location of the Management Information Base [MIB], and the MPC/MPCL
processor card.
■ Domain Name Service

The Domain Name Service (DNS) translates names into IP addresses. Every time you
use a domain name, the DNS translates the name into the corresponding IP address. For
example, the domain name “library” might translate to an IP address of 129.80.1.4, as
shown in Figure B-1 on page B-2.
95843 Revision AA B-1

Domain Name Service
Figure B-1. SNMP and DNS Network Block Diagram Example (C65443)
Managers Agent
129.80.1.1
Host
A
DNS
Configuration
SNMP
2
Operator
Panel
Primary DNS Server
3
Host 129.80.1.2 Ethernet 129.80.1.4
ENET
B
DNS Table 1 5
IP Address Name SNMP MPC Card
129.80.1.1 A
MIB
129.80.1.2 B
129.80.1.3 C Secondary DNS
129.80.1.4 Library Server L-Series Library
Host 129.80.1.3
C
4
SNMP C65443
1. Ethernet connection (ENET) for the library.

2. To configure the library to support DNS, see “DNS Configuration” on page 5-23.
Note: You must enter the Domain Name Service (DNS) configuration only if your Simplified Network
Management Protocol (SNMP) agent is set to trap named recipients; if SNMP is set for numbered
recipients (by using IP addresses), no entries are required.
3. An example of a table that matches IP addresses to selected DNS names.
4. SNMP software application that implements the role of manager. Some applications include:
• HP Open View
• IBM NetView
• Sun Microsystems SunNet Manager
5. The MIB is stored on the MPC/MPCL card. To view the contents of the MIB database, enter:
http://IP.Address/Lseries.mib or http://library_name/Lseries.mib
6. Library Admin is an optional feature for the library. It provides the GUI-based monitoring system and is
separate from the SNMP application. Library Admin provides an easy and convenient way to configure
the library’s SNMP agent using a network configuration panel or screen. Library Admin also provides
other beneficial functions and display screens for the library.
B-2 Revision AA 95843

SNMP Terms
■ SNMP Terms
SNMP uses a manager/agent structure, a database, and a small set of commands to
exchange information. SNMP terms include:
• Agent - A module that resides in a managed device. The agent is responsible for
responding to requests from the manager and for sending traps to a recipient that
inform the systems administrator of potential problems.
• Community String - Applications use community strings for access control. The
manager includes the community string in its SNMP messages to an agent. The agent
consequently can accept or reject the operation.
• Managed device - A device that hosts the services of an SNMP agent that provides
monitored information and controlled operations using SNMP.
L-Series libraries are managed devices.
• Management Information Base (MIB) - A collection of information stored in a
database that contains configuration and statistical information for a managed
device. For L-Series libraries, a copy of the MIB is loaded with microcode and stored
on the processor card. See “Management Information Base” on page B-4 for more
information about the MIB.
• Manager - Provides the communication link between the systems administrator and
the managed devices on the network. A manager station or server allows the systems
administrator to get information about the device through the MIB and to receive
traps from an agent.
• Recipient - A location on a manager where the SNMP agent sends traps. This
location is defined by the combination of either the IP address or DNS name and the
port number. The default recipient port number is 162.
• Trap - A message that reports a problem, error, or a significant event that occurred
within the device.
■ SNMP Commands
SNMPv1 offers a limited number of commands that follow a simple request/response
exchange to communicate between the manager and the agent.
The manager issues request such as:
• Get: A request for information of a specific variable.
• GetNext: A requests for the next specific variable.
• Set: A request to change the value of a specific variable.
The agent responds with:
• Get-Response: A response to the manager’s Get and GetNext commands.
• Trap: An asynchronous message to the recipient about an error or event.
Refer to the SNMP software documentation for additional information.

Access Control
■ Access Control
Because community strings provide a weak form of access control in SNMPv1,
StorageTek’s embedded agent will not rely on the so-called “private” community string in
order to accept changes to the library’s configuration.
Using an administrative password provides access control and authorization for Set
operations. Consequently StorageTek’s embedded agent uses only one community string
for both Get and Set operations.
Important:
You must first Set the MIB variable lserLibConfigPassword
(1.3.6.1.4.1.1211.1.12.3.2) to the same value as the library password
(see Chapter 5, “Configuring the Library” for more information). Then subsequent Set
operations are authorized for a specific period of time called the grace period.
Traps however, can be sent to recipients using alternate community strings. Different
community strings can be specified while adding entries to the Trap Recipient List (see
“Configuration” on page B-6).
■ Management Information Base

The MIB is a viewable document that contains descriptions about the characteristics for a
managed device. These characteristics are the functional elements for that device which
can be monitored using SNMP software.
To access and view the contents of the MIB using a Web browser, enter the IP Address
or DNS library name and Lseries.mib. For example: http://IP.Address/Lseries.mib or
http://library_name/Lseries.mib.
Note: StorageTek’s L-series libraries implement only MIB extensions defined in the
LSERIES-TAPE-LIBRARY-MIB under the private (4) section as shown in
Figure B-2 on page B-5.
Figure B-2 on page B-5 shows the MIB hierarchy as a tree structure where the
L-series MIB is located.

Management Information Base
Figure B-2. Management Information Base Hierarchy (C65445)

MIB Title = LSERIES-TAPE-LIBRARY-MIB
Object Name = iso.identified-organization.dod.internet.private.enterprise.storagetek.products.lsereis
Equivalent Object Descriptor = 1.3.6.1.4.1.1211.1.12
ccitt (0) iso (1) iso-ccitt (2)
standard (0) registration- member- identified-

authority (1) body (2) organization (3)
dod (6)
internet (1)
directory (1) mgmt (2) experimental (3) private (4) security 5) snmpV2 (6)
enterprise (1)
storagetek (1211)
C65445

Configuration
■ Configuration
There are three ways to configure the library to support SNMP:
1. Library Admin, an optional feature for the library, but it is not required to support
SNMP.
2. The CLI port (command line interface)
See Figure B-3 for examples of the help and help snmp commands.
3. The SNMP software application—you can also use any SNMP application to change
some of the agents’ settings. You must be MIB-aware, have access to the Lseries.mib,
and refer to application documentation for specific information.
Figure B-3. CLI Help and Help SNMP Commands
cli> help
help [command] help on a specific command
diag execute diagnostics
download download new image to prom
fsc manipulate fault symptom codes
network manipulate network information
snmp manipulate SNMP configuration
time view/modify library date & time
password reset/modify library admin password
cli> help snmp

snmp view display SNMP Agent settings
snmp community [string] set Community String/IP address
snmp [enable|disable] enable of disable SNMP Agent
snmp port [port number] set Agent Listening Port Number
(Valid: 161, 1024-65535)
snmp grace [number] set Write Grace Period Number
( 1-5 minutes )
snmp reset set SNMP Agent configuration parameters
to default values
snmp list display SNMP Trap Recipient List
snmp add add a member to the SNMP Trap Recipient List by
answering individual prompts for values.
snmp add [ipaddr|name] add a member to the SNMP Trap Recipient List using
some default values
snmp add [ipaddr|name] [host port number]
add a member to the SNMP Trap Recipient List
using some default values
snmp delete [[ipaddr|name] [host port number]] | all
delete all or a selected member of the SNMP
Trap Recipient List
Where valid [host port number] values: (162, 1024-65535)
cli> _

Starting SNMP
The library comes configured with some default settings, listed in Table B-1:
Table B-1. SNMP Default Settings

Setting Default Description
Port number 161 Valid port IDs are 161, and 1024 to 65535
Agent community string. When set to public,
Community String public requests coming from any community string
will be accepted.
1 to 5 minutes
Grace Period 5 minutes Once you enter the password, you have 1–5
minutes to Set any values for the agent.
This list supports up to 12 recipients with
Trap Recipient List Empty
no duplicate entries.
SNMP (agent) Disabled Enabled or Disabled
■ Starting SNMP
To start SNMP for the library, you must:
1. Configure the library:
a. Enable the agent
b. Add recipients to the trap list (if needed)
c. Make any optional changes to the default settings.
2. Re-IPL the library for the changes to take effect.

Starting SNMP

StorageTek L-Series Library Admin C
StorageTek’s L-Series Library Admin is an optional (standard with the L1400M Tape
Library) software product that resides internally in the library and is activated by using a
Web browser. This product provides a Web-based, graphical user interface (GUI) that
enables customers to monitor and perform library operations remotely.
Some of the features of Library Admin include the ability to:
• Get a virtual view of the library’s cells
• Load microcode
• Generate useful reports on the library, drives, FSCs, and media
• Obtain valuable statistics on the library, drive, cells, and cleaning cartridge
• View and modify the configuration of the library, drives, network, and Java plug-in
• Set the cleaning cartridge threshold
• Enable SNMP and add trap recipients (see Appendix B for more information)
■ Requirements
Before installing the L-Series Library Admin, verify that the following requirements are
met:
• Minimum system requirements:
• 200MHz processor
• 64 MB RAM (96 MB preferred).
• Microcode level 2.20.00 and later contains the L-Series Library Admin software.
• Library Personality Module.
• Java™ Plug-in Software 1.4.1 on the host computer. You can download the Java
plug-in from:
http://java.sun.com/j2se/1.4.2/download.html
• Netscape Navigator 4.5 and later or Internet Explorer 5.0 and later
Note: After Library Admin is installed, the Web-based GUI with the Java plug-in is
intuitive, easy to use, and requires minimal training.
95843 Revision AA C-1

Installation Instructions
■ Installation Instructions
Note: When the operator panel displays “Web Enabled,” the Personality Module is
installed and Library Admin is enabled.
To install the L-Series Library Admin:

1. Make sure the library is powered-on and initialized.
2. Make sure the library network configurations have been completed.
See “Network Entries” on page 5-19 for more information.
Referring to Figure C-1 on page C-3:
3. Make sure the Ethernet (Enet) cable is connected.
4. Connect the Personality Module to the DB9 connector.
Note: The Library Admin software is disabled if the Personality Module is not
installed.
5. Reset the library (cycle power or open and close the front door).
6. Start the L-Series Library Admin by accessing Netscape or Internet Explorer and
entering your library name or IP address at the Address Bar.
See Figure C-1 on page C-3 for an example of the Library Admin for the L180 and L700
Tape Libraries.
C-2 Revision AA 95843

Figure C-1. Library Admin Screen Example
1. Shown is an example of the initial Library Admin Monitor Screen that shows the cell maps for the library.
2. The top and the left navigation bars allow you to select various functions as described in Table C-1 on
page C-4.

Table C-1 outlines the functionality of the Library Admin:

Table C-1. Library Admin Functions
Select Tab… For Information About...

Monitor • Cell map
• Drive status
• FSC log
• Tape inventory
Maintenance • Diagnosing a problem
• Performing a code load
• Generating reports
• Rebooting the library
Statistics • Library
• Drives
• Cells
• Cleaning cartridge
Configuration • Library
• Drives
• Network
• Cleaning count threshold
• Java plug-in

Library Statistics
■ Library Statistics
Library statistics are divided into two major categories: counters and composite
information. Both categories are explained in the following sections.
Counters
Counters are composed of 8-bit, 16-bit, and 32-bit elements. Each type is explained
below.
8-bit Counters
8-bit counters have values from 0 to 28 minus 1 (or 255).
Drive Statistics
Drive statistics are composed of the following information, based upon the absolute
element location of the drive:
1. PUT Retries: the number of times a PUT operation was retried for the specified
location. Generally, two retries will be logged for one failed motion.
2. GET Retries: the number of times a GET operation was retried for the specified
3. Mount Count: the number of mount operations to a specified location
Cell Statistics
Cell statistics are composed of the following information, based upon the absolute
element location of the cell:
1. PUT Retries: the number of times a PUT operation was retried for the specified
2. GET Retries: the number of times a GET operation was retried for the specified

Library Statistics
16-Bit Counters
16-bit counters (Table C-2) have values from 0 to 216 minus 1 (or 65,535).
Table C-2. 16-Bit Counters
Bin Description
IPL Number of times the machine was booted. No distinction is made
between powering-on or pressing the RESET button
Door Open Number of times the left access door (L700/700e) or access door
(L180) has been opened
GET Retries Number of times a GET operation required a retry operation. A
single move will have two retries before failing
GET Failures Number of times a GET operation failed. For every failed GET
operation, there will be two GET retries logged.
PUT Retries Same as GET retries, but for PUT operations
PUT Failures Same as GET failures, but for PUT operations
Label Retries Same as GET retries, but for label reading operations
Label Failures Same as GET failures, but for label reading operations
Target Retries Same as GET retries, but for targeting operations
Target Failures Same as GET retries, but for targeting operations

Library Statistics
32-Bit Counters
32-bit counters (Table C-3) have values from 0 to 232 minus 1 (or 4,294,967,295).
Table C-3. 32-Bit Counters
Bin Description
Move Count Number of successful sets of GET/PUT operations (a single move
consists of one GET and one PUT operation)
Mount Count Same as move count, except that the move here involves mounting/
dismounting a tape to/from a drive
Uptime Second Number of time (in seconds) that the machine has been running
Count
Empty Read Number of times an empty cell was detected
Target Read Number of successful targeting operations
Label Read Number of time a cartridge label was read
Label Read 1* Number of times algorithm 1 read a label
Label Unread 1* Number of times algorithm 1 could not read a label
* Added for the purpose of tracking new vision algorithms supplied with firmware
Versions 2.21.00 and later.

Library Statistics
Composite Information
Composite information contains statistics that keep track of groups of data, using units of
time or some other discrete measurement. Composite information is supplied for
Cartridge Access Port (CAP) usage, library–wide drive performance, and individual drive
performance.
Cartridge Access Port (CAP) Usage

CAP usage counters are 16-bit. The definitions are supplied below.
PUT Count
The CAP PUT count is the number of times a PUT was executed to a CAP, with bins
(Table C-4) incrementing when a CAP is opened. This provides an indication of how a
CAP is being used. For example, if five PUTs were executed to a CAP, the “5” bin (see
bin list below) would increment by one. Counts in the 21+ bin would indicate that the
CAP is being used for normal operations, not just export operations.
Table C-4. CAP PUT Count
Bin PUTs executed between CAP opens

Idle 0
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6–10 6–10
11–15 11–15
16–20 16–20
21+ 21 or more

Library Statistics
GET Counts
The CAP GET count (Table C-5) is the number of times a GET was executed from a
CAP, with bins incrementing when a CAP is opened. This provides an indication of how
a CAP is being used. For example, if 10 GETs were executed from a CAP, the “6–10” bin
(see bin list below) would increment by one. Counts in the 21+ bin would indicate that
the CAP is being used for normal operations, not just import operations.
Table C-5. CAP GET Count
Bin GETs executed between CAP opens

Idle 0
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6–10 6–10
11–15 11–15
16–20 16–20
21+ 21 or more
Library–Wide Drive Performance

Job rate intervals are set to five and 15 minutes to best understand peak machine usage.
These intervals were chosen because such data can generally be applied to thermal
behavior of electromechanical components.
As examples, one customer may only require peak machine performance for a time less
than five minutes. If so, some electromechanical components may not heat sufficiently to
cause short- or long-term reliability issues. On the other hand, another customer may
require peak performance for a full 15 minutes or longer. In this case, peak performance
indicates that components will reach higher operating temperatures and, therefore,
require more costly components.
Note: Drive mount times are included in this statistics; these times vary widely,
depending on the drive type. As a result, these statistics cannot be used to
determine if a library is meeting its published Exchanges Per Hour (EPH)
specification.
Library-wide drive performance counters are 32-bit.

Library Statistics
Five Minute Job Rate

This pool of statistics defines the hourly drive job rate the library was given during
continuous five minute intervals (Table C-6). For example, if 13 mounts were executed
during one five minute interval, the “151–175” usage bin (see below) would increment by
one (13 mounts/5 minutes x 60 minutes/hour = 156 mounts per hour). If no mount
activity takes place during a five minute interval, the “idle” bin will increment by one.
.
Table C-6. Library-Wide Performance—Five Minute Job Rate
Bin Number of mounts within a five minute interval

Idle 0
1–25 1–2
26–50 3–4
51–75 5–6
76–100 7–8
101–125 9–10
126–150 11–12
151–175 13–14
176–200 15–16
201–225 17–18
226–250 19–20
251–300 21–25
301–350 26–29
351–400 30–33
401–450 34–37
451–500 38–41
501–550 42–45
551–600 46–50
611–650 51–54
651–700 55–58
701+ 58+

Library Statistics
Fifteen Minute Job Rate

This pool of statistics defines the hourly drive job rate the library was given during
continuous fifteen minute intervals (Table C-7). For example, if 31 mounts were executed
during one fifteen minute interval, the “101–125” usage bin (see below) would increment
by one (31 mounts/15 minutes x 60 minutes/hour = 124 mounts per hour). If no mount
activity takes place during a five minute interval, the “idle” bin will increment by one.
Table C-7. Fifteen Minute Job Rate
Bin Number of mounts within a fifteen minute interval

Idle 0
1–25 1
26–50 2–3
51–75 4–5
76–100 6
101–125 7–8
126–150 9–10
151–175 11
176–200 12–13
201–225 14–15
226–250 16
251–300 17–20
301–350 21–23
351–400 24–26
401–450 27–30
451–500 31–33
501–550 34–36
551–600 37–40
601–650 41–43
651–700 44–46
701+ 47+

Library Statistics
Individual Drive Performance

Performance statistics for individual drives is the third component of composite
information. The counters for these statistics are mixed; a listing and an explanation are
provided in Table C-8.
Table C-8. Individual Drive Performance
General – No Data Transfer*

Bin Counter Explanation
Serial Number Tracking is done by serial number rather than location. This
allows for drive positional changes with no loss or inaccurate
information.
In addition, two extra information slots are allocated above the
maximum drive count to allow for temporary swapping of drives.
PUT Retries 8-bit Number of times a PUT was retried on this drive
GET Retries 8-bit Number of times a GET was retried on this drive
Mount Count 16-bit Number of times a mount was executed on this drive
Idle Time 32-bit How long (in seconds) the drive has not been able to transfer
data across the host interface (for example, no cartridge loaded,
loading, unloading); this is counting occurrences of time
available for data transfer.
Specific – Data Transfer Possible*
Minimum 16-bit Cartridge spent less than 30 seconds in a drive (probably a 9840-
style drive)
30 sec to 5 minutes 16-bit Cartridge spent from 30 seconds to 5 minutes in a drive
5 minutes to 10 minutes 16-bit Cartridge spent from 5 minutes to 10 minutes in a drive
10 minutes to 30 16-bit Cartridge spent from 10 minutes to 30 minutes in a drive
minutes
30 minutes to 60 16-bit Cartridge spent from 30 minutes to 60 minutes in a drive
minutes
More than 60 minutes 16-bit Cartridge spent more than 60 minutes in a drive
* “General” refers to statistics that relate to non-data transfer drive activities; “Specific” excludes
loading/unloading activities and counts only the time that data may be transferred to/from the drive.

L1400M Library Differences D
This appendix identifies how the L1400M Tape Library differs from the L700e Tape
Library.
■ General Information
Overview
Library Operation Types
The L1400M library is only available with a Fibre Channel interface.
Models
This new offering consists of three library models: L1400M, L1400M1, and L1400P1.
The L1400M1 is sold as the first library. The L1400P1 is sold as the second library
connected to a L1400M1 with a pass-thru port (PTP).
The L1400M1 and the L1400P1 are marketed under the names “L1400M” and “L1400,”
respectively.
Library Capacity Variations per Single Library

Both the L1400M1 and the L1400P1 have similar capacities:
• The L1400M1 library is sold with customer access to 200 slots; the L1400P1 does
not have any associated capacity features.
• Capacity increases are offered in 100-slot increments; all capacity upgrades are
features of the L1400M1.
• The L1400M1 library is shipped with 678 slots installed. Six slots are lost when the
library is connected to an L1400P1 with a PTP.
• The L1400P1 library is shipped with 672 slots installed (the included PTP reduces
678 slot capacity by six slots), but access to these slots must be licensed.
• Maximum capacity for two libraries with a PTP is 1,344 slots.
• Adding a second drive tray to a library reduces the number of available cartridge slots
by 60.
95843 Revision AA D-1

General Information
Managing Library Capacity

The L1400M uses an SN3300 fibre channel router to manage library capacity. In the
L1400M1, an embedded L1400 Interface Control Module (control module) serves the
same purpose.
The router is a 2x1 SCSI to fibre channel router. It sits in the library control path and
provides enhanced control features to the library. In this respect it acts more like a library
control module than a router.
The L1400M/L1400M1 library ships with all the cartridge slots installed. However, the
customer only has access to 200 of these slots (assuming no additional slots have been
licensed). The library control module (router) sees all the library resources but provides
access to the slots based on the number of slots the customer has licensed.
Additional slots upgrades in the library (300 - 1,344) are all sold as features of the
L1400M library model—there are no capacity upgrades for the L1400P1. However, as
with the L700, the second frame (L1400P1) is required for the customer to scale beyond
678 slots.
Slot Assignment
L1400M with SN3300 Firmware Version 5.6.10
Slots are released sequentially based on the element addresses of the slots. The library
provides the results of the read element status to the router. The router provides access to
the number of slots that have been licensed by the customer based on the element
address. These physical slots are released sequentially by the router based on the element
address. Element addresses start at 1000 (panel 0, column 0, row 0), so for a 400 slot
license, elements 1000-1399 would be released to the customer.
Each additional capacity upgrade is added to the end of the sequence. In the above
example if the customer ordered the CAPC feature (400 to 500 slots), then the additional
100 slots would be sequentially added after element address 1399. Thus, the customer
would now have access to slots with the element addresses of 1000-1499.
As with the single frame, incremental licensed slots are added at the end of the sequence.
This process almost always means that the slots are added to a second library.
D-2 Revision AA 95843

General Information
L1400M1 (or L1400M with SN3300 Router Firmware

Version 5.6.43, or higher)
This method is a more flexible means of managing cartridge capacity:
• The first 200 slots that come with the L!400M0/L1400M1 libraries are assigned to
element addresses 1000-1999. However, this assignment can be changed by editing
the element address ranges within the Slot Balancing menu (see “Configuring Slot
Balancing” on page D-27).
• Licensed slots beyond the first 200 are not automatically assigned. These slots must
be assigned by using the Slot Balancing/Partitioning menu after the license code has
been successfully entered into the SN3300 or the Library Interface Module.
• When element address ranges are input (for example, 1200-1286) into the router's
(L1400M) or interface controller’s (L1400M1) interface, the router/interface
controller releases those slots as licensed slots. You can identify up to 10 slot ranges.
The following situations can generate error messages:
• The total slots of the entered ranges exceed the total number of licensed slots—
this error does not prevent the library from functioning, it is purely
informational.
• A range is entered that is outside the cell addresses defined by the read element
status (the valid range for a library without a second drive column or PTP is
1,000 through 1,677)—the slots are not assigned.
No error message is displayed if the total number of slots selected is less than the
total number of licensed slots.
Slots can also be reassigned, by editing/entering new user-defined ranges. Care must be
taken when assigning ranges because media can be stranded. Media in previously
accessible slots could be inaccessible if slot assignments are changed. However, the
ranges can easily be changed to include the stranded media.
The benefit of assigning slots in this manner is that the customer typically does not incur
a penalty for installing the second drive column, where as with the L700 they would lose
60 slots. The customer does lose the 60 2nd drive column slots if they have maxed out
the slots in the L1400M and then install the 2nd drive column. However, they regain
these slots when they add the second frame (L1400P1). While slot loss can occur it is
minimized by the Continuous Capacity™ technology. PTP slots are never lost.

General Information
Optional Library Features

Table D-1 lists the optional features for the specific to the L1400M Tape Library.
For optional features common to both the L700e and L1400M, refer to
Table 1-4 on page 1-10.
Table D-1. L1400M Library Optional Features
Feature Description Feature Description

CAPA Cartridge Capacity 300 CAPH Cartridge Capacity 1,000
CAPB Cartridge Capacity 400 CAPI Cartridge Capacity 1,100
CAPC Cartridge Capacity 500 CAPJ Cartridge Capacity 1,200
CAPD Cartridge Capacity 600 CAPK Cartridge Capacity 1,300
CAPE Cartridge Capacity 700 (6781) CAPL Cartridge Capacity 1,344
CAPF Cartridge Capacity 800 PART Partitioning2
CAPG Cartridge Capacity 900
1. If only one frame is installed.
2. Requires L1400M1 library (or L1400M library with SN3300 firmware version 5.6.43,
or higher).
Note: To comply with agency compliance requirements, limit to one, the
number of Ethernet cables exiting the equipment rack area. if more than
one Ethernet cable is required, an Ethernet hub must be used.

General Information
Optional Interfaces
Optional user interfaces for the L1400M Tape Library include StorageTek Framework
Library Monitor, StorageTek Library Manager, and StorageTek Backup Resource
Monitor. For more information on these optional interfaces, refer to “Backup Resource
Monitor” on page D-5 and “Optional Interfaces” on page 1-11.
Backup Resource Monitor

StorageTek Backup Resource Monitor (BRM) is a software solution that simplifies the
complexity and management of the backup environment through centralized
visualization of backup applications, fabric switches, and tape libraries.
BRM’s web browser-based graphical user interface provides complete visibility of backup
operational information at a summary or detailed level including job statistics, policies,
schedules, event codes, media statistics, fabric configuration, and tape library utilization.
BRM provides robust backup application support for Veritas NetBackup, Legato
NetWorker, and IBM Tivoli Storage Manager. BRM supports fabric switches from
Brocade and McData, and provides comprehensive reporting on StorageTek L-series and
ACSLS attached tape libraries.
BRM automatically collects vital information about the backup environment, and stores
it in an open, industry-standard MS-SQL database, facilitating historical trending and
capacity forecasting functions.
Standard Interfaces
StorageTek L-Series Library Admin (Web based) is standard with the L1400M Tape
Library. Refer to “StorageTek L-Series Library Admin” on page 1-11 for more
information. Also included as standard with the L1400M library is Backup Resource
Monitor.

Installing the Library and Drives
■ Installing the Library and Drives

Installing the StorageNet 3300 Fibre Channel Router (L1400M
Library Only)
Note: The StorageNet 3300 Fibre Channel Router is mounted in the rear equipment
rack of the L1400M library only. If you are also installing an L1400P1 library
with PTP, wait until both libraries and PTP are installed before performing this
procedure.
1. Open the L1400M library right, front and left, rear doors.
2. Install the mounting brackets on the router with six screws.
3. In the rear equipment rack, install two clipnuts on each mounting rail in the desired
mounting position (Figure D-1 on page D-6).
Figure D-1. L1400M Rear Equipment Rack Clipnuts
C65461

4. Position the router and secure to the mounting rails with four screws (5, Figure D-2).
Figure D-2. StorageNet 3300 Fibre Channel Router
5 4
1 3
2
C65462
5. Verify the router power switch (5) is set to off ( O ).

6. Connect the power cable (1) to the router and a 100-240 VAC power source.
7. Connect the fiber optic cable (2) from host, and SCSI (3) cable(s) to the router.
Connect the L1400M library to SCSI port 0 (shown) and the L1400P1 library (if
present) to SCSI port 1.
8. Route the other end of one of the SCSI cable(s) under the L1400M library and
through the cable pass-through (1) at the front of the library under the PDUs
(Figure D-3).
9. Remove the SCSI terminator (if installed) from the L1400M library LVD SCSI port
and connect the SCSI cable (2).

Figure D-3. L1400M Library SCSI Port
C65463
10. If an L1400P1 library with PTP is being installed, open the L1400P1 library right,
front door.
11. Route the second SCSI cable from the router, under the libraries and through the
cable pass-through (1) at the front of the L1400P1 library.
12. Remove the SCSI terminator (if installed) from the L1400P1 library LVD SCSI port
and connect the SCSI cable (2).
13. Close all library doors if further access is not required.

Installing the L1400 PTP
■ Installing the L1400 PTP

Installing the PTP between an L1400M1 library and an L1400P1 library is identical to the
L700e, except that library aggregation must be enabled in the L1400M Interface Control
Module (L1400M1) or the SN3300 Fibre Channel Router (L1400M) with library
firmware version 5.6.43, or higher).
After physically installing the PTP according to Chapter 3, enable library aggregation (see
“Enable Library Aggregation (L1400M1 Library, or L1400M Library with SN3300
firmware version 5.6.43, or higher)” on page D-76).

Installing Cables
■ Installing Cables
Cable Connections to the L1400M Interface Control Module
(L1400M1 library only)
1. Open the L1400M1 library right, front door.
2. Connect the fiber optic cable (2, Figure D-4) from the host, and the Ethernet
cable (1) from the remote PC to the control module (3).
Figure D-4. L1400M1 Library Interface Controller Cable Connections
1
3
C65547

Installing Cables
3. If an L1400P1 library with PTP is being installed, open the L1400P1 library right,
front door.
4. Remove the SCSI terminators from the LVD SCSI ports of the L1400M1 and
L1400P1 libraries.
5. Route and connect the universal SCSI cable (2, Figure D-5) (Part 10083679) from the
L1400M1 LVD SCSI port, under the libraries, to the L1400P1 LVD SCSI port
through the cable pass-throughs (1) of each library.
Figure D-5. L1400M Library SCSI Port
C65463
6. Close all library doors if further access is not required.

Configuring the Library
■ Configuring the Library

Library capacity is controlled the procedures below using one of the following:
• The StorageNet 3300 Fibre Channel Router (L1400M)
• The L1400M Interface Control Module (L1400M1)
Refer to Chapter 5, “Configuring the Library” for all other configuration procedures.
L1400 Capacity Variations

The L1400M/L1400M1 library ships with all 678 slots included, but only the 200 slots
are enabled. Slot upgrades, controlled by the StorageNet 3300 Fibre Channel Router in
the L1400M or the L1400M Interface Control Module in the L1400M1, are available in
100-slot increments. All capacity upgrades are features of the L1400M/L1400M1 library.
The L1400P1 does not have any associated capacity features. Library capacity must be
configured whether or not the customer has purchased additional capacity.
Note: Library capacity is reduced by 60 slots when a second drive column is added, and
by an additional six slots when a PTP is added. Licensed capacity will not be
affected unless the maximum slots are licensed.
There are four steps to configure library capacity:
1. Customer places sales order.
2. Obtain a softkey for additional capacity. if the customer has ordered additional slots.
Start this process first, as it could take up to two business days for the softkey to
arrive (see “Obtaining a Softkey for Additional Capacity or Library Partitioning”).
3. Enable the router’s Continuous Capacity feature (L1400M only). This must be done
whether or not the customer has ordered additional slots (see “Enable Continuous
Capacity (L1400M Only)”).
4. When the softkey arrives, configure additional capacity on the router’s (L1400M
only) or interface controller’s (L1400M1) web-based interface (see “Configuring
Additional Capacity”).

Enable Continuous Capacity (L1400M Only)

Use the following procedure to activate the L1400M library’s SN3300 fibre channel
router’s Continuous Capacity feature:
Note: This procedure is not required for the L1400M Interface Control Module in the
L1400M1 library.
1. Connect your PC to the control module/router using one of the following methods:
Ethernet port:
a. Connect using an Ethernet crossover cable
b. Open a command prompt window and use telnet.
Serial port:
a. Connect using appropriate cable
b. Open and configure HyperTerminal. The first screen will be the main menu in
step 5. Some menus may be different than the ones shown here, using this
method.
Note: This procedure assumes the library and router/control module is powered.
2. Connect your PC to the router’s Ethernet port with an Ethernet crossover cable.
3. Verify power is applied to the library and the router.
4. Telnet to the router using the router’s IP address (1.1.1.1 default for new router):
C:\>telnet 1.1.1.1
5. The configuration login appears. Logon to the router using the login and password
shown:
Configuration Login: root
Password: password

6. The main menu appears. Type 1 and press Enter.

StorageTek SN 3300
5.6.0f A01MXC 903000806873
11/18/2004 11:27:58
1) Perform Configuration
2) System Utilities
3) Display Trace and Assertion History
4) Reboot
Copyright (C) 1998-2004 Crossroads Systems, Inc.

All rights reserved.
Command > 1
7. The Configuration Menu appears. Type 3 and press Enter.

Configuration Menu
5.6.0f A01MXC 903000806873
11/18/2004 11:29:28
1) Baud Rate Configuration

2) Ethernet and SNMP Configuration
3) Fibre Channel Configuration
4) Parallel SCSI Configuration
5) Device Mapping
6) Trace and Event Settings Configuration
7) Real-Time Clock Configuration
8) Active Fabric Configuration
A) Save Configuration
B) Restore Last Saved Configuration
C) Reset to Factory Defaults
X) Return to main menu
Command > 3

8. The Fibre Channel Configuration Menu appears. Type 9 and press

Enter.
Fibre Channel Configuration Menu
5.6.0f A01MXC 903000806873
11/18/2004 11:29:33
Current Fibre Channel Configuration - Port 0
FC Link Status : UP/FABRIC

Node Name : 0x100000E0 0202844D
Port Name : 0x100000E0 0222844D
Port Mode : AutoSense, Soft AL_PA
Discovery Mode : Manual Discovery Only
Buffered Tape Writes : Enabled, Queue Depth = 1
Current Default Map : 'Indexed'
Port Speed : 1 GigaBit
1) Change World Wide Name High 2) Change World Wide Name Low
3) Toggle Port Mode 4) Change ALPA Value
5) Toggle Discovery Mode 6) Toggle Buffered Tape Writes
7) Change Buffered Tape Queue Depth 8) Change Default Map Value
9) Edit FC Override Settings
A) Toggle Port Speed
X) Return to previous menu
Command > 9

9. The Fibre Channel Override Configuration Menu appears.

Type 8 and press Enter.
Note: Continuous Capacity is shown in the menu as Capacity On Demand.
Fibre Channel Override Configuration Menu
5.6.0f A01MXC 903000806873
11/18/2004 11:29:37
Current Fibre Channel Override Configuration - Port 0
Hi-Sup Bit in INQUIRY DATA is CLEAR

Force FCP Response Code is OFF
PRLI Payload - INITIATOR & TARGET Bits Set
PRLI ACCEPT Payload - TARGET Bit Set
PRLI ACCEPT Payload - FC CONFIRM Set
Target reset mode is ALTERNATE
Force FLOGI in Private Loop is DISABLED
1) Toggle Hi-Sup Bit Setting

2) Toggle Forcing FCP Response Code
3) Toggle Initiator/Target Bit Settings in PRLI
4) Toggle Initiator/Target Bit Setting in PRLI_ACC
5) Toggle FC Confirm Setting in PRLI_ACC
6) Change Target Reset Mode
7) Toggle Forcing FLOGI when in Private Loop
8) Capacity On Demand
Command > 8
10. The following message appears. Type the access code, then press Enter.
Access code: S9OP3TYYKWKEO7EN92JAQ248H
Enter Access Code to Enable Capacity on Demand
> S9OP3TYYKWKEO7EN92JAQ248H
11. The following message appears: Press any key to continue.

Enabling Capacity On Demand, Please Reboot your Router to
enable the changes.
Press a key to continue >
12. When the following menus appear, press the key listed to continue.
Menu Key
Fibre Channel Override Configuration MenuX
Fibre Channel Configuration Menu X
Configuration Menu A
Configuration Menu X

13. The main menu appears. Type 4 and press Enter to reboot the router. When asked to
confirm the reboot, type Y and press Enter.
StorageTek SN 3300
5.6.0f A01MXC 903000806873
11/18/2004 11:35:57
2) System Utilities
4) Reboot
5) Advanced Software Licensed Features

Command > 4
14. The router’s Continuous Capacity feature is now enabled and the library is now
configured for 200 slots. Close the Telnet session.
Note: If the customer has ordered additional capacity, continue with
“Configuring Additional Capacity” on page D-18 or “L1400M1 Library (or
L1400M Library with SN3300 firmware version 5.6.43, or higher)” on
page D-22.

Configuring Additional Capacity

L1400M Library with SN3300 Firmware Version 5.6.10
Use this procedure to configure additional capacity for the L1400M library with SN3300
Fibre Channel Router firmware version 5.6.10.
1. Connect your PC to the router’s Ethernet port using an Ethernet crossover cable.
2. Using a standard internet browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer or Netscape
Navigator, open the router’s web-based interface and type the router’s IP address.
(1.1.1.1 default for new router) in the Address line. The router’s home page
appears:
3. On the home page, click on Features in the MAIN MENU on the left side of the
screen.

4. The enter network password dialog box appears. Enter User Name and Password:
User Name: root
Password: password

5. The Features page appears. Type the softkey in the Enter Key field, then click the
Add button.

6. The Features page displays the capacity enabled by the softkey entered. In the screen
below, an additional 100 slots have been enabled, for a total of 300 slots:
7. In the Main Menu, click Reboot and follow the instructions to reboot the router.
After the control module reboots (requires about 32 seconds), the home page
appears.
Note: To disable a capacity licence, re-enter the its softkey and you will return to the
previously licensed state. Enter the key again to reactivate the capacity license.
Lower-level capacity licenses do not have to be disabled before a new higher-
capacity license.

L1400M1 Library (or L1400M Library with SN3300 firmware version 5.6.43, or
higher)
Use this procedure to configure additional capacity for an L1400M1 library or an
L1400M library with SN3300 Fibre Channel Router firmware version 5.6.43, or higher.
1. Connect your PC to the control module’s/router’s Ethernet port using a crossover
cable.
Navigator, open the router’s web-based interface and type the router’s IP address.
(1.1.1.1 default for new router) in the Address line. The router’s home page
appears:
Note: For the L1400M library with SN3300 firmware version 5.6.43, or higher; the
graphic at the top of the screen shows the SN3300 Fibre Channel Router and the
PLATFORM area shows SN3300 information. All other screen areas in this
procedure are identical.
3. On the home page, click on Features in the MAIN MENU.

4. The Enter Network Password dialog box appears. Enter User Name and
Password:
User Name: root
Password: password

5. The Features page appears. Type the softkey in the Enter Key field, then click the
Add button.

6. The Features page displays the capacity enabled by the softkey entered. In the screen
below, an additional 300 slots have been enabled, for a total of 500 slots:

Obtaining a Softkey for Additional Capacity or Library

Partitioning
Perform this procedure if the customer has ordered additional capacity over 200 slots.
1. Verify that the customer has ordered their upgraded capacity.
2. Fill out the online L1400 Software Key Order Form to request a softkey:
http://www.support.storagetek.com/GlobalNavigation/Support/
ToolsAndServices/Tools/swkeys/GENERALPUBLIC/L1400MKey_Order.htm
Note: Either the sales order number or the customer site ID will be required,
as well as an e-mail address where the key will be sent.
The soft license key is generated and sent out by e-mail within two
business days.

Configuring Slot Balancing

Use Slot Balancing to assign licensed slots between two connected L1400M libraries
when:
• Continuous Capacity enabled (default)
• Library Partitioning not enabled
Note: Once library partitioning has been purchased and enabled, Slot Balancing
is replaced by Partitioning in the MAIN MENU. Use library partitioning to
balance slots between two connected L1400M libraries. See “Configuring Library
Partitions” on page D-35.

cable.
Navigator, open the control module’s web-based interface by typing its IP address
(1.1.1.1 default for new control module) in the browser’s Address line. The
control module’s home page appears:
3. On the home page, click on Slot Balancing in the MAIN MENU.

4. The network password dialog box appears. Enter User Name and Password and click
the OK button:
User Name: root
Password: password

5. The Edit Slot Balancing page appears. Determine the slot address ranges
you wish to use in Lib 0 (the L1400M/L1400M1 library) and Lib 1 (the L1400P1
library)
Note: When the Edit Slot Balancing page first appears, all slots are
assigned to Lib 0 in the Slots line.
You must identify at least one slot for Slot Balancing.
6. In the Slots line, change the starting and ending slot address to your requirements,
and then click the Change button.
Note: Enter the starting address in the first box and the ending cell address in the
second box.

If your entry exceeds the available slots, an error message appears when you click
the Change button. Acknowledge the message and reenter the cell range.

7. The Slot balancing has unsaved changes. message and three

buttons appear:
• Reset to default setting button: Returns slot assignments to the
default setting. In this case 1000 - 1617)
• Revert to Saved button: Reverts settings to the previously saved
configuration.
• Save Changes button: Saves the changes made in the Slots line.
Note: In the example below, slots 1000 through 1300 are being assigned to Lib 0.

8. In the Add Slots line, select Lib 1 from the pull-down menu.
9. Enter the starting and ending slot addresses for Lib 1, and then click the Add button.
Note: In the example, the remaining slots (1301 through 1617) are assigned to
Lib 1.

10. A new Slots line appears below the first, showing the added slots. Click the Save
Changes button.

11. If you wish to make changes at this time, type your new starting/ending addresses in
the text entry boxes and click the appropriate Change button.
12. Click the Save Changes button when finished.

Configuring Library Partitions

Note: If NO partitions will be enabled, the Index Map must still be filled. See
“Mapping” on page D-72.
This procedure shows how to enable library partitioning and configure the first
partition. To add a up to five additional partitions after configuring the first partition,
see “Add a Partition” on page D-55. To delete a partition, see “Delete a Partition” on
page D-68.
Note: Library partitioning requires an L1400M1 library (or an L1400M library with
SN3300 firmware version 5.6.43, or higher) and a softkey to enable the function.
See “Obtaining a Softkey for Additional Capacity or Library Partitioning” on
page D-26.
1. Connect your PC to the control module’s/router’s Ethernet port using an Ethernet

crossover cable.


Navigator, open the control module’s web-based interface by typing its IP address.
(1.1.1.1 default for new control module) in the Address line. The control
module’s home page appears:
Note: If you are configuring library partitioning on an L1400M library with SN3300
firmware 5.6.43, or higher; the SN3300 Fibre Channel Router is displayed in the
graphic at the top of the screen. In addition, the PLATFORM area on the home.
page shows SN3300 information. All other portions of the following screens are
identical.

Enable Library Partitioning

1. On the home page, click on Features in the MAIN MENU. The network
password dialog box appears.
Note: If you are already logged into the control module, the Partitioning menu appears
instead of the network password dialog box, go to step 3.
2. Enter User Name and Password:

User Name: root
Password: password

3. The Advanced Software Licensed Features page appears:
4. Type the softkey in the Enter Key field and click the Add button. A dialog box
appears indicating the softkey acceptance and requesting that you reboot the router.
Click OK.
Note: If an invalid softkey message is displayed, click OK and reenter the softkey.
You may also copy the softkey from the email and paste it into the Enter
Key field.

5. On the Features page, click Reboot in the MAIN MENU.

6. On the System Reboot screen, select Yes and click the Submit button.

7. After the control module reboots (requires about 32 seconds), the home page
appears with the Partitioning menu item displayed in the MAIN MENU.
Note: You may have to click the Refresh button in the browser toolbar to display
the home page.

Add the First Partition

8. In the MAIN MENU, click Partitioning .

9. The Partitioning menu appears. Click the Add Partition option in the
PARTITION MENU.

10. The Edit New Partition screen appears.

Note: The Slots In Use list displays slots that have been mapped for
Library 0, and Library 1 (if an L1400P1 is connected with a pass-thru port).
Since we are configuring the first partition, Unused is displayed in the
Partition column for both libraries.
Lib 0 is the L1400M/L1400M1 library and Lib 1 is the L1400P1 library.

The Valid Slots list shows the slots that have been discovered for
Library 0 and Library 1 (if an L1400P1 is connected with a pass-thru port).

11. In the Add Slots line, select the desired library (Lib 0 or Lib 1) from the drop-down
menu, then enter the desired range of cell addresses.
Notes: Valid cell addresses are shown in bold next to the second text entry box. Refer to
“Library Elements and Diagrams” on page D-88 for cell address locations.
Enter the starting cell address in the first box and the ending cell address in the
second box.
If your entry exceeds the available slots, an error message appears. Acknowledge
the message and reenter the cell range.
12. When you are finished, click the Add button.
13. The new partition appears in the Slots in Use section, but will not have a
partition number until a drive is assigned to the partition.
Notes: If you wish to change your entry, enter the new cell range and click the Change
button.
You can add up to 10 slot ranges in each partition in this manner.
14. To enter additional cell ranges, return to step 11.

15. Click the Edit Drives for New Partition button.

Note: You must assign at least one drive to the partition.

16. The Edit Drives for New Partition screen appears.

Note: The Drives in Use list shows mapping information for each drive in
the library. Drives mapped to a partition show the partition number in the
Partition column. Since no drives have been assigned, the figure below
shows Unused for all drives.
The Valid Drives list shows all discovered drives.
17. In the Add Drives line:

a. Select the desired library from the drop-down menu (Lib 0 or Lib 1).
b. Enter the desired range of drives. Valid drives are shown in bold next the second
text entry box.
Notes: Enter the starting drive number in the first box and the ending drive number in
the second box. To enter only one drive, enter the same drive number in both
boxes.
If your entry exceeds the available slots, an error message appears. Acknowledge
the message and reenter the cell range.

18. When finished, click the Add button.

19. The Partition column updates with the New Partition for the assigned drive(s).
20. Click the Save Changes button.

21. The partition name appears in the PARTITIONING MENU and the Partition
column updates with the partition name for the assigned drives.
Note: Partition names are in the form STKSSSSSSNN, where STK represents
StorageTek, SSSSSS represents the serial number of the control module,
SN3300 router, or library; and NN represents the partition number. In this
example, the name of partition 2 for this control module would be
STKA02GRK02.

Assign CAP Slots to the Partition

22. Click the Edit CAPs for STKA02GRK01 button.

23. The Edit Cartridge Access Ports for STKA02GRK01 screen

appears.
Note: The Cartridge Access Ports in Use list shows CAP cell
mapping information.
Valid Cartridge Access Ports displays available CAP cells.
24. In the Add CAPs line:

a. Select the desired library from the drop-down list (Lib 0 or Lib 1)
b. Select the desired CAP (CAP A or CAP B)
c. Enter a range of CAP cells in the text entry boxes. Valid cells are shown in bold
next the second text entry box.
Note: Enter the starting CAP cell address in the first box and the ending CAP cell
address in the second box. To enter only one cell, enter the same cell address
in both boxes.
If your entry exceeds the available cells, an error message appears.

Acknowledge the message and reenter your cell address range.


26. The Cartridge Access Ports In Use list updates with assigned CAP
cells and partition number.
a. If you need to make a correction, enter it on the CAPs: line and then click the
Change button.
b. If your entries are correct, click the Save Changes button.

27. To view the saved partition information, click the partition number in the MAIN
MENU.

28. The Partition Information screen appears, showing the current partition
configuration.
29. To add another partition, click Add Partition at the bottom of the MAIN
MENU.

Add a Partition
This procedure shows how to add a partition after the first one has been created. You can
create up to six partitions.
cable. If a crossover cable is not available, connect to the serial port with a serial
cable.
Note: If you are adding a partition on an L1400M library with SN3300 firmware 5.6.43,
or higher; the SN3300 Fibre Channel Router is displayed in the graphic at the
top of the screen. In addition, the PLATFORM area on the home. page shows
SN3300 information. All other portions of the following screens are identical.

3. In the MAIN MENU, click Partitioning.

4. The network password dialog box appears.

Note: If you are already logged into the control module, the Partitioning menu appears
instead of the network password dialog box, go to step 6.

User Name: root
Password: password

6. The Partitioning menu appears. Click Add Partition in the PARTITIONING

MENU.

7. The Edit New Partition screen appears.

Note: The Slots In Use list displays slots that have been mapped for
Library 0, and Library 1 (if an L1400P1 is connected with a pass-thru port).
Since we are configuring the first partition, Unused is displayed in the
Partition column for both libraries in the figure below.
Lib 0 is the L1400M/L1400M1 library and Lib 1 is the L1400P1 library.

The Valid Slots list shows the slots that have been discovered for
Library 0 (and Library 1 if an L1400P1 is connected with a pass-thru port).
8. In the Add Slots line, select the desired library (Lib 0 or Lib 1) from the drop-down
menu, then enter the desired range of cell addresses.
Note: Valid cell addresses are shown in bold next to the second text entry box.
Refer to “Library Elements and Diagrams” on page D-88 for cell address
locations. Enter the starting cell address in the first box and the ending cell
address in the second box.
If your entry exceeds the available slots, an error message appears.

Acknowledge the message and reenter the cell range.

9. When you are finished, click the Add button.

10. The new partition appears in the Slots in Use section, but will not have a
partition number until a drive is assigned to the partition.
Note: If you wish to change your entry, enter the new cell range and click the
Change button.
11. To enter additional cell ranges, return to step 7.

Note: You can add up to 10 slot ranges in each partition in this manner.

12. Click the Edit Drives for New Partition button.

Note: You must assign at least one drive to the partition.

13. The Edit Drives for New Partition screen appears.

Note: The Drives in Use list shows mapping information for each drive in
the library. Drives mapped to a partition show the partition number in the
Partition column. Since no drives have been assigned, the figure below
shows Unused for all drives.
The Valid Drives list shows all discovered drives.
14. In the Add Drives line:

b. Enter a range of cells in the text entry boxes. Valid cell addresses are shown in
bold next the second text entry box.
Note: Enter the starting drive number in the first box and the ending drive
number in the second box. To enter only one drive, enter the same drive
number in both boxes.
If your entry exceeds the available drives, an error message appears.

Acknowledge the message and reenter your drive range.


16. The Partition column updates with New Partition for the assigned
drive(s).
17. Click the Save Changes button.

18. The partition name appears in the PARTITIONING MENU and the Partition
column updates with the partition name for the assigned drives.
Note: Partition names are in the form STKSSSSSSNN, where STK represents
StorageTek, SSSSSS represents the serial number of the control module,
SN3300 router, or library; and NN represents the partition number. In this
example, the name of partition 2 for this control module would be
STKA02GRK02.

Assign CAP Slots to the Partition

19. Click the Edit CAPs for STKA02GRK02 button.

20. The Edit Cartridge Access Ports for STKA02GRK02 screen appears.
Note: The Cartridge Access Ports in Use list shows CAP cell
mapping information.
Valid Cartridge Access Ports displays available CAP cells.
21. In the Add CAPs line:

b. Select the desired CAP (CAP A or CAP B)
c. Enter a range of CAP cells in the text entry boxes. Valid cells are shown in bold
next the second text entry box.
Note: Enter the starting CAP cell address in the first box and the ending CAP
cell address in the second box. To enter only one cell, enter the same cell
address in both boxes.
If your entry exceeds the available cells, an error message appears.

Acknowledge the message and reenter your cell address range.


23. The Cartridge Access Ports In Use list updates with assigned CAP
cells and partition name.
a. If you need to make a correction, enter it on the CAPs line and then click the
Change button.
b. If your entries are correct, click the Save Changes button.
24. To add another partition, click Add Partition at the bottom of the
PARTITIONING MENU.

Delete a Partition
This procedure shows how to delete a partition.
cable. If a crossover cable is not available, connect to the serial port with a serial
cable.
Note: If you are deleting a partition on an L1400M library with SN3300 firmware
5.6.43, or higher; the SN3300 Fibre Channel Router is displayed in the
graphic at the top of the screen. In addition, the PLATFORM area on the
home. page shows SN3300 information. All other portions of the following
screens are identical.
3. In the MAIN MENU, click Partitioning.

4. The network password dialog box appears.

Note: If you are already logged into the control module, the Partitioning menu
appears instead of the network password dialog box, go to step 6.

User Name: root
Password: password

6. The Partitioning menu appears. In the PARTITIONING MENU, click the partition
you wish to delete.
7. The partition information screen for the selected partition appears. Click the
Delete Partition button.


Mapping
Use this procedure to fill the index map when partitions have NOT been enabled.
Use the mapping page (shown below) to view all available hosts with maps that have been
assigned to the port. Maps and hosts may be added, edited, or deleted.
Selecting the FC port displays mapping information for the port, including the name of
the port and the currently selected host and map. The following options are also
available:
• Add a new host or map by selecting the respective Add button.
• Select a previously set up host or map from the pull-down lists for Select Host
and Select Map.
Note: ‘7 (SCSI Initiator)’ hosts (where 7 is the ID of the host that scanned the bus
on the FC side) cannot be deleted. Maps named ‘Indexed’, ‘Auto Assigned’,
or ‘SCC’ cannot be deleted or renamed.

• Delete the currently selected host or map by selecting the respective Delete
button.
• View or Edit the currently selected host or map by selecting the respective Edit/
View button.
• Clone (via the Clone Map button) the currently selected map and set up the name
of the new cloned map. This option makes it easier to setup new maps with similar
information to previously created maps. SCC and Auto Assigned maps cannot be
cloned.
The following figure shows the dialog box that appears for the FC Port when the
Select Host Edit/View button is selected.
The current host information is shown at the top of the dialog box. This information can
be changed in the Modify FC Host section.
• New or updated information can be typed into the field boxes for
Host Name, Host Id (in Hex), Port WWN Hi (in Hex),
Port WWN Lo (in Hex), Node WWN Hi (in Hex), or
Node WWN Lo (in Hex).
• The Map Name can be selected from the drop-down list.
• To make the changes permanent, click the Modify button.
Note: Host settings are saved to memory when the Modify button is selected.

The following figure shows the dialog box that appears for the FC Port when the
Select Map Edit/View button is selected.
The current map information is shown at the top of the dialog box. This information can
be changed as described below.
• To completely clear the current map of all entries, click the Clear Map button.
• To fill the map, select the fill option from the pull-down list and then click the Fill
Map button. When the map is filled, the menu shows the current mappings.
• To delete a specific map entry, select a LUN from the pull-down list under Delete
Map Item. To delete multiple LUNs, also select the end of the range from the
optional pull-down list. Either way, click the Delete Entry button to remove the
item(s) from the map.
• To delete all gaps, or unfilled entries, from this map, click the Remove Gaps
button. When removing gaps from the table, this option also renumbers all LUNs in
sequential order starting with LUN 0.
Note: Some operating systems require gaps be removed in the mapping table in
order to detect all devices.
• To create a specific map item, the LUN, Protocol, Bus, and Device can be selected
from the pull-down lists for either Discovered Device Entry or Manual Device
Entry. Discovered Device Entry is limited to devices already discovered. Manual

Device Entry allows you to manually set up a device type at a specific Target and
LUN. To make the changes permanent, click the Create Entry button.
Note: Maps named Auto Assigned or SCC may not be modified, cleared, filled, or
have entries removed.
Map settings are saved to memory when any of the buttons within the page are
selected.

Configuring Library Aggregation

Enable Library Aggregation (L1400M1 Library, or L1400M Library
with SN3300 firmware version 5.6.43, or higher)
Note: If you are enabling library aggregation on an SN3300 router, you must enable
Continuous Capacity before enabling library aggregation (see “Enable
Continuous Capacity (L1400M Only)” on page D-13).
Use the following procedure to enable library aggregation:
Ethernet port:
Serial port:
method.
2. Verify power is applied to the library and the module/router.

3. Telnet to the router using the module’s/router’s IP address (1.1.1.1 default for
new router).
C:\>telnet 1.1.1.1
4. The configuration login appears. Logon to the module/router using the login and
password shown.
Password: password


Note: On the L1400M1 library, the top two lines of the main menu will display
control module information instead of SN3300 information.
StorageTek SN 3300
5.6.43 A01MXE 903000806867
06/08/2005 08:44:04
2) System Utilities
4) Reboot
5) Download a New Revision of The Firmware

Command > 1
6. The Configuration Menu appears. Type 3 and press Enter.

Configuration Menu
5.6.43 A01MXE 903000806867
06/08/2005 08:44:06
1) Baud Rate Configuration

2) Ethernet and SNMP Configuration
3) Fibre Channel Configuration
4) Parallel SCSI Configuration
5) Device Mapping
6) Trace and Event Settings Configuration
7) Real-Time Clock Configuration
8) Active Fabric Configuration
A) Save Configuration
B) Restore Last Saved Configuration
C) Reset to Factory Defaults
X) Return to main menu

Command > 3

7. The Fibre Channel Configuration Menu appears. Type 9 and press

Enter.
Fibre Channel Configuration Menu
5.6.43 A01MXE 903000806867
06/08/2005 08:44:11
Current Fibre Channel Configuration - Port 0
FC Link Status : DOWN

Node Name : 0x100000E0 0202844F
Port Name : 0x100000E0 0222844F
Port Mode : AutoSense, Soft AL_PA
Discovery Mode : Manual Discovery Only
Buffered Tape Writes : Enabled, Queue Depth = 1
Current Default Map : 'Indexed'
Port Speed : 1 GigaBit
1) Change World Wide Name High 2) Change World Wide Name Low
3) Toggle Port Mode 4) Change ALPA Value
5) Toggle Discovery Mode 6) Toggle Buffered Tape Writes
7) Change Buffered Tape Queue Depth 8) Change Default Map Value
9) Edit FC Override Settings
A) Toggle Port Speed
Command > 9

8. The Fibre Channel Override Configuration Menu appears. Type 9 and press Enter.
5.6.43 A01MXE 903000806867
06/08/2005 08:44:15


9) Dual Library Aggregation
Command > 9
9. The following message appears. Enter the following access code and press Enter.
4LKP355NVXZPLWN2LQD69NPNB
Enter Access Code to Enable Dual Library Aggregation
>
10. The following message appears. Press any key to continue.

Enabling Dual Library Aggregation.
Please Reboot your Router for changes to take effect

11. When the following menus appear, press the key listed to continue.
Menu Key
Fibre Channel Override Configuration Menu>X
Fibre Channel Configuration Menu >X
Configuration Menu >A
A Saving Configuration message appears,
then the Configuration Menu reappears.
Configuration Menu >X
Main menu >4
When the reboot message appears, type y, then press Enter.
12. After reboot, the main menu appears. Type 6 then press Enter.
StorageTek SN 3300
5.6.43 A01MXE 903000806867
06/08/2005 08:46:02
2) System Utilities
4) Reboot

Command > 6
13. The Advanced Software Licenses Menu appears. Type 3 and press
Enter.
Advanced Software Licenses Menu
5.6.43 A01MXE 903000806867
06/08/2005 08:46:19
1) Add License Key

2) Disable License Key
3) Display Status of Advanced Licensed Features
Command > 3

14. A list of Advanced Licensed Features and their status appears. Verify that
Library Aggregation is enabled, then press any key to continue.
Advanced Licensed Features
5.6.43 A01MXE 903000806867
06/08/2005 08:46:22
Feature State
300 Slot Capacity The Feature is Not Enabled

Capacity on Demand The Feature is Enabled
Library Partitioning The Feature is Enabled
Library Aggregation The Feature is Enabled
15. The Advanced Software Licenses Menu appears. Type X and press
Enter.
5.6.43 A01MXE 903000806867
06/08/2005 08:46:19
1) Add License Key

Command > X

16. The main menu appears. Disconnect your PC from the Ethernet port, if necessary.
StorageTek SN 3300
5.6.43 A01MXE 903000806867
06/08/2005 08:46:02
2) System Utilities
4) Reboot

Command >

Disable Library Aggregation (L1400M1 Library or L1400M Library

with SN3300 firmware version 5.6.43, or higher)
Use the following procedure to disable library aggregation:
Ethernet port:
Serial port:
method.
2. Verify power is applied to the library and the router.

3. Telnet to the router using the router’s IP address (1.1.1.1 default for new router):
C:\>telnet 1.1.1.1
4. The configuration login appears. Logon to the router using the login and password
shown:
Password: password


Note: On the L1400M1 library, the top two lines of the main menu will display
control module information instead of SN3300 information.
StorageTek SN 3300
5.6.43 A01MXE 903000806867
06/08/2005 08:46:02
2) System Utilities
4) Reboot

Command > 6
6. The Fibre Channel Configuration Menu appears. Type 9 and press Enter.
5.6.43 A01MXE 903000806867
06/08/2005 08:44:15


9) Dual Library Aggregation
Command > 9

7. The following message appears. Type the library aggregation disable key and press
Enter.
Library aggregation disable key: BVSCYXSQUWBEGBESBCIUFWWKD
Enter License Key > BVSCYXSQUWBEGBESBCIUFWWKD
8. The following message appears. Type y and press Enter.

Are you sure you want to disable this key (y/n)? y
9. The following message appears. Press any key to continue.

The License Key has been successfully disabled
Please Reboot your router to enable the changes
Press any key to continue >
10. When the following menus appear, press the key listed then press Enter to continue.
Menu Key
Fibre Channel Override Configuration Menu>X
Fibre Channel Configuration Menu >X
Configuration Menu >A
A Saving Configuration message appears,
then the Configuration Menu reappears.
Configuration Menu >X
Main menu >4
When the reboot message appears, type y, then press Enter.
11. After reboot, the main menu appears. Type 6 then press Enter.
StorageTek SN 3300
5.6.43 A01MXE 903000806867
06/08/2005 08:46:02
2) System Utilities
4) Reboot

Command > 6

12. The Advanced Software Licenses Menu appears. Type 3 and press
Enter.
5.6.43 A01MXE 903000806867
06/08/2005 08:46:19
1) Add License Key

Command > 3
13. A list of Advanced Licensed Features and their status appears. Verify that
Library Aggregation is enabled, then press any key to continue.
Advanced Licensed Features
5.6.43 A01MXE 903000806867
06/08/2005 08:46:22
Feature State

Capacity on Demand The Feature is Enabled
Library Partitioning The Feature is Enabled
Library Aggregation The Feature is Not Enabled

14. The Advanced Software Licenses Menu appears. Type X and press
Enter.
5.6.43 A01MXE 903000806867
06/08/2005 08:46:19
1) Add License Key

Command > X
15. The main menu appears.

StorageTek SN 3300
5.6.43 A01MXE 903000806867
06/08/2005 08:46:02
2) System Utilities
4) Reboot

Command >
16. Disconnect your PC from the Ethernet port, if necessary.

Library Elements and Diagrams
■ Library Elements and Diagrams

L1400M Library with SN3300 Firmware Version 5.6.10
Figure D-6 on page D-89 through Figure D-7 on page D-90 identify library elements for
the L1400M library with SN3300 firmware version 5.6.10.
These wall diagrams show the SCSI element locations for all cell locations. The locations
are noted at the top of the columns in hexadecimal (denoted by the “h” at the end of the
number) and decimal.

Figure D-6. L1400M Library Elements (One Drive Column, No PTP)
1. Initial 200 slots 4. 401-500 slots 7. CAPs (B optional)
2. 201-300 slots 5. 501-600 slots 8. Reserved (cleaning/diagnostic
3. 301-400 slots 6. 601-700 (678) slots
Note: This cell map applies to the L1400M library with SN3300 firmware version 5.6.10 only.
Figure D-7. L1400M Library Elements (Two Drive Columns, No PTP)
1. Initial 200 slots 4. 401-500 slots 7. CAPs (B optional)
2. 201-300 slots 5. 501-600 slots 8. Reserved (cleaning/diagnostic
3. 301-400 slots 6. 601-700 (678) slots
Note: This cell map applies to the L1400M library with SN3300 firmware version 5.6.10 only.
L1400M Library with SN3300 Firmware Version 5.6.43, or higher;

L1400M1 library, or L1400P1 Library
Figure D-8 on page D-92 through Figure D-12 on page D-96 identify library elements
for the following libraries:
• L1400M library with SN3300 firmware version 5.6.43, or higher
• L1400M1 library
• L1400P1 library.
These wall diagrams show the SCSI element locations for all cell locations. The locations
are noted at the top of the columns in hexadecimal (denoted by the “h” at the end of the
number) and decimal.

D-92
Figure D-8. L1400M/L1400M1, One Drive Column (No PTP)

Note:
1.

CAPs (B optional) COLUMNS COLUMNS DOOR COLUMNS COLUMNS
This cell map applies to the L1400M library when SN3300 firmware version is 5.6.43, or higher.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 0 1 2 3 4
Ah
ROWS 1384 1426 1468 1510 1552 1594 1636 1000 1012 1024 1066 1108
CAP A
1174 1216 1258 1300 1342
0
1 1
6
12 3F3h 3FFh
1011 1023
Revision AA
18
2.
Reserved (cleaning/diagnostic)
24 1Dh
29
47Eh 48Ah
1150 1162
30
36 2
DRIVE
41 COLUMN 0
591h 5BBh 5E5h 60Fh 639h 663h 68Dh 429h 453h 47Dh RESERVED 489h 495h 4BFh 4E9h 513h 530h 567h
CELLS
1425 1467 1509 1551 1593 1635 1677 1065 1107 1149 1161 1173 1215 1257 1299 1341 1383
95843
C65495
95843
Figure D-9. L1400M/L1400M1, Two Drive Columns (No PTP)

Note:
1.
CAPs (B optional)
This cell map applies to the L1400M library when SN3300 firmware version is 5.6.43, or higher. PANEL 3 PANEL 0 PANEL 1 PANEL 2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 0 1 2 3 4
Ah
ROWS 1384 1426 1468 1510 1552 1594 1636 1000 1012 1024 1066 1108 1174 1216 1258 1300 1342
CAP A
0
1 1
6
12 3F3h 3FFh 40Bh 417h

1011 1023 1035 1047
Revision AA
18
2.
24 1Dh
29
47Eh 48Ah
1150 1162
30

36 2
41
591h 5BBh 5E5h 60Fh 639h 663h 68Dh DRIVE DRIVE 47Dh RESERVED 489h 495h 4BFh 4E9h 513h 530h 567h
CELLS
1425 1467 1509 1551 1593 1635 1677 COLUMN 0 COLUMN 1 1149 1161 1173 1215 1257 1299 1341 1383
C65496
D-93
D-94
Figure D-10. L1400M/L1400M1/L1400P1, One Drive Column (With PTP)

Note:
1.

CAPs (B optional)
This cell map applies to the L1400M library when SN3300 firmware version is 5.6.43, or higher.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 0 1 2 3 4
Ah
52Ch 556h 580h 5AAh 5D4h 5FEh 628h 3E8h 3F4h 400h 40Ch 418h 10 45Ah 484h 4AEh 4D8h 502h
ROWS 1324 1366 1408 1450 1492 1534 1576 1000 1012 1024 1036 1048 CAP A 1114 1156 1198 1240 1282
0
1 1 3
6
2.
12 3F3h 3FFh 40Bh

1011 1023 1035
Revision AA
18
24 1Dh
29
442h 44Eh
1090 1102
3.
30
PTP
36 2
41
555h 57Fh 5A9h 5D3h 5FDh 627h 651h DRIVE 441h RESERVED 44Dh 459h 483h 4ADh 4D7h 501h 52Bh
1365 1407 1449 1491 1533 1575 1617 COLUMN 0 1089 CELLS 1101 1113 1155 1197 1239 1281 1323
C65497
95843
Figure D-11. L1400M/L1400M1/L1400P1, Two Drive Columns (With PTP)
3
1
1
2
1047
417h
COLUMN 1
DRIVE
40Bh
1035
COLUMN 0
1023
3FFh
DRIVE
1011
3F3h
1. CAPs (B optional) 2. Reserved (cleaning/diagnostic) 3. PTP
Note: This cell map applies to the L1400M library when SN3300 firmware version is 5.6.43, or higher.
Figure D-12. L1400M/L1400M1/L1400P1, One Drive Column (with CAP B and PTP)
3
1
CAP B
2
40Bh
1035
COLUMN 0
1023
3FFh
DRIVE
1011
3F3h
1. CAPs 2. Reserved (cleaning/diagnostic) 3. PTP
Note: This cell map applies to the L1400M library when SN3300 firmware version is 5.6.43, or higher.
StorageTek L-Series Library Admin
■ StorageTek L-Series Library Admin

StorageTek L-Series Library Admin is standard with the L1400M Tape Library. Refer to
Appendix C, “StorageTek L-Series Library Admin” for system requirements, installation
instructions, and other information.
■ StorageTek Backup Resource Monitor

StorageTek Backup Resource Monitor (BRM) is an optional software solution that
simplifies the complexity and management of the backup environment through
centralized visualization of backup applications, fabric switches, and tape libraries.
BRM’s web browser-based graphical user interface provides complete visibility of backup
operational information at a summary or detailed level including job statistics, policies,
schedules, event codes, media statistics, fabric configuration, and tape library utilization.
BRM provides robust backup application support for Veritas NetBackup, Legato
NetWorker, and IBM Tivoli Storage Manager. BRM supports fabric switches from
Brocade and McData, and provides comprehensive reporting on StorageTek L-series and
ACSLS attached tape libraries.
BRM automatically collects vital information about the backup environment, and stores
it in an open, industry-standard MS-SQL database, facilitating historical trending and
capacity forecasting functions.
Key features of BRM are:

• Comprehensive, automated, and secure data collection
• Centralized web-based graphical user interface
• Asset Management and Tracking
• Detailed Backup and Restore Reports
• Backup Storage Area Network Topology Visualization
• Backup Exception Reports
• Library Media Inventory Listing
• Media Trending and Forecasting
• Fabric Switch Configuration and Port Status
• Tape Library Configuration, Utilization, and Events
• Backup Media Search Functions
For installation and operating instructions, refer to the StorageTek Backup Resource Monitor
User Guide at
https://www.support.storagetek.com/globalnavigation/support/customer/
default.htm

StorageTek Backup Resource Monitor
Software Specifications
Installation:
Backup Resource Monitor software is customer installable. Typical installation time is less
than one hour. Support for heterogeneous servers, HBAs, databases, logical volume
managers, file systems, file-specifications
Operating Environment:
Server - software requirements:
• Windows 2000 Server, Service Pack 2+
• Microsoft IIS 5.0+
• Microsoft SQL Server 2000 or MSDE
• Backup Resource Monitor software requires an MS-SQL Server 2000 database. If no
database is detected, Backup Resource Monitor software will install a database during
installation
Client server - software requirements:
• Windows NT, 2000, XP
• Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5+
• Server - hardware requirements:
• 2 x 850 MHz CPU
• 1 GB RAM
• 18 GB available disk space
• StorageTek recommends installing Backup Resource Monitor software on a
dedicated server for maximum performance.
• Hardware requirements may vary depending on the size of the backup environment
Tape library prerequisites
• Connection from Backup Resource Monitor software server to library
• Version 2.0 + of SNMP MIB
• L-Series tape library personality module installed
• SNMP services enabled on the library

Glossary
A-B-C-D-E-F-G-H-I-J-K-L-M-N audit 1) 1) An operation to catalog or record the

-O-P-Q-R-S-T-U-V-W-X-Y-Z physical location of a cartridge tape in an
automated library (2) A process by which a
This glossary defines terms and abbreviations used specified volume serial number location in the tape
in this publication. inventory is physically verified.
Some of the definitions are taken from other Automated Cartridge System Library Software
glossaries. The letters in the parentheses that (ACSLS) The software within a UNIX-based
follow some definitions indicate the source of the server that interfaces the server and hosts; it also
definition: maintains a list of all tapes within a library storage
(A) The American National Standard Dictionary for module.
Information Systems, ANSI X3.172-1990, copyright automatic mode (1) A relationship between a
1990 by the American National Standards Institute library and all attached hosts. A library operating in
(ANSI). automatic mode handles cartridges without
(E) The ANSI/Electronic Industries Association operator intervention. This is the normal operating
(EIA) Standard-440-A, Fiber Optic Terminology. mode of a library that has been placed online to all
host central processing units. (2) A relationship
(I) The Information Technology Vocabulary, developed between a library and the client. In automated
by Subcommittee 1, Joint Technical Committee 1, mode, the robot moves the cartridges among the
of the International Organization for storage cells, CAP, and drives in response to client
Standardization and International Electrotechnical commands. This is the normal operating mode of
Commission (ISO/IEC/JTC1/SC1). a library that is communicating with the client.
(IBM) The IBM Dictionary of Computing, copyright
1994 by IBM. B
(T) Draft international standards committee backward read compatible (BRC) The ability
drafts, and working papers being developed by the of an SDLT 220 tape drive to read recorded data
ISO/IEC/JTC1/SC1. from an earlier version of DLT tape drive. Contrast
with “NBRC” (below).
A
acknowledgement (ack) A message sent by the
C
receiver of a communication, acknowledging its camera A system that reads volume serial number
receipt. labels on cartridges, instead of scanning the labels
Advanced Interactive Executive (AIX) IBM’s with a laser. A camera performs faster and more
implementation of the UNIX (trademark of accurately than a laser scanner.
AT&T Bell Laboratories) operating system. The CAP See cartridge access port.
RISC System/6000 system, among others, runs the
AIX operating system. (IBM). cartridge 1) A storage device that consists of
magnetic tape on supply and take-up reels, in a
American Power Conversion (APC) The protective housing. (IBM) (2) A container that
supplier for the L700 uninterruptible power source holds magnetic tape on a supply reel and is
(UPS). inserted into a drive for read and write operations.
95843 Revision AA Glossary-1

Glossary
In the 9840/T9840, the cartridge has both the customer services engineer (CSE) A service
supply and take-up reels. In the T9940, the representative who supports and services
cartridge has only a single supply reel with the customer’s products.
take-up mechanism residing in the drive.
CSE port A port on the MPC/MPCL card for
cartridge access port (CAP) (1) In a StorageTek loading 3.00 or later firmware.
library, a mail slot through which an operator feeds
tape cartridges into and retrieves tape cartridges
from a library. (2) A device in the library that
D
allows an operator to insert or remove cartridges daisy chain (1) A method of device
during library operations. (3) A storage device that interconnection for determining interrupt priority
allows an operator to insert or remove cartridges by connecting the interrupt sources serially. (2) A
during automated library operations. device interconnection cable.
cartridge drive The unit that houses the diagnostic programs Automated offline tests
magnetic-tape transports and controllers that store that a service representative uses to evaluate and
and retrieve data for the host system in a cartridge troubleshoot equipment.
subsystem.
diagnostic tests See diagnostic programs.
cartridge tape A composite of the plastic
housing and the magnetic tape. Direct Memory Access (DMA) An operation in
which the electronics bypass the microprocessor
catalog (1) The inventory of all cartridge tape and directly access the memory.
storage locations in a library; this inventory is by
library number, panel, row, column. (2) A stored domain (1) A shared user authorization database
list of backed up files and directories and the which contains users, groups, and their security
locations of the backup copies. policies. (2) A set of interconnected network
elements and addresses that are administered
CCITT Consultative Committee for International together and that may communicate.
Telephone and Telegraph.
Domain Name Service (DNS) A service that
cell (1) A slot in the library in which a cartridge is translates domain names into IP addresses.
stored. (2) The location in which a cartridge is Because domain names are alphabetic, they are
stored in a library. (3) A place in which a cartridge easier to remember than IP addresses.
resides in a library. (4) The location in the library in
which a cartridge is stored. drive (1) A device for moving magnetic tape and
controlling its movement. (IBM) (2) A device for
command line interface (CLI) For firmware moving tape and controlling its movement. (T) (3)
2.20 and lower—the SER1 port on the MPC card. A device that moves magnetic tape and includes
For firmware 3.00 or later, the CSE port on the the mechanisms for reading and writing data on
MPC/MPCL card. For MPB firmware only, the the tape. (3) An electromechanical device that
CSE port on the Master library’s door frame. moves magnetic tape and includes the mechanisms
configuration (config) (1) The manner in which for writing and reading data to and from the tape.
the hardware and software of an information See also tape drive.
processing system is organized and interconnected. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(T) (2) The physical description of a library listing (DHCP) (1) Server software that automatically
the panel types, cartridge capacity, type of host sets the library IP address, subnet mask, and name.
connection, and number of drives. (2) Server software that automatically sets IP
address, net mask, and gateway. (IBM)
Glossary-2 Revision AA 95843

Glossary
Dynamic Worldwide Name (dWWN) A event examination A file, accessible through the
feature that applies dynamic names to network operator panel, that contains events that occurred
devices rather than fixed names. When a dWWN- during the functional operation of the tape library.
named device is replaced, it is assigned the same
WWN as the one it replaced, preventing re-
configuration of the network.
F
Fabric (1) The Fibre Channel topology similar to
E a telephone switch in that the initiator of a call to
the receiving port simply provides the receiver
electronically erasable programmable read- with the port address, and the fabric routes the
only memory (EEPROM) A nonvolatile transmission to the correct port. A fabric differs
sequential access memory device that can be from a point-to-point or arbitrated loop topology
written onto when a change of contents is in that it provides for interconnections between
required. ports without having a point-to-point connection.
The fabric also serves as a media-type converter.
electrostatic discharge (ESD) An undesirable (2) The hardware that connects workstations and
discharge of an accumulated electrical charge servers to storage devices in a SAN. A fabric
(static) that can severely damage delicate enables any-server-to-any-storage device
components and degrade electrical circuitry. connectivity using a Fibre Channel switch.
Enterprise Systems Connection (ESCON) (1) Fabric login The process by which a Fibre
An IBM-patented set of products and services that Channel node establishes a logical connection to a
provide a dynamically connected environment, fabric switch.
over fiber-optic cable, within a mainframe or client
server enterprise. (2) A set of IBM products and fault symptom code (FSC) A four-character
services that provide a dynamically-connected hexadecimal code generated in response to an
environment within an enterprise. (IBM). error to help isolate failures within the device.
Ethernet (1) A local area network (LAN) fiber Any filament made of dielectric material that
architecture developed by Xerox Corporation. The guides light, regardless of its ability to send
Ethernet specification served as the basis for the signals.
IEEE 802.3 standard, which is one of the most
widely implemented LAN standards. (2) A 10 Mb/ fiber-optic cable (1) A jacketed cable of thin
s baseband local area network that allows multiple strands of glass that carries pulses of light that
stations to access the transmission medium at will transmit data for high-speed transmissions over
without prior coordination, avoids contention by medium to long distances. The cable can be single
using carrier sense and deference, and resolves mode, which carries a single signal from a laser or
contention by using collision detection and light-emitting diode light source, or multimode,
transmission. Ethernet uses carrier sense multiple which carries multiple signals from either light
access with collision detection. (IBM) (3) A source. (2) A technology that uses glass (or plastic)
trademark for a local area network (LAN) threads (fibers) to transmit data. A fiber optic cable
protocol. (4) A type of networking technology for consists of a bundle of glass threads, each of which
local area networks that uses coaxial cable to carry is capable of transmitting messages modulated
signals between computers at a rate of 10 Mb/s. onto light waves. Fiber-optic cables have several
advantages over traditional metal cables, such as:
Ethernet address A six-byte address that makes greater bandwidth, less susceptible to interference,
a library accessible to a network. See also Ethernet, thinner and lighter than metal cables, and they can
Internet Protocol (IP) address, library name, and transmit data digitally rather than analogically. (3)
subnet mask. A jacketed cable of thin strands of glass that carries

Glossary
pulses of light; these pulses transmit data for high- field replaceable unit (FRU) An assembly that
speed transmissions over medium to long is replaced in its entirety when any one of its
distances. The cable can be single mode, which components fails. (IBM)
carries a single signal from a laser or light-emitting
diode light source, or multimode, which carries
multiple signals from either light source.
G
Fibre Channel (FC) (1) The National Gateway A 32-bit, or 4-byte number, in doted
Committee for Information Technology Standards decimal format (typically written as four numbers
standard that defines an ultra high-speed, content- separated by periods, such as 107.4.1.3 or
independent, multilevel data transmission interface 84.2.1.111) that is applied to an IP Address to
that supports multiple protocols simultaneously. identify router interface.
Fibre Channel supports connectivity to millions of
devices over copper and/or fiber-optic physical H
media and provides the best characteristics of both
networks and channels over diverse topologies. (2) hand-camera assembly (1) A part of the library
The standard from the National Committee for robot whose function is grasping cartridge tapes
Information Technology Standards that defines an and moving them between storage cells and tape
ultra high-speed, content-independent, multilevel drives. The camera reads cartridge volume serial
data transmission interface that supports multiple numbers during library audits and normal
protocols simultaneously. Fibre Channel supports operation. (2) A part of the library robot whose
connectivity to millions of devices over copper function is grasping cartridges and moving them
and/or fiber-optic physical media and provides the among the cartridge access port, the storage cells,
best characteristics of both networks and channels and the drives. The camera reads the volume serial
over diverse topologies. number labels during library audits.
Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop (FC_AL) (1) Hardware Support Services (HSS). The
An arrangement of Fibre Channel stations such remote diagnostic center at StorageTek. Hardware
that messages pass from one to the next in a ring. support services engineers (HSSEs) can access and
(2) One of three Fibre Channel topologies where 2 test StorageTek equipment and software, through
to 126 devices interconnect serially in a single-loop telecommunications lines, from certain remote
circuit. customer installations. Previously referred to as the
remote diagnostic center (RDC) or the Customer
Fibre Channel protocol The mapping of SCSI-3 Support Remote Center (CSRC).
commands over a Fibre Channel interface.
HBA See host bus adapter.
fibre connection (FICON) An ESA/390 and
zSeries computer peripheral interface. The I/O host bus adapter (HBA) (1) A circuit installed in
interface uses ES/390 and zSeries FICON a multi-platform host or device that interfaces
protocols (FC-FS and FC-SB-2) over a Fibre between the device and the bus. (2) An I/O
Channel serial interface that configures units adapter that sits between the host and the interface
attached to a FICON-supported Fibre Channel that manages the transfer of information between
communications fabric. the host and the device. To minimize the impact
on host processor performance, the host bus
firmware An ordered set of instructions and data adapter performs many low-level interface
stored in a way that is functionally independent of functions automatically or with minimal processor
main storage; for example, microprograms stored involvement.
in a ROM. (T) See also microcode. (2) See
microcode. hub A Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop switching
device that allows multiple servers and targets,

Glossary
such as storage systems, to connect at a central recover these cartridges to a known location to
point. A single hub configuration appears as a clear out the software in-transit record.
single loop.
in-transit record A temporary record written by
the host software, noting that a cartridge has been
I moved from its home cell. After this cartridge
returns to its home cell, the record erases.
initial program load (IPL) (1) A process that
activates a machine reset and loads system
programs to prepare a computer system for K
operation. Processors having diagnostic programs
activate these programs at initial program load kernel (1) A section of code that handles the
execution. Devices running firmware usually multitasking within the library storage module
reload the functional firmware from a diskette or (LSM). It is responsible for intertask
disk drive at initial program load execution. (2) The communication and is the heart of the operating
initialization procedure that causes an operating system for the LSM. (2) The central module of an
system to commence operation. operating system. It is the part of the operating
system that loads first, and it remains in main
initialization (1) The startup and initial memory. (3) The essential part of UNIX or other
configuration of a device, system, piece of operating systems, responsible for resource
software, or network. (2) The operations required allocation, low-level hardware interfaces, and
for setting a device to a starting state, before the security (4) An essential subset of a programming
use of a data medium, or before implementation of language, in terms of which other constructs are
a process. (T) (or could be) defined. Also known as a core
language.
Internet Protocol (IP) A stacked set of
protocols, developed by the United States
Department of Defense, to facilitate L
communication between dissimilar computers over
networks. lb An abbreviation for pound.
Internet Protocol (IP) address (1) A four-byte library name An assigned name that maps to the
value that identifies a device and makes it Internet Protocol (IP) address for a library. See also
accessible through a network. The format of an IP Ethernet address, Internet Protocol (IP) address,
address is a 32-bit numeric address written as four subnet mask.
numbers separated by periods. Each number can Linear Tape-Open (LTO) (1) A technology
be from zero to 255. For example, 129.80.145.23 developed jointly by HP, IBM, and Certance for
could be an IP address. See also Ethernet address, new tape storage options. LTO technology is an
library name, subnet mask. open format, which means that users have multiple
(2) A four-byte value that identifies a library and sources of products and media. The open nature
makes it accessible through a network. IP of LTO technology also provides a means of
addresses are logically divided into two parts: the enabling compatibility between different vendors’
network (similar to a telephone area code), and the offerings. (2) An open specification for tape
system on the network (similar to a phone storage devices.
number). See also Ethernet address, library name,
subnet mask.
M
in-transit cartridges Cartridges left in the robot
hand. The Data Management Software must magazine (1) A container that holds cartridges in
the cells provided and is inserted into the CAP. (2)

Glossary
A removable container that holds cartridges and is Mode Sense command The command used in
placed into the cartridge access port (CAP). Fibre Channel that returns the current operating
modes and parameters of a device to the host. The
machine activated routing switch (MARS) An Mode Sense command also returns the default
electronic switching mechanism built by Giltronix parameters or information in which fields and bits
that either the Customer Service Remote Center or can be changed using the Mode Select command.
the machine can activate to select a port for
communications. modulator/demodulator (modem) An
electronic device that converts computer digital
manual mode (1) A relationship between a data to analog data for transmission over a
library and all attached hosts. Libraries operating in telecommunications line (telephone line). At the
manual mode are placed offline to and do not receiving end, the modem performs the reverse
communicate with all host central processing units function.
and require human assistance to perform cartridge
operations. (2) A relationship between a library and MPC card (1) The central processing unit card
the client. A library operating in manual mode for the tape library. (2) The main logic card in the
does not communicate with the client and requires library. (See Appendix A, “Library Elements and
human assistance to perform cartridge operations. Diagrams.”)
Manual mode occurs when the robot is unavailable
to the client. (3) A library operating mode in which MPCL card Replaces the MPC card in new
all clients are placed offline and requires human machines manufactured after 9/02. The MPCL
intervention to perform cartridge load and unload card function is identical to the MPC except that it
operations. (4) A relationship between a library and can be jumpered to operate on a native LVD/SE
all attached clients. Tape libraries operating in interface; there is no need to install the MPV and
manual mode have been placed offline to all client MPW cards for LVD operation.
CPUs and require human assistance to perform MPF card The DC power supply card for the
cartridge operations. tape library.
master (PTP) The library that powers the pass- MPK card An EEPROM-based module that
thru port. holds upgraded library feature data. See also
media format Format of data written on tape personality module.
(36-track, compressed, and so on). MPU card The Fibre expansion card for the tape
micro (µ) A prefix that means one one-millionth library.
(10-6). MPV card Acts as the backplane on the CPCI
assembly for either the fibre (MPU) interface card
microcode (1) A code, representing the (both MPC and MPCL cards) or the LVD (MPW)
instruction of an instruction set, that is interface card (MPC only).
implemented in a part of storage that is not
program-addressable. (IBM) See also firmware. (2) MPW card The LVD/SE card (attached to the
The lowest-level of instruction that directly MPV card) that enables LVD/SE operation for an
controls a microprocessor. See also firmware. MPC card only.
Mode Select command The command used in Multiple Virtual Storage (MVS) IBM’s Multiple
Fibre Channel that specifies operational Virtual Storage, consisting of MVS/System
parameters and options for a logical unit. The Product Version 1 and the MVS/370 Data Facility
Mode Select command shows the fields to be Product operating on a System/370 processor.
changed and the default values for these fields. (IBM)

Glossary
N P
negative acknowledgement (NACK) Used by pass-thru port (PTP) an automatic mechanism
the recipient of a communication to tell the sender that transfers cartridge tapes from one library to
that the data was not accurately received. another.
network gateway A four-byte notation that personality Synonymous with the MPK card,
makes the library accessible to a large network, which holds library upgrade feature data.
which consists of two or more subnets, through a
gateway connection. personality module (1) A small piece of
hardware, which connects to the library through a
network file system (NFS) A distributed file DB9 connector. The hardware can contain a small
system and its associated network protocol. amount of data. StorageTek uses this device to
enable features on the library and/or to store
non-backward read compatibility (NBRC) “personality” information like the vendor name.
The inability of an SDLT 220N tape drive to read (2) A connector key, which connects to the library
recorded data from an earlier version of DLT tape through a DB9 connector. The personality module
drive. Contrast with “BRC” (above). stores the library cell capacity information. A
non-maskable interrupt (NMI) An interrupt module or flash file that causes the operator panel
that cannot be shut off by executing a disable to display a vendor’s identification.
interrupt instruction on the microprocessor. These power distribution unit (PDU) A device for the
interrupts are principally reserved for fatal distribution of AC line power from one inlet to
conditions (for example, parity errors, watchdog multiple outlets. Multiple PDUs, in a rack-mount
timer faults). cabinet or deskside storage system, provide higher
non-volatile random access memory availability because the power continues if one
(NVRAM) A section of memory that will retain PDU (or its alternating current [AC] source if the
its information even when power is removed from PDUs use separate AC sources) loses power.
the equipment. PRX card The interconnecting card between the
MPC/MPCL card and the Z motor/hand logic.
O Z motor power and tachometer lines connect to
this card, along with signal lines to/from the hand.
offline Not available for functional use by the
host CPU. PRY card The interconnecting card between the
MPC/MPCL card and the theta motor/hand logic.
online State of being controlled directly by or in Theta motor power and tachometer lines connect
direct communication with a computer. Available to this card, along with signal lines to/from the
for functional use. hand.
open fiber control (OFC) Open Fiber Control
(OFC) cables incorporate a safety mechanism that Q
prevents damage to the human eye when the
connection (link) is disconnected. quiesce (1) Allowing all activity to complete
before any new activity is allowed to start. (2) To
oz An abbreviation for ounce. A unit of weight bring a device or an application to a state where all
equal to 28.35 grams. processing has been suspended and there are no
tasks in progress.

Glossary
R Fibre Channel Protocol (SCSI-3 FCP), chosen by

SCSI as its primary implementation of SCSI on
recoverable error Error condition that can be Fibre Channel. SCSI-3 FCP allows queuing of
automatically corrected (for example, by initiating commands from the initiator at the target, retains
a retry operation) and, when corrected, allows the half-duplex nature of the parallel SCSI-2, and
continual processing of a job, program, or permits a single operation, such as a READ
hardware function. command, to operator over a single port pair
between an initiator and a target.
reinitialize the library To cause the library to
rerun its start-up diagnostic routine and audit. SCSI bus (1) The interface connecting peripheral
During the start-up diagnostic routine, the library devices to a host operating system. (2) Any parallel,
calibrates its motors and vision. The audit loads multi-signal, I/O bus that implements some
into the MPC/MPCL card the location and version of the SCSI standard. A wide SCSI bus
volume serial number of every cartridge in the may connect up to16 initiators and targets. A
library. To reinitialize the library, the operator may narrow SCSI bus may connect up to 8 initiators
power it off and power it back on or open and and targets.
close the main library door.
SCSI commands The SCSI-3 Fibre Channel
remote center See Hardware Support Services. Protocol (FCP) commands issued by either the
initiator or target in an arbitrated loop topology to
request geometry (1) A host software request
perform a specific SCSI task. A direct
for the physical configuration of a library storage
correspondence exists between the SCSI task and
module. (2) A client software request for the
the Fibre Channel exchange. A Fibre Channel
physical configuration of the tape library.
exchange can correspond directly to either a single
RESET button Pressing this button starts an SCSI command or a group of linked SCSI
initial program load (IPL) of the library. commands.
reserved cells The cells in the library in which SCSI device A host adapter or control unit
only cleaning cartridges, diagnostic cartridges, or attached to the SCSI bus. Synonymous with target.
“swapped” data cartridges may reside. Only one of
SCSI ID The bit-significant representation of an
these cells is a swap cell.
address on the SCSI bus.
RISC Reduced Instruction Set Controller
SER1 For pre-3.00 firmware, the port on the
technology.
MPC/MPCL card used for command line
RISC System/6000 An IBM processor that can interface—running diagnostic tests, clearing of
be used as a server through a network. FSC log—through a laptop at 38,400 baud rate.
Unused for post-3.00 firmware.
robot (1) An electromechanical device that moves
cartridge tapes between storage cells and tape service required LED When on steadily, the
drives. (2) An electromechanical device that moves library is inoperative; when blinking, a fan is
cartridges among the cartridge access ports, the defective.
storage cells, and the drives. (3) Electromechanical
servo Device that uses closed-loop feedback to
device for locating and moving cartridges.
govern physical positioning.
small computer systems interface (SCSI) A
S
type of data or control interface between the tape
SCSI-3 The set of SCSI commands used library/ tape drives and a server or client.
specifically for Fibre Channel. SCSI-3 comes in a servo power interrupt (SPI) A signal that
Generic Packetized Protocol (SCSI-3 GPP) and removes voltage to a motor if overtravel is

Glossary
detected in the motor or a safety condition exists and common robotics control for SCSI-attached
(for example, the main access door to the library libraries and PTP operation.
storage module is open). When the sensor or
switch is made, the drive current to the motor Subnet mask A four-byte notation that resolves
disables and an error posts. The SPI prevents a routing within a network. (See IP address, Ethernet
servo runaway condition for an out-of-range address, and library name.)
motor; it also prevents motors from starting up swap cell The cell among the reserved cells into
while the access door is open. which the robot might temporarily place a
Simplified Network Management Protocol cartridge.
(SNMP) (A protocol for monitoring and
managing systems and devices in a network. T
small computer systems interface (SCSI) (1) A tape drive (1) A device for moving magnetic tape
local interface operating over a wide range of and controlling its movement. (IBM) (2) A device
transfer rates using a common command set for all for moving tape and controlling its movement. (T)
devices attached to the interface. It connects host (3) A device that moves magnetic tape and
computer systems to a variety of peripheral includes the mechanisms for reading and writing
devices. (2) An intelligent input and output bus data on the tape. (3) An electromechanical device
that provides a standard interface/protocol that moves magnetic tape and includes
between operating systems and peripheral devices. mechanisms for writing and reading data to and
(3) A collection of ANSI standards and proposed from the tape. See also drive.
standards which define I/O buses for connecting
storage subsystems or devices to hosts using host tape transport interface (TTI) An interface to
bus adapters. See also SCSI-2, SCSI-3. control/monitor tape movement.
SNMP See Simple Network Management target (1) A SCSI device that performs an input/
Protocol. output operation requested by the initiator. (2) A
marker on components in the library storage
standby (PTP) The library attached to a master module used by the robot for calibration during
PTP library and under the control of the master audits.
PTP.
terminator power (TERMPWR) A SCSI bus
stoplock A servo stopped condition, holding the signal for device termination networks.
motor in a fixed position by electronically locking
onto a tachometer line. Synonyms: Locked-on-a- TERMPWR See terminator power.
Line, Detent.
theta motor The motor responsible for the lateral
storage cells (1) The slots where cartridge tapes movement of the hand mechanism in the tape
are kept in the library. (2) A location where data library.
cartridges are kept in the library. (3) The locations
where cartridges are kept in the library. thumbscrew The large, cylindrical, rough-edged
handle on the rear of a drive tray that, when a
StorageTek Framework Library Monitor An person turn it, lets the person secure the drive to
optional interface that monitors several SCSI- the drive column.
attached libraries.
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet
StorageTek L-Series Library Admin An Protocol (1) This is the basic set of
optional interface that simulates internet browser communication protocols used on the Internet. (2)
operation for the library. A set of communication protocols that supports
peer-to-peer connectivity functions for both local
StorageTek Library Monitor Provides sharing

Glossary
and wide area networks. (IBM) volume A data carrier that mounts and dismounts
as a unit; for example, a reel of magnetic tape or a
disk pack.
U
volume serial number (VOLSER) (1) An
Ultra SCSI An enhancement of SCSI that results alphanumeric label that the host software uses to
in doubling the throughput speeds to identify a volume. It attaches to the spine of a
20 MB/s for 8-bit SCSI and 40 MB/s for 16-bit cartridge and is both human- and machine-
SCSI. readable. (2) A number in a volume label assigned
Ultra2 SCSI An enhancement of SCSI that when a volume is prepared for use in a system.
results in doubling the throughput speeds to (IBM) (3) A six-character alphanumeric label used
40 MB/s for 8-bit SCSI and 80 MB/s for 16-bit to identify a volume.
SCSI. The SCSI specification only recognizes LVD VOLSER See volume serial number.
Ultra2 SCSI at this speed with a maximum
allowable cable length of 12 m (39 ft).
W
Ultra3 SCSI A form of SCSI capable of transfers
up to 160 MB/s. There is no single ended or high warning count A user-determined limit that
voltage differential Ultra3 SCSI specification. indicates the number of times a cleaning cartridge
Specifications only define wide, 16-bit, SCSI will be used before it must be exported from the
buses. library.
Ultrium The single hub implementation of the watchdog timer A timer which must be
LTO specification for tape storage devices. refreshed before it expires. If not refreshed, an
NMI is generated, indicating that the functional
uninterruptible power supply (1) A power firmware has failed to execute properly.
supply that includes a battery to maintain power in
the event of a power outage. (2) A buffer between write-protect (WP) (1) To restrict the writing
utility power and the load that maintains, onto a data set, file, or storage area of a user or
uninterrupted or sustained, power during program not authorized to do so. (2) To set the
outages. switch on a cartridge tape to prevent data from
being written on the tape. Reading data is still
unrecoverable error Error condition that cannot possible. (3) To set the switch on a cartridge to
be automatically corrected and which requires prevent data from being written on the tape. See
external intervention for possible correction. It also file-protect.
causes termination of a job, program, or hardware
function.
Z
V Z carriage (1) The assembly that moves the hand
vertically up and down the Z-column to the
vectored interrupt (VI) An interrupt which storage cells, the drives, and the cartridge access
directly generates an ID of the cause of the port in a library storage module or library. (2) The
interrupt and places it on the bidirectional bus for portion of the robot on which the hand rests.
the microprocessor to read.
Z column The column which allows the hand
VOLID Volume identification. See volume serial mechanism in the tape library to move vertically.
number.

Glossary
Z motor (1) The mechanism that moves the hand

assembly vertically in a library storage module or
library. (2) The motor responsible for the vertical
movement of the hand assembly in the library.

Glossary

Index
Numerics cartridge expiration, 5-32

cartridge life, 5-31
10000. See T10000 cleaning cartridge
16-bit counters, library statistics, C-6 requirements, 5-28
32-bit counters, library statistics, C-7 described, 5-27, 5-31
3580. See IBM Ultrium enabling, 5-28
8-bit counters, library statistics, C-5 warning count, 5-31
9840. See T9840 Automated Cartridge System Library Software. See
9940. See T9940 ACSLS
A B
access control, SNMP, B-4 backup resource monitor
ACSLS description, L1400M, D-97
addressing rules, 5-10 software specifications, L1400M, D-98
client indirect operation, 1-7 bar code, calibration label, 5-42
ESCON operation requirement, 1-26, 1-27 baud rate, CLI (CSE) port, 5-50
PTP operation, 3-2, 5-10 bloqueo, seguridad, xlvii
publications, xxv bridge. See fiber rack component installation
addresses browser
library Fibre Channel, 5-11 Microsoft Explorer, 1-8
library IP, 5-21 Netscape, 1-8
library SCSI ID, 5-10 BULL, 50-to-68 pin connector, 4-5, 4-6
network gateway, 5-21
advertencia
carga pesada, 2-10 C
equipos del bastidor en la biblioteca, xlii, xliii cables
mensajes en el manual, 2-xxii control-side connection, 4-9
advertencia, descripción, 2-xxii drive column power, 4-17
aggregation fiber installation, 4-14
disabling, D-83 fiber-optic part numbers/lengths, 4-12
enabling, D-76 LVD required conversion bill, 2-52, 4-8
requirements, D-76 open fiber control (OFC), 1-25
AIX software, 1-7 power configurations, 4-16
alert messages in manual, xxii PTP, 3-10, 3-15, 3-20, A-10
arbitrated loop, Fibre Channel, 1-26 RJ45, 2-2
arm safety, xxix RJ45-to-DB9 adapter, 5-48
asterisk, on operator panel, explained, 5-32 SCSI
audit 50-to-68 pin cables, 4-5, 4-6
conditions, 5-43 68-pin jackscrew connector, 4-4
definition, 5-42 drive column connection, 2-48
failed media checking message, 5-43 drive connections, 4-11
reserved cells, 5-44 length restrictions, 1-21
Auto Clean
95843 Revision AA Index-1

Index
special adapters, 4-7 DLT/SDLT, 6-2

universal, 4-8 T10000, 6-4
SCSI (for PTP), 3-22, 3-23 T9840, 6-3
server connection, 4-9 T9940, 6-3
cables de fibra óptica Ultrium, 6-5
conectores, xli diagnostic
instalación, xli locations, 6-13
manipulación, xlii labeling, 6-11
calibration loading into arrays, 6-22
barcode label, 5-42 loading into CAP, 6-24
camera, 5-42 Ultrium codes, 6-7
theta, 5-41 cartridge access port. See CAP, 1-8
vision, 5-42 cartridges
vision, decal location, 5-42 dismounting from drive manually, 6-17
Z motor, 5-41 manual mounting of, 6-16
camera caution
calibration, 5-42 component
operation, 1-29 damage, 2-22, 2-34, 2-36, 2-37, 2-42, 2-43, 2-
CAP 45, 2-47, 2-48
elements, L700, A-2-, A-9 demo mode, 6-21
loading, 6-24 DLT damage, 2-31, 6-14
magazine numbering, 5-37 equipment damage, 5-49, 5-51
magazine retention cover, 5-30 hand-camera damage, 2-17
operation, 6-24 heavy load, 2-19
optional, 1-10 messages in manual, xxii
standard, 1-8 performance degradation, 2-31
CAP usage, library statistics, C-8 personal injury, 2-8
capacity possible head injury, 2-20
additional (L1400M) rack limitations, xxxii, xxxiii
configuring, D-18 safety precautions, xxviii
softkey, D-26 SCSI types on same bus, 1-23
L700 maps, A-2-, A-9 system degradation, 4-11, 5-8, 6-11, 6-13
maps, 5-2-, 5-5 tape damage, 6-14
theta stop locations wait to connect to network, 2-32, 2-35
PTP library, 3-2 cells
standalone library, 2-19 cleaning cartridge, 6-12
variations, 1-2, 5-1 drop-off, 6-12
variations (L1400M), D-1 illustrated, A-2, A-9
capacity configuration (L1400M), D-12 in-transit, 6-12
cartridge reserved, 6-12
cleaning See also elements
asterisk on operator panel, 5-33 Certance Ultrium
auto features, 5-27 installation, 2-44
exporting cartridge, 5-32 terminating power, 2-41, 2-44
importing cartridge, 5-29 clean
location, 6-13 Auto Clean feature
requirements, 5-28 defined, 5-27
components enabling/disabling, 5-28

Index
cleaning cartridge partitions

asterisk on operator panel, 5-33 adding first, D-42
expiration, 5-32 adding next, D-55
exporting through CAP, 5-32 CAP slots, D-50, D-65
importing through CAP, 5-29 deleting, D-68
label example enabling, D-37
DLT/SDLT/DLT-S4, 6-10 requirements, D-35
LTO Ultrium, 6-10 PTP, 5-9
T10000, 6-10 RISC System/6000 workstation, 4-10
T9x40, 6-10 single drive column power cable, 4-17
manually installing, 5-29 slot balancing, D-27
reserved cell location, 6-12 SNMP, B-6
Ultrium 1, 6-5 two drive column power cables, 4-17, 4-18
Ultrium 2, 6-6 conventions in manual, xxiii
warning count, 5-31 conversion bills
cleaning cartridge label LVD operation, 2-55
DLT/SDLT/DLT-S4, 6-10 rack cooling, 1-10, 1-18
LTO, 6-10 redundant AC power option, 1-10, 1-20
T10000, 6-10 cooling
T9x40, 6-10 clearance, 2-3
cleaning. See Auto Clean and cartridge, cleaning conversion bill, 1-18
clearance rack area, 2-56
cooling, 2-3 rack area conversion bill, 1-17
service area, 2-5 CSC. See Client Server Component
CLI (CSE) port CSE
described, 1-8 diagnostic tests, 6-18
firmware loading, 5-50 DOS diagnostic cable, 2-2
SNMP commands, B-6 interface connections, 4-21
Client Server Component (CSC), ESCON port
requirement, 1-26, 1-27 baud rate, 6-18
client, server indirect, 1-7 connector, A-10
command line interface. See CLI (CSE) port SNMP commands, B-6
configuration updating firmware, 5-48
aggregation required tools, 2-2
disabling, D-83 Customer Resource Center (CRC), xxvi
enabling, D-76 Customer Services Engineer. See CSE
requirements, D-76
Auto Clean, 5-27
cleaning cartridge life, 5-31
D
DNS entries, 5-23 data cartridge
dWWN, 5-24 label example
Fibre Channel port address, 5-11 DLT/SDLT/DLT-S4, 6-8
L1400M, D-12 LTO Ultrium, 6-8
adding additional capacity (SN3300 T10000, 6-8
firmware version 5.6.10), D-18 T9x40, 6-8
adding additional capacity (SN3300 data cartridge label
firmware version 5.6.43 or higher), D-22 DLT/SDLT/DLT-S4, 6-8
library. See Chapter 5 LTO Ultrium, 6-8

Index
T10000, 6-8 S4 Product Manual, xxiv

T9x40, 6-8 SCSI direct connections, 4-11
DB9 adapter, part number, 2-2 SDLT 220 and 600 Product
decal, vision calibration, 5-42 Manuals, 2-xxiv
DES terminating power, DLT, 2-31
kit de puesta a tierra, contenido, xlv terminating power, DLT-S4 drive, 2-35
precauciones y prevención, xlv terminating power, S4 drive, 2-35
procedimientos a seguir durante tareas de installing Y-cable, 2-32, 2-35
mantenimiento o servicio técnico, xlv manual dismounting of, 6-17
diagnostic cartridge manually mounting of, 6-16
label example DNS
DLT/SDLT/DLT-S4, 6-9 configuration, 5-23
LTO Ultrium, 6-9 SNMP diagram, B-3
T10000, 6-9 Documents on CD, xxvii
T9x40, 6-9 domain name service. See DNS
diagnostic cartridge label DOS
DLT/SDLT/DLT-S4, 6-9 adapter cable for PC, 5-48
LTO Ultrium, 6-9 firmware transfer method, 5-49
T10000, 6-9 download, firmware
T9x40, 6-9 editions, 5-48
diagnostic cartridges file types, 5-45
reserved cell location, 6-12 methods, 5-45
Ultrium 1 options, 5-46
label, 6-5 drives
Ultrium 2 column power cables, 4-17
label, 6-6 configuration screen, explained, 5-16, 5-18
diagnostic tests information on operator panel, 5-37
from operator pane, 6-18 numbering, internal, 5-16
laptop initiated, 6-18 See also individual model types
listed, 6-18 single drive column power cable, A-12
diagram two drive column power cables, A-13
drive column (two power cables), 4-18 dynamic Worldwide Name
L700 wall elements, A-2-, A-9 configuration record, 5-9
library block, A-12, A-13 explained/enabling, 5-24
MPC/MPCL card, A-10
differential
library jumper setting, 2-53
E
DLT elbow safety, xxix
cartridge elements, L700 library, A-2-, A-9
components, 6-2 enabling capacity on demand, L1400M, D-13
label, 6-2 ESCON
drive library firmware requirement, 1-15
7000/8000 Product Manuals, xxiv software requirements, 1-26, 1-27
combinations, 2-24 ESD
feature numbers, 1-14 grounding kit, contents, xxxiv
in flux condition, 5-44 precautions and practices, xxxiv
installation, 2-24 procedures to follow when servicing, xxxiv
load handle cycling, 5-44 Ethernet

Index
client indirect operation, 1-7 switched fabric, 1-25

connector, 2-54 T10000 address, 5-16
DNS, B-3 T9840 address, 5-16
SNMP, B-1, B-2 T9940 address, 5-16
viewing the address, 5-20 Ultrium 2 cleaning cartridge code, 6-6
etiqueta de producto láser, xl Ultrium 3 cleaning cartridge code, 6-6
etiqueta, producto láser, xl worldwide IDs (library), 5-12
expansion frame firmware
elements, A-2-, A-9 Auto Clean, 5-27
feature number, 1-10 cleaning cartridge life, 5-31
installation, 2-18 DOS transfer, 5-49
expiration, cleaning cartridges, 5-32 ESCON requirement, 1-15
hyperterminal transfer, 5-50
Framework Monitor. See StorageTek L-Series
F Library Framework Monitor
Failed Media Checking message, 5-43 FSC dictionary, 5-50, 5-51
fast load, option, 5-13
fault symptom code. See FSC G
features
library, 1-10 Global Services Support Tools, xxvii
optional, 1-10 grace period, SNMP, B-4
tape drives, 1-15 grounding
fiber for safety, xxviii
IBM Ultrium 1 feature number, 1-15 kit, xxxiv
IBM Ultrium 2 feature number, 1-15 procedures, xxxvi
library feature number, 1-10
rack component installation, 2-55
See also fiber-optic cables, Fibre Channel
H
T10000 feature number, 1-15 hand safety, xxix
T9840 feature number, 1-15 hand-camera
T9940 feature number, 1-15 components, 1-29
fiber-optic cables described, 1-29
(OFC) open fiber control, 1-25 illustrated, 2-18
connector type, 1-25 initialization, 5-41
connectors, xxxi testing, 5-42
handling, xxxii hardcopy publications, xxvii
installation, xxxi Hewlett Packard. See HP Ultrium
library connection, 4-15, 4-16 High Voltage Differential. See HVD
library interface requirements, 4-12 host bus adapter (HBA)
part numbers/lengths, 4-12 address ranges, 5-10
specifications, 1-25 requirement for HVD/LVD, 1-1
Fibre Channel HP Ultrium
1MB and 2MG features, 1-10 drive installation
arbitrated loop, 1-26 terminating power, 2-46
drive model/feature codes, 1-14 Ultrium 2 drives, 2-26
dWWN, 5-24 Ultrium 2 feature code, 1-14
library address, 5-12 Ultrium 2 labels, 6-8
port address, 5-11 Ultrium 3 drives, 2-27

Index
Ultrium 4 drives, 2-27 library single-ended setting, 2-53

hub. See Fiber library terminating power, 2-51
HVD SDLT drive, 2-34
cable length restrictions, 1-22 Ultrium drives, 2-40
drive feature numbers, 1-14
requirements described, 1-22
terminator part number, 4-9
K
HVD cabling for PTP, 3-22 kit, grounding, xxxiv
hyperterminal kit, puesta a tierra, xlv
firmware transfer, 5-50
protocol setup, 5-50
L
I L1400M
backup resource monitor, D-97
IBM Ultrium backup resource monitor, software
installation, 2-38 specifications, D-98
Ultrium 1 Fibre Channel feature number, 1-14 capacity configuration, description, D-12
IBM Ultrium 2 feature number, 1-14 capacity variations, D-1
individual drive statistics, C-12 configuring capacity
instalación adding additional capacity (SN3300
cables de fibra óptica, xli firmware 5.6.10), D-18
installation adding additional capacity (SN3300
fiber-optic cables, xxxi firmware 5.6.43, or higher), D-22
SN3300 router, in the L1400M, D-6 enabling capacity on demand, D-13
interface obtaining softkey for additional
Horizon L-Series Library Monitor, 1-8 capacity, D-26
operator panel, 1-8 configuring the library, D-12
RJ-45, 1-8 differences from L700e, D-1
StorageTek Framework Monitor, 1-8, 1-12 installing, SN3300 router, D-6
StorageTek Library Manager, 1-8, 1-12 library elements and diagrams (SN3300
StorageTek L-Series Library Admin, 1-8, 1-11 firmware version 5.6.10), D-88
interface control module, L1400, D-13 library elements and diagrams (SN3300
interlock, safety, xxxvii firmware version 5.6.43, or higher), D-91
interrupción servoalimentada. Consulte ISA library models, D-1
in-transit, reserved cell location, 6-12 L-series library admin, D-97
IP address, setting the, 5-21 managing capacity, D-2
ISA optional features, D-4
generada por el bloqueo de puerta, xlvii optional interfaces, D-5
generada por la tarjeta MPC/MPCL, xlvii standard interfaces, D-5
L1400M/L1400M1
J disabling library aggregation, D-83
enabling library aggregation, D-76
Java Plug-in L1400M1
Library Admin, C-1 cable connections to the L1400M Interface
jumper Control Module, D-10
DLT 7000/8000 terminating power, 2-31 interface control module, D-2, D-12, D-13
DLT-S4 terminating power, 2-35 serial number range, D-1
library differential setting, 2-53 L700 library

Index
elements, A-2-, A-9 SNMP operation, B-1

L700e. See library standard features, 1-8
label, laser product, xxx Web password, 5-15
labels Library Admin. See StorageTek L-Series Library
DLT/SDLT cartridges, 6-2 Admin
illustrated library aggregation
DLT/SDLT, 6-8 disabling on the L1400M/L1400M1, D-83
T10000, 6-8 enabling on the L1400M/L1400M1, D-76
T9840, 6-8 library configuration, L1400M, D-12
Ultrium, 6-8 library elements and diagrams
media, 6-8 L1400M (SN3300 firmware version 5.6.43, or
T10000, 6-4, 6-8 higher), D-91
T9840, 6-3, 6-8 library elements and diagrams, L1400M (SN3300
T9940, 6-3, 6-8 firmware version 5.6.10), D-88
Ultrium, 6-5, 6-8 Library Manager. See StorageTek L-Series Library
Ultrium 2 media ID, 2-26, 6-8 Manager
Ultrium 3 media ID, 2-27 library models, L1400M, D-1
Ultrium 4 media ID, 2-27 library statistics
laser product label, xxx 16-bit counters, C-6
levantamiento 32-bit counters, C-7
procedimientos, xxxix 8-bit counters, C-5
seguridad, xxxix CAP usage, C-8
leveling individual drive statistics, C-12
for PTP installation, 3-9 library-wide drive statistics, C-9
library floor levelers, 3-11 library-wide drive statistics, C-9
library lifting
Auto Clean, 5-27 procedures, xxix
capacities, 1-3 safety, xxix
cleaning cartridge life, 5-31 limits, SCSI cable length, 1-22
described, 1-27 Linear Tape-Open (Ultrium). See specific drive
dimensions and weight, 1-38 manufacturer and Ultrium
Ethernet address, 5-20 logic cards
exchange rate, 1-2 MPB, power connection, A-10
features, 1-10 MPC/MPCL card
Fibre Channel address, 5-12 connectors, A-10
IP address, 5-21 differences described, 1-4
leveling, 3-11 terminating power jumper, 2-53
leveling procedure, 3-9 Low Voltage Differential. See LVD
model numbers, 1-9 L-series library admin, L1400M, D-97
models, 1-9 LVD
network gateway address, 5-21 cable length restrictions, 1-22
optional features, 1-10 cabling for PTP, 3-22, 3-23
Port 0 address, 5-11 library (MPW card) feature number, 1-10
power library conversion bill, 2-55
cables, 1-35 library operation feature for MPC card, 1-10
described, 1-32 library restrictions, 1-21, 2-52, 2-55, 4-8, 4-9
drive cabling, 4-17 required cable conversion bill, 2-52, 4-8
specifications, 1-33 requirements described, 1-22

Index
terminator part number, 4-9 O

OFC (Open Fiber Control). See fiber-optic cables
M and Glossary
magazine, retention cover, 5-30 operation
Management Information Base. See MIB CAP, 6-24
managing capacity, L1400M, D-2 ESCON feature, 1-26, 1-27
mapping, described, D-72 library options, 2-51
matrix switch, 1-21 monitoring status information, 5-33
media power, 1-32
Ultrium 2 ID labels, 2-26, 6-8 subsystem checks, 6-18
Ultrium 3 ID labels, 2-27 operator panel
Ultrium 4 ID labels, 2-27 asterisk, 5-33
media check, CAP status, 5-34 illustrated, 5-7
media check, failed media checking message, 5-43 interface, 1-8
mensajes de alerta en el manual, 2-xxii navigation, 5-6
MIB optional features, L1400M, D-4
described optional interfaces, L1400M, D-5
hierarchy, illustrated, B-5
model number P
DLT, 1-14
library, 1-9 part number
SDLT 220/320, 1-14 cable
T10000, 1-14 68-pin jackscrew, 4-4
T9840, 1-14 68-pin mini-Centronics, 4-6
T9940, 1-14 68-pin SCSI universal, 4-8
Ultrium, 1-14 68-pin VHDCI, 4-5
montaje en bastidor, xlii CSE DOS diagnostic, 4-21
motor Fibre Channel, 4-12, 4-13
theta, 1-27-, 1-28 HVD daisy-chain, 4-2
Z column, 1-27-, 1-28 RJ45, 2-2
MPC/MPCL card, described, 1-4 SCSI adapter, 4-7
MPW (LVD) card, library feature number, 1-10 CSE diagnostic cable, 5-48
Multiple Virtual System, ESCON RJ45 cable, 5-48
requirement, 1-26, 1-27 RJ45-to-DB9 adapter, 2-2, 5-48
MVS. See Multiple Virtual System terminating power, 2-52, 4-9, 4-11
partitioning
adding
N first, D-42
network next, D-55
configuration entries, 5-19 CAP slots, D-50, D-65
DNS configuration, 5-23 deleting, D-68
dWWN, 5-24 enabling, D-37
gateway address, 5-21 requirements, D-35
SNMP, B-1 softkey, D-26
notas, descripción, 2-xxii Partners web site, xxvi
Pass Through Port. See PTP
pass-thru. See PTP
Index-8 Revision AA 95843

Index
password seguridad, xxxviii

StorageTek L-Series Library Admin, 5-15
Web, 5-15
peligro
R
para la vista a causa del láser, xl rack area
personality cooling, 2-56
MPK connector, 2-54 cooling conversion bill, 1-18
status messages, 5-39 cooling option conversion bill, 1-17
viewing, 5-38 rack cooling option, conversion bills, 1-10, 1-18
port address (Fibre Channel), 5-11 rack-mounting, safety, xxxii
power redundant AC power option, conversion
described, 1-32 bills, 1-10, 1-20
drive column, single power cable, 4-17 reserved cells
drive column, two power cables, 4-17 audit, 5-44
PTP, 3-17 illustrated, 6-12
redundant AC power option, 1-10, 1-20 reset
precaución operator panel button, 5-7
carga pesada, 2-19 StorageTek L-Series Library Admin
lesiones físicas, 2-8 password, 5-15
limitaciones del bastidor, xlii, xliii restrictions, SCSI
mensajes en el manual, 2-xxii cable length, 1-22
posibilidad de lesiones en la cabeza, 2-20 connector type, 1-21
precaución, descripción, 2-xxii RISC System/6000, 1-7
precauciones 50-to-68 pin cable, 4-5, 4-6
DES, xlv address ranges, 5-10
manipulación de cables de fibra óptica, xlii library software, 1-7
precauciones de seguridad, xxxviii single-ended cable PN, 4-9
seguridad, xxxviii
precautions
ESD, xxxiv S
handling fiber-optic cables, xxxii
safety, xxviii safety
PTP arm, xxix
attaching the frame, 3-9 fiber optics, xxx
bloqueo de puerta, xlvii general, xxviii
cables, 3-10, 3-15, 3-20 grounding, xxviii
configuration, 5-9 laser product label, xxx
door interlock, xxxvii lifting, xxix
element numbers, A-6-, A-9 rack-mounting, xxxii
installation instructions, 3-1 SCSI
leveling, 3-9 cable length restrictions, 1-22, 4-9
master, 3-4 cabling for PTP, 3-22
power connection, 3-17 channel cables
serial communication connection, 3-18 50-to-68 pin connector, 4-5, 4-6
tools required, 3-6 drive-to-drive, 4-2
puesta a tierra special connector adapters, 4-7
kit, xlv universal, 4-8
procedimientos, xlvi LVD cabling for PTP, 3-22, 3-23
setting drive IDs, 5-16

Index
Type-3 connector, 1-7 software

SDLT ESCON requirements, 1-26, 1-27
cartridge fast load option, 5-13
components, 6-2 RISC System/6000, 1-7
drive server, 1-7
feature numbers, 1-14 SPARC
installing, 2-34 address ranges, 5-10
power switch, 2-33 single-ended cable PN, 4-9
terminating power, 2-34 version requirements, 5-10
seguridad, xlii specifications
brazos, xxxix library
etiqueta de producto láser, xl physical, described, 1-38
fibras ópticas, xl weight, 1-38
general, xxxviii SCSI
levantamiento, xxxix cable length, 1-22
montaje en bastidor, xlii connector type, 1-21
puesta a tierra, xxxviii SPI
seguridad de brazos, xxxix door interlock generated, xxxvii
seguridad de codos, xxxix MPC/MPCL card generated, xxxvii
seguridad de hombros, xxxix standard interfaces, L1400M, D-5
seguridad de manos, xxxix statistics, StorageTek L-Series Library Admin, C-5
seguridad de muñecas, xxxix stops, theta locations, 2-19, 3-2
SER1 port, connector, A-10 StorageTek
serial number range Customer Resource Center (CRC), xxvi
L1400M1, D-1 Documents on CD, xxvii
server e-Partners site, xxvi
ESCON operation, 1-26, 1-27 Global Services Support Tools, xxvii
ESCON requirement, 5-10 hardcopy publications, xxvii
library addresses, 5-10 L-Series Library Admin, C-1
requirements, 5-10 Web site, xxvi
service required LED, defined, 5-7 StorageTek Framework Library Monitor
servo power interrupt. See SPI comparison, 1-13
shoulder safety, xxix described, 1-12
single-ended See also StorageTek L-Series Library Admin,
library jumper setting, 2-53 StorageTek Library Manager
terminator part number, 4-9 StorageTek Library Manager
Small Computer System Interface. See SCSI comparison, 1-13
SNMP, B-6 described, 1-13
access control, B-4 PTP operation, 3-2
commands, B-3 See also StorageTek L-Series Library Admin,
configuration (through CLI port), B-6 StorageTek Framework Library Monitor
configuration (with Library Admin), B-6 StorageTek L-Series Library Admin
configuration (with software application), B-6 comparison, 1-13
for DNS entries, 5-23 configuration, 5-15, 5-27
grace period, B-4 described, 1-8, 1-11
illustrated, B-2 functionality, C-4
softkey, obtaining for additional capacity, installation, C-2
L1400M, D-26 microcode level, C-1

Index
model number, 1-11, 5-27 label, 6-3

MPK connector, 2-54 VOLID reporting, 6-17
overview, C-1 tape
password, 5-15 cartridge labeling, 6-11
personality Module, C-1 cleaning
requirements, C-1 reserved cell, 6-12
screen example, C-3 diagnostic
See also StorageTek Library Manager, reserved cell, 6-12
StorageTek Framework Library Monitor tape. See also cartridge
statistics, C-5 terminating power
status, 5-38 Certance Ultrium, 2-41, 2-44
viewing configuration, 5-38, 5-39 DLT 7000/8000 jumper, 2-31
Web password, 5-15 DLT-S4 jumper, 2-35
subnet mask, 5-22 HP Ultrium, 2-46
Sun. See SPARC library jumper, 2-51
Super DLT. See SDLT SDLT drive, 2-34
switched fabric, Fibre Channel, 1-25 terminator, part numbers, 2-52, 4-11
theta
calibration, 5-41
T motor, 1-27-, 1-28
T10000 stop locations, 2-19, 3-2
cartridge, 6-4 tools
components required for library, 2-2
labels required for PTP, 3-6
drive
combinations, 2-24 U
feature number, 1-14
Fibre Channel address, 5-16 Ultrium
label, 6-4 cartridge
VOLID reporting, 6-17 Ultrium 2 data labels, 6-8
T9840 drives/feature numbers, 1-14
cartridge ordering cartridges, 6-7
components, 6-3 See also Specific drive type (IBM, HP, Certance)
labels, 6-3 Ultrium 1 cartridge
drive label prefixes, 6-5
combinations, 2-24 Ultrium 2 SCSI drives, 2-26
feature number, 1-14 Ultrium 3 SCSI drives, 2-27
Fibre Channel address, 5-16 Ultrium 4 SCSI drives, 2-27
label Ultrium 2
VOLID reporting, 6-17 drive/tape specifics, 2-26, 2-27
T9940 feature code, 1-14
cartridge, 6-3 media ID label, 6-6
components, 6-3 Ultrium 3
labels, 6-3 media ID label, 6-6
drive universal
combinations, 2-24 SCSI cables, 4-8
feature number, 1-14 Unix-based workstation
Fibre Channel address, 5-16 host bus adapter, 1-1

Index
RISC System/6000, 5-10 messages in manual, xxii

SPARC, 5-10 rack equipment in library, xxxii, xxxiii
upside-down tape, 5-43 warning count
cleaning cartridges, 5-31
Web interface See StorageTek L-Series Library
V Admin, StorageTek Framework Library Monitor,
vendor identification See personality StorageTek Library Manager
vision Web password, 5-15
calibration decal, 5-42 wheel studs, locations, 2-7
calibration decal location, 5-42 worldwide ID
Visual Manager library, 5-12
mapping page Port 0, 5-12
mapping page, D-72 wrist safety, xxix
VOLID, reporting for StorageTek drives, 6-17
Z
W Z column, motor, 1-27-, 1-28
wall elements, L700 library, A-2-, A-9 Z motor
warning calibration, 5-41
electrocution hazard, 4-16 power, 1-32
eye hazard from laser, xxx z-modem, firmware download, 5-51
heavy load, 2-10

Sun Microsystems, Inc. 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, CA 95054 USA Phone 1-650-960-1300 or 1-800-555-9SUN Web sun.com
ARGENTINA: 5411-4317-5636 • AUSTRALIA: 1-800-550-786 • AUSTRIA: 43-1-601-26-0 • BALKANS: 301-6188-111 • BELGIUM: 32 2-704 89 83 • BRAZIL: 55-11-51872100 • BRUNEI: 65-216-8333 • CANADA: 1-800-422-8020 (GENERAL); 416-964-2001 (LEARNING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM SALES,TORONTO) • CHILE: 562-372-4500 • COLOMBIA: 571-629-2323
CZECH REPUBLIC: 420 2 33009311 • DENMARK: 45 4556 5040 • EGYPT: 00 202 570 9442 • FINLAND: 358-9-525-561 • FRANCE: 33-1-41-33-17-17 • GERMANY: 49-89-460-08-2788 • GREECE: 30-01-6188101 • HONG KONG: 852-2877-7077 • HUNGARY: 361-202-4415 • INDIA: 91-80-229-8989 • INDONESIA: 65-216-8333 • IRELAND: 353-1-668-4377
ISRAEL: 972-9-9710500 • ITALY: 39-02-9259511 • JAPAN: 81-3-5779-1820 • KOREA: 82-2-3453-6602 • MALAYSIA: 603-2116-1887 • MIDDLE EAST: 00 9714 3366333 • MEXICO: 525-261-0344 • NETHERLANDS: 31-33-4515200 • NEW ZEALAND: 0800-786-338 • NORTH WEST AFRICA: 00 9714 3366333 • NORWAY: FROM NORWAY: 47-22023950, TO NORWAY:
47-23369650 • PAKISTAN: 00-9714-3366333 • PEOPLE'S REPUBLIC OF CHINA: 8610-6803-5588 • PHILIPPINES: 632-885-7867 • POLAND: 48-22-8747848 • PORTUGAL: 351-21-413-4000 • RUSSIA: 7-095-935-8411 • SAUDI ARABIA: 00 9714 3366333 • SINGAPORE: 65-216-8300 • SOUTH AFRICA: 27-11-256-6300 • SPAIN: 34-902-210-412 • SRI LANKA:
65-2168333 • SWEDEN: 46-8-631 22 00 • SWITZERLAND: 41-1-908-90-50 (GERMAN) 41-22-999-0444 (FRENCH) • TAIWAN: 886-2-25185735 • THAILAND: 662-344-6855 • TURKEY: 90 212 335 22 00 • UNITED KINGDOM: 44-1276-416-520 • UNITED STATES: 1-800-422-8020 • VENEZUELA: 582-905-3800 • VIETNAM: 65-216-8333 • WORLDWIDE
HEADQUARTERS: 1-650-960-1300
SUN™ THE NETWORK IS THE COMPUTER

United States and other countries.
©2006 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved. Sun, Sun Microsystems, and the Sun logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the

L700 Instalation Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

L700 Instalation Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sun StorageTek

EC Date Revision Description

95843 Revision AA iii

Summary of Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

Safety, Fiber Optic, and ESD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxviii

Seguridad, fibras ópticas y descargas electrostáticas (DES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxviii

1: General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1

Library SCSI Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

2: Installing the Library and Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

95843 Revision AA vii

Ultrium 2 SCSI and Fibre Channel Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

3: Installing the L700-PTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

viii Revision AA 95843

Allowing Access to Both Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

4: Installing Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Routing the Library Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

5: Configuring the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Auto Clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

CLI Port - DOS Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49

6: Testing the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

A: Library Elements and Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

xii Revision AA 95843

C: StorageTek L-Series Library Admin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

D: L1400M Library Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

95843 Revision AA xiii

Configuring the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12

xiv Revision AA 95843

Figure 1-1. Library Size Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Figure 2-26. Library Control Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54

xvi Revision AA 95843

95843 Revision AA xvii

Table 1-1. Library Capacity Variations per Single Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

xviii Revision AA 95843

95843 Revision AA xix

Chapter 1 “General Information” provides an overview of the L700e Tape Library

95843 Revision AA xxi

xxii Revision AA 95843

Item Example Description of Convention

95843 Revision AA xxiii

L700x/L1400x Tape Library Documentation Part Number

Tape Drive Documentation Part Number

xxiv Revision AA 95843

Publications regarding ACSLS software:

ACSLS Publications Part Number

Publications regarding the APC (AC Uninterruptible Power Source):

APC Power Supply Information Part Number

Publications regarding StorageTek software products:

StorageTek Software Products

Publications regarding other topics:

Other Publications Part Number

95843 Revision AA xxv

StorageTek’s External Web Site

Customer Resource Center

xxvi Revision AA 95843

95843 Revision AA xxvii

xxviii Revision AA 95843

Shoulder, Elbow, Wrist, and Hand Safety

95843 Revision AA xxix

Be especially careful when using optical instruments with this

Laser Product Label

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

xxx Revision AA 95843

95843 Revision AA xxxi

■ Rack Safety and Precautions